Service Documents
UJF-3042 / UJF-3042FX
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
D500552-23
Service Documents > Maintenance Manual Change Tracking
Maintenance Manual Change Tracking
Date
2013.07.18
Manual Ver.
2.3
Remark
Index
Status
Rev.
1.3.1
Added
2.0
New item was added.
5.1.9
Modified
2.1
Explanation was modified.
6.3.9
Added
2.0
Item was added.
6.3.10
Added
2.0
Item was added.
Date
2013.02.08
Index
Status
Changes
Manual Ver.
2.2
Remark
Rev.
Changes
4.2.20
Added
1.0
NACHINE NAME is added.
8.3.1-P3
Modified
2.1
NACHINE NAME is added.
Date
2012.06.06
Index
Status
4.2.19
Added
Date
2011.09.30
Index
Status
Rev.
Manual Ver.
2.1
Remark
Rev.
Changes
Wash tube is added.
Manual Ver.
2.0
Remark
Changes
all
Changed
2.0
Including UJF-3042FX, it was changed to 2 models common document
1.1.5
Modified
2.0
Explanation was modified.
1.2.1
Modified
2.0
Process sequence was modified.
1.2.2
Changed
2.0
"Wiper Exchange” -> “Wiper Cleaning”
1.2.6
Modified
2.0
Process sequence was modified.
1.2.7
Modified
2.0
Process sequence was modified.
1.2.8
Modified
2.0
Process sequence was modified.
1.2.9
Modified
2.0
Process sequence was modified.
1.2.10
Modified
2.0
Process sequence was modified.
2.3.5
Modified
2.0
“List of Connectors” was modified.
4.2.16
Modified
2.0
List was modified.
4.2.19
Deleted
---
An item was deleted.(Nozzle Recovery)
4.3.1
Changed
2.0
Procedures was changed.
5.1.4
Changed
2.0
Parameter was added.
7.1.2
Changed
2.0
“ERROR 605” was changed.
7.1.3
Changed
2.0
“REPLACE WIPER” -> “CLEANING WIPER”
8.3.1
8.3.2
8.3.3
Changed
2.0
Flow was changed.
Date
2011.03.02
Manual Ver.
1.20
Remark
Index
Status
Rev.
3.1.3
Modified
1.1
Process was added.
Changes
3.3.2
Modified
1.1
Process was added.
4.2.3
Modified
1.1
Process was Modified.
6.2.3
Modified
1.1
Process was added.
6.3.6
Added
1.1
“IMPORTANT“ was added.
© 2013 MIMAKI ENGINEERING CO.,LTD.
Maintenance Manual Change Tracking P.1
Service Documents > Maintenance Manual Change Tracking
Maintenance Manual Change Tracking
Date
2011.03.02
Manual Ver.
1.20
Remark
Index
Status
Rev.
7.1.2
P1,9,10
Added
1.2
Dtail of the “ERROR 12e” was added.
7.1.2
P8
Added
1.2
“ERROR 70a” was added.
7.2.2
Added
1.1(P1)
1.0(P2~)
8.2.1
Modified
1.2
Operation Flow was changed. (Because F/W was revised)
8.3.2
Modified
1.2
Operation Flow was changed. (Because F/W was revised)
Changes
“Outline” was Modified.
“Countermeasure” was Modified.
Date
2010.08.27
Index
Status
Rev.
Manual Ver.
1.10
Remark
1.1.1
~
1.1.5
Added
1.0
New item was added.
1.2.1
~
1.2.10
Added
1.0
New item was added.
2.1.1
Modified
1.1
Block diagram was changed.
(Because the specifications of the LED - UV device were changed.)
2.3.1
~
2.3.11
Added
1.0
New item was added.
3.1.1
Modified
1.1
Process was added.
3.5.1
~
5.3.2
Added
1.0
New item was added.
4.2.1
Modified
1.1
Function was added.
4.2.2
Modified
1.1
Function was added.
Head Back/Forth Adjusting Pattern was added.
4.2.3
Modified
1.1
Adjustment standard was changed.
4.2.5
Modified
1.1
Process was added.
Changes
4.2.15
Modified
1.1
Adjustment standard was changed.
4.2.18
Modified
1.1
Function was added.
4.2.19
Added
1.0
New item was added.
5.1.2
Modified
1.1
Function was added.
5.1.4
Modified
1.1
Function was added.
5.1.5
~
5.1.15
Added
1.0
New item was added.
5.2.1
Added
1.0
New item was added.
6.1.3
Added
1.0
New item was added.
6.2.8
~
6.29
Added
1.0
New item was added.
6.3.1
Modified
1.1
Process was changed.
6.3.8
Added
1.0
New item was added.
6.5.1
~
6.5.5
Added
1.0
New item was added.
6.7.1
Modified
1.1
Process was changed.(Because the specifications of the LED - UV device were changed.)
© 2013 MIMAKI ENGINEERING CO.,LTD.
Maintenance Manual Change Tracking P.2
Service Documents > Maintenance Manual Change Tracking
Maintenance Manual Change Tracking
Date
2010.08.27
Index
Status
Rev.
7.1.2
Modified
1.1
Error message was added.
7.1.3
Modified
1.1
Warning message was added.
7.1.4
Modified
1.1
SYSTEM HALT was added.
7.2.1
~
7.2.2
Added
1.0
New item was added.
8.2.1
~
8.2.5
Modified
1.1
Operation Flow was changed. (Because F/W was revised)
8.3.1
~
8.3.3
Modified
1.1
Operation Flow was changed. (Because F/W was revised)
Date
2010.04.08
Index
Status
Released
Manual Ver.
1.10
Remark
Changes
Manual Ver.
Rev.
1.00
Remark
Changes
New issued
© 2013 MIMAKI ENGINEERING CO.,LTD.
Maintenance Manual Change Tracking P.3
Maintenance Manual > Maintenance Manual Contents
Model UJF-3042/FX Issued 2010.08.27 Revised 2013.07.18 F/W ver
1.80 / 1.00
Maintenance Manual Contents
1 Operating Principle
2.2
3.2 Driving Parts
3.2.1 Replacement of Z-Driving Screw
3.2.2 Replacement of Tabel Absorption Fan
1.1 Basic Operation
1.1.1 Sequence at POWER ON
1.1.2 Sequence at POWER OFF
1.1.3 Work Area Sensor
1.1.4 LED-UV UNIT
1.1.5 600cc Cartridge
3.3 Electrical Parts
3.3.1 Replacement of Main PCB
3.3.2 Replacement of 3042 Slider Relay
PCB Assy
3.3.3 Replacement of ID Contact PCB
1.2 Maintenance Function
1.2.1 Carriage out
1.2.2 Wiper Cleaning
1.2.3 Wiper Bottle
1.2.4 Waste Ink Tank
1.2.5 Cartridge Exchange
1.2.6 Filter Check
1.2.7 NOZZLE WASH
1.2.8 Discharge way washing
1.2.9 CUSTODY WASH
1.2.10 HEAD MAINTENANCE
1.3 Ink System
1.3.1 Monitoring of the Amount of
Remaining Ink
3.4 Sensors
3.5 UV UNIT
3.5.1 Replacement of LEDUV Irradiation
Assy
3.5.2 Replacement of LEDUVx2-DRIVE
PCB Assy
4 Adjustment
4.1 Operation Matrix
4.2 Adjustment Items
4.2.1 PRINT ADJUST
4.2.2 HEAD ADJUST
4.2.3 CAPPING
4.2.4 ADJUST WIPER
4.2.5 HEAD WASH(#ADJUST)
4.2.6 HEAD ID
4.2.7 HEAD TEMP
4.2.8 EXCHANGE LED UV
4.2.9 SERIAL No.
4.2.10 DEALER No.
4.2.11 ORIGIN ADJUST
4.2.12 TABLE ADJUST
4.2.13 SET QUALITY
4.2.14 FEED COMP.2
4.2.15 ANGLE ADJUST
4.2.16 DEFAULT SET
4.2.17 Head Voltage Adjustment
4.2.18 Shot Count Reset
4.2.19 Wash Tube
4.2.20 MACHINE NAME(UJF-3042FX)
2 Electrical Parts
2.1 Block Diagram
2.1.1 Internal Connection Diagram
2.2 Operating Description
2.3 Circuit Board Specifications
2.3.1 Power Supply PCB Assy.
2.3.2 Main PCB Assy.
2.3.3 GP KeyBoard PCB Assy.
2.3.4 3042 Station3 PCB Assy.
2.3.5 3042 Slider Relay PCB Assy.
2.3.6 3042 Pump3 PCB Assy.
2.3.7 ID Contact PCB CN032 Assy.
2.3.8 3042 Slider PCB Assy.
2.3.9 Encorder PCB Assy.
2.3.10 LEDUVx2-DRIVE PCB Assy.
2.3.11 Water cool LED_1inch-UVLED PCB
Assy.
4.3 Mechanical Adjustment
4.3.1 Adjustment of theTable Flatness
4.3.2 Carriage height Adjustment
4.3.3 Carriage Front/Rear Tilt Adjustment
4.3.4 LED-UV Unit Height Adjustment
4.3.5 Work Area Sensor Height Adjustment
3 Workflow
3.1 Ink Related Parts
3.1.1 Replacement of Head Unit
3.1.2 Replacement of Dumper
3.1.3 Replacement of Pump Head
3.1.4 Replacement of Cartridge Guide
Assy.
3.1.5 Replacement of Cartridge Coupling
Assy.
© 2013 MIMAKI ENGINEERING CO.,LTD.
Rev.
Remark
5 Test
5.1 Test Items
5.1.1 CHECK PATTERN
5.1.2 AGEING
5.1.3 SENSOR TEST
Maintenance Manual Contents R.2.2
P.1
Maintenance Manual > Maintenance Manual Contents
Model UJF-3042/FX Issued 2010.08.27 Revised 2013.07.18 F/W ver
1.80 / 1.00
Maintenance Manual Contents
5.1.4 PARAM. DRAW
5.1.5 MEMORY CHECK
5.1.6 Key Board Test
5.1.7 LCD Test
5.1.8 Temperature Check
5.1.9 UV LEVEL Check
5.1.10 INK IC Check
5.1.11 INK TEST
5.1.12 ENCORDER Check
5.1.13 EVENT LOG
5.1.14 Message Check
5.1.15 HW Test
5.2 Other Test
5.2.1 Ink route leak confirmation procedure
6 Disassembly and Reassembly
6.1 Covers
6.1.1 Cover Layout
6.1.2 Key Panel Assy
6.1.3 “Tube_FFC Holder” Stick the
Protection tape
6.2 Ink-related Parts
6.2.1 Head Assy
6.2.2 Dumper
6.2.3 Pump Head
6.2.4 Station Assy.
6.2.5 Wipe Suction Pump Assy.
6.2.6 Cartridge Guide Assy.
6.2.7 Cartridge Coupling Assy.
6.2.8 Capping
6.2.9 Wiper unit Assy(Belt, Sensor)
6.3 Driving Parts
6.3.1 X-axis Motor Assy
6.3.2 Y-axis Motor
6.3.3 Table
6.3.4 Z-Driving Screw
6.3.5 Slider Relay Cooling Fan Assy
6.3.6 Mist Suction Fan Assy
6.3.7 Tabel Absorption Fan
6.3.8 Linear Encorder Scale
6.3.9 X Gear Box
6.3.10 Motor Coupling
6.4 PCBs
6.4.1 Power Supply PCB Assy
6.4.2 Main PCB
6.4.3 3042 Slider Relay PCB Assy
6.4.4 3042 Station 3 PCB Assy
6.4.5 Slider PCB
6.4.6 3042 Pump 3 PCB Assy
6.4.7 ID Contact PCB
6.4.8 Keyboard PCB
6.4.9 Linear Encoder PCB
© 2013 MIMAKI ENGINEERING CO.,LTD.
Rev.
Remark
2.2
6.5 Sensors
6.5.1 X origin sensor
6.5.2 Z origin sensor
6.5.3 Work area sensor
6.5.4 Cover sensor
6.5.5 Table Cover sensor
6.6 Other Electrical Parts
6.7 UV Parts
6.7.1 LED UV UNIT
6.7.2 UV Cooling Unit
6.7.3 Cooling Water Pump
6.7.4 Radiator Fan Assy.
6.8 Greasing
7 Troubleshooting
7.1 Details on Errors and Malfunctions
7.1.1 Concerning Errors and Malfunctions
7.1.2 List of Error Messages
7.1.3 List of Warning Messages
7.1.4 List of SYSTEM HALT
7.1.5 Troubles Without Messages
Displayed
7.2 Detailed Methods of Coping with the
Malfunctions
7.2.1 Cannot start for “SYSTEM HALT(1)
11c:SLDR PCB H”
7.2.2 Discharging defect cannot be
improved by cleaning.
8 Operation Flow
8.1 Basic Operation
8.1.1 Start
8.2 Print Mode
8.2.1 LOCAL / REMOTE
8.2.2 FUNCTION
8.2.3 SETUP
8.2.4 MAINTENANCE
8.2.5 MACHINE SETUP
8.3 Service Mode
8.3.1 #ADJUST
8.3.2 #TEST
8.3.3 #PARAMETER
Maintenance Manual Contents R.2.2
P.2
Maintenance Manual > Operating Principle > Basic Operation
1. Operating Principle
1.1
Basic Operation
1.2
1.3
Maintenance Function Ink System
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
© 2011 MIMAKI ENGINEERING CO.,LTD.
Maintenance Manual > Operating Principle > Basic Operation > Sequence at POWER ON
Model UJF-3042/FX Issued 2010.08.27 Revised 2011.09.30 F/W ver 1.80 / 1.00 Remark
Rev.
1.1.1 Sequence at POWER ON
2.0
 Sequence at turning on the power supply
The flow after turning on the power supply is as below:
No.
Item
Process content
1
CPU, H/W default setting
2
S-RAM check
Read/ Write check of S-RAM
This is not activated when an error has been detected.
3
F-ROM check
Hash check of F-ROM
When a hash error occurs, 7-seg LED on the main PCB lights and “P” is displayed.
4
Voltage check
Power Supply voltage check of Main PCB.
In the case of the abnormal detection, 7-seg LED on the main PCB lights.
5
FPGA configuration
Configuration other than the slider PCB
6
SD-RAM check
Read/ Write check of SD-RAM
ERROR112 is displayed and system is shut down when an error has been detected.
7
Version infomation display
Turns OFF the power supply for the UV lamp (+35V) by clearing data.
8
Parameter check
Parameter initialization at the initial startup after F/W version upgrade
1
2
Initializes the parameters below:
• MAINTENANCE
• SERVO
• INK2
• WAVE1
• WAVE2
• SCAN
In addition, performs check sum in the parameter area, displays ERROR202 (parameter error) and
shuts down the system.
9
Initial operation
FPGA configuration of the slider PCB and origin detection operation
3
4
5
6
7
8
© 2011 MIMAKI ENGINEERING CO.,LTD.
1.1.1
R.2.0
P.1
Maintenance Manual > Operating Principle > Basic Operation > Sequence at POWER OFF
Model UJF-3042/FX Issued 2010.08.27 Revised 2011.09.30 F/W ver 1.80 / 1.00 Remark
Rev.
1.1.2 Sequence at POWER OFF
2.0
 Sequence at turning OFF the power supply
The flow until the power supply is turned OFF is as below:
No.
Item
Process content
1
UV Power OFF
Turns OFF the power supply of the UV lamp unit.
2
Moving to local
If the status is other than local, changes it to local.
3
Saving parameter
Saves the parameters below when the power supply is turned OFF.
• Saving the parameter value
• Backup of the parameter to F-ROM
In addition, performs check sum and displays ERROR817 (save area error) when an error occurs.
4
Moving head to capping
position
Moves the head to the capping position if it stays away from that position.
* Depending on the mode, it may not return to the capping position.
5
Turn Power of SLIDER PCB
OFF
6
Saving event log
7
Power OFF
1
2
Saves turning OFF the power supply to the event log.
3
4
5
6
7
8
© 2011 MIMAKI ENGINEERING CO.,LTD.
1.1.2
R.2.0
P.1
Maintenance Manual > Operating Principle > Basic Operation > Work Area Sensor
Model UJF-3042/FX Issued 2010.08.27 Revised 2011.09.30 F/W ver 1.80 / 1.00 Remark
Rev.
1.1.3 Work Area Sensor
2.0
 Outline
This sensor is set to prevent the head from being damaged. It detects the work coming out or warpage etc. on the table
to stop the operation before the head hits that part.
 Figure of constitution
Head
Sensor for receiving light
Basic head gap: 1.5mm
STOP!
1
Light axis position
Below 0.5mm from the bottom
surface of the head
Sensor for floodlighting
2
Table
 Operating Principle
3
1 The light axis of the obstacle sensor is set below 0.5mm from the bottom surface of the nozzle.
2 When LED light of the sensor (visible light) is shaded by the obstacle, the operation is terminated.
3 Before the printing operation, checks whether there is no obstacle by moving the Y-Bar back and forth with the
head being stored in the station.
4
5
6
7
8
© 2011 MIMAKI ENGINEERING CO.,LTD.
1.1.3
R.2.0
P.1
Maintenance Manual > Operating Principle > Basic Operation > LED-UV UNIT
Model UJF-3042/FX Issued 2010.08.27 Revised 2011.09.30 F/W ver 1.80 / 1.00
Rev.
Remark
1.1.4 LED-UV UNIT
2.0
 Outline
This UV unit is a lamp using LED and water circulation is adopted for heat release.
 Figure of constitution
3042 UVDRV Control
Assy
LEDUVx2 DRV PCB
1
Radiator
Water Cooling Fan Assy
Float Switch
LEDUV Iirradiation Assy
(Water cooled system)
2
Water cooling Diaphragm Assy
DRV PCB Cooling Fan
(For cooling the Drive PCB)
Float
(For visual
check)
Water Cooling System
LED-UV UNIT
3
 Operation principle of LED-UV unit
The UV unit is equipped with eight LED-UVs, and you can control luminance and ON/OFF individually.
4
The flow while the UV unit operates is as below:
No.
Item
Process content
1
Start drawing
Turn ON the UV lamp power supply (+35V) and the LEDUVx2 DRV PCB cooling FAN.
2
During drawing
Controls the amount of light and ON/OFF of each LED-UV, and lighting area, and detects errors during lighting.
When an abnormality has been detected, the error below occurs.
ERROR706 UV UNIT OVER HEAT (The temperature in the UV unit became higher than the specific value.)
5
ERROR708 UV THERMISTOR BRK (The thermistor (temperature sensor) in the UV unit came down.)
ERROR70a LED UV CURRENT (LEDUV is broken or the detected current is abnormal.)
3
Abort of drawing
Turn OFF the UV lamp power supply (+35V) by DATA CLEAR.
4
End drawing
Turn OFF all LED-UVs after drawing is completed.
Turn OFF the UV lamp power supply (+35V).
6
 Operation principle of water cooled system
7
This is a system to cool the UV unit.
Controls the amount of cooling water by monitoring the temperature of the thermistor on the UVLED PCB.
No.
1
Item
Waiting status
Online state
Process content
1. Monitors the temperature of the UVLED PCB.
2. Monitors the temperature of the UVLED PCB and if it becomes 30 degrees and above,
rotates the water cooled pump and the radiator FAN. (You can set three levels of the flow
volume for the water cooled pump depending on the temperature of the UVLED.)
3. Monitors the temperature of the UVLED PCB and if it becomes 30 degrees and below,
stops the water cooled pump and the radiator FAN.
4. When an abnormality has been detected in the water cooled system, the error below occurs.
• ERROR705 WATER LACK (Water in the cooling water buffer tank became less.)
© 2011 MIMAKI ENGINEERING CO.,LTD.
1.1.4
R.2.0
8
P.1
Maintenance Manual > Operating Principle > Basic Operation > 600cc Cartridge
Model UJF-3042/FX Issued 2010.08.27 Revised 2011.09.30 F/W ver 1.80 / 1.00 Remark
Rev.
1.1.5 600cc Cartridge
2.0
 Outline
A 600cc-cartridge can be used for this machine.
It is not necessary to change the mechanism etc. Only you have to do is to insert it into the ink slot as is the case with
the normal cartridge.
In addition, as the control is changed to the dedicated one for 600cc-cartridge, the recognition method for the remaining amount of ink is also changed. Therefore, the operation will be changed. Here, the basic principle of controlling
the remaining amount of ink is mainly explained. (For the details of operation, refer to the user’s manual as it is a
user’s level thing.)
1
 Operating Principle
 Setting cartridge
1 Actually measure the weight of an empty cartridge (without the IC chip/ink pack).
2
2 Set up the 600cc-cartridge.
Put the ink pack in the empty cartridge and attach the IC chip.
3 Set the 600cc-cartridge in the ink slot.
4 The main body recognizes that it is a “600cc-cartridge” from the IC chip.
5 Enter the “CASE WEIGHT”, the empty cartridge weight measured in the Step 1 above.
The LCD is changed to prompt you to enter the “CASE WEIGHT” for the slot on which the 600cc-cartridge was set.
3
This will be the value to calculate the remaining amount of ink from total weight of the cartridges set subsequently.
4
 Recognizing remaining amount of ink
* Operable "After ink filling", "After Ink level Low occurs", "After Ink level end occurs" and
"When weight has not been entered".
1 Perform “CART WEIGHT ”.
2 Pull the 600cc-cartridge from the slot and actually measure total weight of the 600cc-cartridge.
3 Enter the actually measured value of the Step 2) above in the “WEIGHT”. (*1)
4 The amount of consumption by normal printing, cleaning, etc. is counted in the F/W depending on the number
of shots and the rotating number of pumps, and they are taken from the “WEIGHT” of the Step 3) above.
 Judgment of ink near end or ink end
1 If the subtracted value of the amount of ink consumption calculated by the F/W described above becomes
“60cc” and below, the status of the cartridge is in the “Ink Level Low” and it is recognized as an unusable cartridge once. You cannot perform printing.
2 Pull the relevant cartridge out, measure total weight of the cartridge and enter the actual measured value. (*1)
5
6
3 If the value subtracted "CASE WEIGHT" initially entered from the actual measured value is 30cc and above,
you can use it again.
-- If the value is between 25cc and 30cc, you can use it again, however, it is recognized as "Ink near end" and
you cannot perform cleaning nor ink filling operation.
-- If the value is 25cc and below, it is recognized as "Ink Level end" and you cannot use it.
7
4 When the remaining amount of ink count inside becomes 30cc and below, it is recognized as "Ink near end"
and you cannot perform cleaning nor ink filling operation.
5
When the remaining amount of ink count inside becomes 25cc and below, it is recognized as "Ink Level end". The
cartridge becomes unusable and you cannot perform printing operation.
6 Actually measure the cartridge and enter the value in the same way as the Step 2) above. (*1)
8
7 If the value by subtracting “CASE WEIGHT”and entered early is 25cc and above, it is recognized as “Ink
near end”and it will become usable again (printing is only available).
If it is 25cc and below, it becomes “Ink Level end” and it will be an unusable cartridge.
(*1): The condition for entering the actually measured value is to pull the cartridge. (Because it shall be measured
actually.)
© 2011 MIMAKI ENGINEERING CO.,LTD.
1.1.5
R.2.0
P.1
Maintenance Manual > Operating Principle > Maintenance Function
1. Operating Principle
1.1
Basic Operation
1.2
1.3
Maintenance Function Ink System
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
© 2011 MIMAKI ENGINEERING CO.,LTD.
Maintenance Manual > Operating Principle > Maintenance Function > Carriage out
Model UJF-3042/FX Issued 2010.08.27 Revised 2011.09.30 F/W ver 1.80 / 1.00 Remark
Rev.
1.2.1 Carriage out
2.0
 LCD display
MAINTENANCE
STATION
<ENT>
STATION
MENT :CARRIAGE
STATION
PLEASE WAIT
STATION
COMPLETED
<ENT>
1
 Process sequence
STEP.
1
Processing
Start
Description
1.
2.
3.
4.
Moves the table downward to the lowest position.
The Y bar comes to the front.
Performs cap OFF and moves the head to the maintenance position.
The wiper comes to the front.
2
Performing maintenance
1. The wiper pump operates periodically while maintenance is being
performed.
2. Message of maintenance is completed is displayed. Terminate with the
[ENTER].
3
End
1.
2.
3.
4.
2
3
The wiper returns to the wiper origin position (aftermost).
The head caps ON.
If the warning of cap cleaning is displayed, clear it.
Clear the counter for the warning of cap cleaning.
For other than the “service mode”, to prevent dryness of the nozzle surface and inside the cap, the warning sound
beeps at intervals of 30 seconds during carriage out.
4
5
6
7
8
© 2011 MIMAKI ENGINEERING CO.,LTD.
1.2.1
R.2.0
P.1
Maintenance Manual > Operating Principle > Maintenance Function > Wiper Cleaning
Model UJF-3042/FX Issued 2010.08.27 Revised 2011.09.30 F/W ver 1.80 / 1.00 Remark
Rev.
1.2.2 Wiper Cleaning
2.0
 Indication on LCD
MAINTENANCE
STATION
<ENT>
STATION
MENT :WIPER CLEANING
STATION
COMPLETED
<ENT>
1
 Processing sequence
STEP.
Processing
Description
1
Start
1. The Y bar comes to the front.
2. Performs cap OFF and moves the head to the maintenance position.
3. The wiper comes to the front.
2
Performing maintenance
1. The wiper pump operates periodically while maintenance is being
performed.
2. Message of maintenance is completed is displayed. Terminate with the
[ENTER].
3
End
1.
2.
3.
4.
2
3
The wiper returns to the wiper origin position (aftermost).
The head caps ON.
If the warning of Wiper Cleaning is displayed, clear it.
Clear the counter for the warning of Wiper Cleaning
For other than the “service mode”, to prevent dryness of the nozzle surface and inside the cap, the warning sound
beeps at intervals of 30 seconds during carriage out.
4
5
6
7
8
© 2011 MIMAKI ENGINEERING CO.,LTD.
1.2.2
R.2.0
P.1
Maintenance Manual > Operating Principle > Maintenance Function > Wiper Bottle
Model UJF-3042/FX Issued 2010.08.27 Revised 2011.09.30 F/W ver 1.80 / 1.00 Remark
Rev.
1.2.3 Wiper Bottle
2.0
 Indication on LCD
MAINTENANCE
STATION
<ENT>
STATION
MENT :WIPER BOTTLE
STATION
COMPLETED
<ENT>
1
 Processing sequence
STEP.
Processing
Description
1
Start
1. The Y bar comes to the front.
2
Performing maintenance
1. There is no operation of the machine while maintenance is being
performed.
2. Message of maintenance is completed is displayed. Terminate with the
[ENTER].
3
End
1. If the warning of Wiper Bottle is displayed, clear it.
2. Clear the counter for the warning of Wiper Bottle.
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
© 2011 MIMAKI ENGINEERING CO.,LTD.
1.2.3
R.2.0
P.1
Maintenance Manual > Operating Principle > Maintenance Function > Waste Ink Tank
Model UJF-3042/FX Issued 2010.08.27 Revised 2011.09.30 F/W ver 1.80 / 1.00 Remark
Rev.
1.2.4 Waste Ink Tank
2.0
 Indication on LCD
MAINTENANCE
STATION
<ENT>
STATION
MENT :WASTE TANK
STATION
COMPLETED
<ENT>
1
 Processing sequence
STEP.
Processing
Description
1
Start
1. The Y bar comes to the front.
2
Performing maintenance
1. There is no operation of the machine while maintenance is being
performed.
2. Message of maintenance is completed is displayed. Terminate with the
[ENTER].
3
End
1. If the warning of Waste Ink Tank is displayed, clear it.
2. Clear the counter for the warning of Waste Ink Tank.
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
© 2011 MIMAKI ENGINEERING CO.,LTD.
1.2.4
R.2.0
P.1
Maintenance Manual > Operating Principle > Maintenance Function > Cartridge Exchange
Model UJF-3042/FX Issued 2010.08.27 Revised 2011.09.30 F/W ver 1.80 / 1.00 Remark
Rev.
1.2.5 Cartridge Exchange
2.0
 Indication on LCD
MAINTENANCE
STATION
<ENT>
STATION
MENT :EXCH CARTRIDGE
STATION
COMPLETED
<ENT>
1
 Processing sequence
STEP.
Processing
Description
1
Start
1. The Y bar comes to the front.
2
Performing maintenance
1. There is no operation of the machine while maintenance is being
performed.
2. Message of maintenance is completed is displayed. Terminate with the
[ENTER].
3
End
1. There is no operation at termination.
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
© 2011 MIMAKI ENGINEERING CO.,LTD.
1.2.5
R.2.0
P.1
Maintenance Manual > Operating Principle > Maintenance Function > Filter Check
Model UJF-3042/FX Issued 2010.08.27 Revised 2011.09.30 F/W ver 1.80 / 1.00 Remark
Rev.
1.2.6 Filter Check
2.0
 Indication on LCD
MAINTENANCE
STATION
<ENT>
STATION
MENT :CHECK FILTER
STATION
COMPLETED
<ENT>
1
 Processing sequence
STEP.
Processing
Description
1
Start
1. The Y bar comes to the front.
2. Performs cap OFF and moves the head to the maintenance position.
2
Performing maintenance
1. There is no operation of the machine while maintenance is being
performed.
2. Message of maintenance is completed is displayed. Terminate with the
[ENTER].
3
End
1. The head caps ON.
2. If the warning of Filter Exchange is displayed, clear it.
3. Clear the counter for the warning of Filter Exchange.
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
© 2011 MIMAKI ENGINEERING CO.,LTD.
1.2.6
R.2.0
P.1
Maintenance Manual > Operating Principle > Maintenance Function > NOZZLE WASH
Model UJF-3042/FX Issued 2010.08.27 Revised 2011.09.30 F/W ver 1.80 / 1.00 Remark
Rev.
1.2.7 NOZZLE WASH
2.0
 Indication on LCD
Indicate 1
MAINTENANCE
STATION
<ENT>
STATION
MENT :NOZZLE WASH
Indicate 2
STATION
LEAVING
Indicate 3
: **min
STATION
LEAVING
hh:mm
STATION
HEAD [123]
Fill the liquid.
COMPLETED
<ENT>
Indicate 4
1
CLEANING ACTIVE
***---------------
 Processing sequence
STEP.
Processing
2
Description
1
Start
1. The Y bar comes to the front.
2. Performs cap OFF and moves the head to the maintenance position.
3. The wiper comes to the front.
2
Performing maintenance
(Indicate 1)
1. The wiper pump operates periodically while maintenance is being performed.
2. Message of maintenance is completed is displayed. Terminate with the [ENTER].
3
Entering leaving time
(Indicate 2)
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
The wiper returns to the wiper origin position (aftermost).
The head caps ON.
The Y bar returns to the back.
Select the leaving time with the[5] [6] keys.
When you press the [ENTER] key, it enters in the waiting mode for the set leaving
time.
4
Waiting for leaving time
(Indicate 3)
1. It does not move with cap ON for the set leaving time.
2. After the set leaving time has passed, performs cleaning.
5
Cleaning
(Indicate 4)
1. Performs normal cleaning once.
2. By cleaning is terminated, nozzle cleaning is completed.
For other than the “service mode”, to prevent dryness of the nozzle surface and inside the cap, the warning sound
beeps at intervals of 30 seconds during carriage out.
3
4
5
6
7
8
© 2011 MIMAKI ENGINEERING CO.,LTD.
1.2.7
R.2.0
P.1
Maintenance Manual > Operating Principle > Maintenance Function > Discharge way washing
Model UJF-3042/FX Issued 2010.08.27 Revised 2011.09.30 F/W ver 1.80 / 1.00 Remark
Rev.
1.2.8 Discharge way washing
2.0
 Indication on LCD
MAINTENANCE
STATION
<ENT>
STATION
MENT :DISWAY WASH
STATION
COMPLETED
<ENT>
1
 Processing sequence
STEP.
Processing
Description
1
Start
1. The Y bar comes to the front.
2. Performs cap OFF and moves the head to the maintenance position.
2
Performing maintenance
1. The wiper pump operates periodically while maintenance is being performed.
• (Absorbs for 5 seconds and leaves for 10 seconds.)
2. Message of maintenance is completed is displayed. Terminate with the [ENTER].
3
End
1. Absorbs for 20 seconds at last and the absorption pump stops.
2. The head caps ON.
For other than the “service mode”, to prevent dryness of the nozzle surface and inside the cap, the warning sound
beeps at intervals of 30 seconds during carriage out.
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
© 2011 MIMAKI ENGINEERING CO.,LTD.
1.2.8
R.2.0
P.1
Maintenance Manual > Operating Principle > Maintenance Function > CUSTODY WASH
Model UJF-3042/FX Issued 2010.08.27 Revised 2011.09.30 F/W ver 1.80 / 1.00 Remark
Rev.
1.2.9 CUSTODY WASH
2.0
 Indication on LCD
Indicate 1
MAINTENANCE
STATION
<ENT>
STATION
MENT :CUSTODY WASH
Indicate 3
STATION
LEAVING
Indicate 4
hh:mm
CLEANING ACTIVE
***---------------
Fill the liquid.
COMPLETED
<ENT>
Indicate 2
STATION
LEAVING
: **min
Indicate 5
STATION
COMPLETED
<ENT>
1
Description
2
 Processing sequence
STEP.
Processing
1
Start
1. The Y bar comes to the front.
2. Performs cap OFF and moves the head to the maintenance position.
3. The wiper comes to the front.
2
Performing maintenance
(Indicate 1)
1. The wiper pump operates periodically while maintenance is being performed.
2. Message of maintenance is completed is displayed. Terminate with the [ENTER].
3
Entering leaving time
(Indicate 2)
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
The wiper returns to the wiper origin position (aftermost).
The head caps ON.
The Y bar returns to the back.
Select the leaving time with the[5] [6] keys.
When you press the [ENTER] key, it enters in the waiting mode for the set leaving
time.
4
Waiting for leaving time
(Indicate 3)
1. It does not move with cap ON for the set leaving time.
2. After the set leaving time has passed, performs cleaning.
5
Cleaning
(Indicate 4)
1. Performs normal cleaning once.
2. By cleaning is terminated, nozzle cleaning is completed.
6
Start
1. The Y bar comes to the front.
2. Performs cap OFF and moves the head to the maintenance position.
3. Moves the table downward to the lowest position.
7
Performing maintenance
(Indicate 5)
1. The absorption pump operates periodically during maintenance is being performed.
• (Absorbs for 5 seconds and leaves for 10 seconds.)
2. Message of maintenance is completed is displayed. Terminate with the [ENTER].
8
End
1. Absorbs for 20 seconds at last and the absorption pump stops.
2. The head caps ON.
3
4
5
For other than the “service mode”, to prevent dryness of the nozzle surface and inside the cap, the warning sound
beeps at intervals of 30 seconds during carriage out.
6
7
8
© 2011 MIMAKI ENGINEERING CO.,LTD.
1.2.9
R.2.0
P.1
Maintenance Manual > Operating Principle > Maintenance Function > HEAD MAINTENANCE
Model UJF-3042/FX Issued 2010.08.27 Revised 2011.09.30 F/W ver 1.80 / 1.00 Remark
Rev.
1.2.10 HEAD MAINTENANCE
2.0
 Indication on LCD
MAINTENANCE
STATION
<ENT>
STATION
MENT :HEAD MENT
STATION
COMPLETED
<ENT>
1
 Processing sequence
STEP.
1
Processing
Start
Description
1.
2.
3.
4.
Moves the table downward to the lowest position.
The Y bar comes to the front.
Performs cap OFF and moves the head to the maintenance position.
The wiper comes to the front.
2
2
Performing maintenance
1. The wiper pump operates periodically while maintenance is being
performed.
2. Message of maintenance is completed is displayed. Terminate with the
[ENTER].
3
End
1. The wiper returns to the wiper origin position (aftermost).
2. The head caps ON.
3
For other than the “service mode”, to prevent dryness of the nozzle surface and inside the cap, the warning sound
beeps at intervals of 30 seconds during carriage out.
4
5
6
7
8
© 2011 MIMAKI ENGINEERING CO.,LTD.
1.2.10
R.2.0
P.1
Maintenance Manual > Operating Principle > Ink System
1. Operating Principle
1.1
Basic Operation
1.2
1.3
Maintenance Function Ink System
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
© 2011 MIMAKI ENGINEERING CO.,LTD.
Maintenance Manual > Operating Principle > Ink System > Monitoring of the Amount of Remaining Ink
Model UJF-3042/FX Issued 2013.07.18 Revised
F/W ver 1.80 / 1.00 Remark
Rev.
1.3.1 Monitoring of the Amount of Remaining Ink
2.0
 Outline
This printer supports both 220cc and 600cc cartridges.
This section describes how to monitor the amount of remaining ink.
 Monitoring the amount of remaining ink in 220cc cartridges
No.
Message
Contents
1
(No message)
 Indicates that the amount of ink remaining in the cartridge is between INK FULL and
INK NEAR END.
2
INK NEAR END
 Occurs when the near end plate on the cartridge is ejected, and blocks the near end
sensor inside the slot.
 Cleaning and ink filling are not possible, and the head returns to local after each print
job.
 INK NEAR END status does not go off once it has been triggered.
3
INK END
 Occurs if 20cc is consumed after INK NEAR END.
 Cleaning, ink filling, and printing are not possible. (Remote migration is not possible.)
 INK NEAR END status does not go off once it has been triggered.
1
2
3
 Monitoring the amount of remaining ink in 600cc cartridges
No.
Message
Contents
1
(No message)
 Indicates that the amount of ink remaining in the cartridge is between INK FULL and
30cc.
2
INK NEAR END
 Occurs if the amount of ink remaining is 60cc or less.
 Cleaning, ink filling, and printing are not possible.
 This status goes off when the cartridge weight is entered.
 However, at 30cc or less INK NEAR END occurs, and at 25cc or less INK LEVEL
END occurs.
4
5
3
INK END
 Occurs if the amount of ink remaining is 30cc or less.
 Cleaning and ink filling are not possible, and the head returns to local after each print
job.
 INK NEAR END status does not go off once it has been triggered.
4
INK LEVEL END
 Occurs if the amount of ink remaining is 25cc or less.
 Cleaning, ink filling, and printing are not possible.
 This status switches to INK NEAR END when the cartridge weight is entered and the
amount of ink remaining is 25cc or more.
 This status does not go off if the amount of ink remaining is 25cc or less.
6
7
8
© 2012 MIMAKI ENGINEERING CO.,LTD.
1.3.1
R.2.0
P.1
Maintenance Manual > Electrical Parts > Block Diagram
1
2. Electrical Parts
2.1
Block Diagram
2.2
Operating Description
2.3
Circuit Board Specifications
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
© 2011 MIMAKI ENGINEERING CO.,LTD.
Maintenance Manual > Electrical Parts > Block Diagram > Internal Connection Diagram
Model UJF-3042/FX Issued 2010.08.27 Revised 2011.09.30 F/W ver 1.80 / 1.00 Remark
Rev.
2.1.1 Internal Connection Diagram
5
2.0
4
3
&$575,'*(3$57
Absence1
CS[1..2]
Presence1
NES[1..2]
Absence2
NES[1..2]
Absence3
CS[1..2]
Presence3
NES[1..2]
Absence4
CS[1..2]
Presence4
,23$57
NES[1..2]
Absence5
CS[1..2]
Presence5
NES[1..2]
Absence6
E106130
E300764
FFC100R-30-1700
NES[1..2]
CN3[1..30]
1033477
Cartridge sensor Assy
ID contact PCB CN032Assy1
E105363
ID[1..2]
ID contact PCB CN032Assy2
E105363
ID[1..2]
E300765
FFC100R-30-1700
x6
CN7[1..30]
CN10[1..4]
ID[1..2]
ID contact PCB CN032Assy4
E105363
ID[1..2]
ID contact PCB CN032Assy5
E105363
ID[1..2]
ID contact PCB CN032Assy6
E105363
ID[1..2]
CN8[1..30]
E300766
FFC100R-30-1700
CN12[1..4]
CN11[1..4]
ID contact PCB CN032Assy3
E105363
2
3042 SLIDER RELAY PCB
CS[1..2]
Presence6
C
1
CS[1..2]
Presence2
D
CN5[1..12]
3
E106270
SR-SLD cable Assy
CN14[1..4]
CN15[1..4]
CN16[1..4]
E106246
ID contact connection cable Assy
CN19[1..12]
<027253$57
ISW3
MICRO SW
CN
E300440
E106401
Cover Sensor cable Assy
CN[1..3]
CN4[1..2]
4
D3M-01K1-3
CN
MTR2
POW[1..2]
P[1..2]
P[1..2]
P[1..2]
P[1..2]
Ymotor
ENC[1..4]
HLR-02V
CN
HLP-02V
CN
E[1..5]
E[1..5]
E[1..5]
E[1..5]
SMR-05V-B
SMP-05V-BC
IPPR3_short13 Assy
E106086
CN[1..3]
CN25[1..3]
3042 SR PWR short Assy
E106272
CN[1..12]
CN1[1..12]
CN27[1..5]
E106258
Y-MTR connection cable Assy
CN28[1..2]
5
CN29[1..6]
/('89/,48,'&22/(53$57
PMTR
E106349
LIQUID COOL DIAPHRAM Assy
FAN5
B
E106265
PMP[1..2]
M[1..2]
M[1..2]
FAN[1..2]
M[1..2]
M[1..2]
SW[1..2]
M[1..2]
M[1..2]
ZHR-2
ZMR-2
CN26[1..16]
CN20[1..5]
E106267
Liquid cooling FAN connection cable Assy
CN6[1..12]
CN22[1..2]
SMR-02V-B SMP-02V-BC
CN
CN
M[1..2]
M[1..2]
E300766
FFC125R-16-1200
E106266
Liquid cool pump connection cable Assy
M[1..2]
M[1..2]
SMR-02V-B SMP-02V-BC
CN
CN
FLOAT SENSOR
FLOAT SW Assy
CN
M[1..2]
M[1..2]
COOLING FAN
LIQUID COOLING FAN Assy
E105378
CN
COOLING PUMP
CN2[1..30]
CN17[1..6]
E106346
FLOAT SW connection cable Assy
FAN4 E106268
COOLING FAN Assy
6
CN24[1..2]
FAN[1..2]
;&$%/(*8,'(
0$,1%2;3$57
7
E106243
UJF-3042 MAIN PCB Assy
E300763
FFC100R-30-2300
E300442
CN6[1..30]
PWR
E106269
MAIN-SR CABLE Assy
E106248
DC Power Cable Assy
CN1[1..3]
CN8[1..12]
CN2[1..10]
CN11[1..10]
CN3[1..3]
CN12[1..3]
E300814
FFC125R-20-0500
CN9[1..20]
CN14[1..4]
A
AC Single Phase
100 to 240V input
50/60Hz
AC PLUG
E106254
Noise Filter Assy
L2
8
CN15[1..10]
E106253
AC inlet Assy
E300427
Power Cable Assy
L
N
E E
L1
INLET
L
N
E
L
N
E
CM11(C-459)
5
© 2011 MIMAKI ENGINEERING CO.,LTD.
SW1
ACIN[1..2]
ACOUT[1..2]
AJ921002WW3F
CN10[1..10]
L2
NF1
CN7[1..16]
ACIN[1..2]
ACOUT[1..2]
E
SUP-P5H-E1PR-0(OKAYA)
4
3
2.1.1
R.2.0
P.1
Maintenance Manual > Electrical Parts > Block Diagram > Internal Connection Diagram
Model UJF-3042/FX Issued 2010.08.27 Revised 2011.09.30 F/W ver 1.80 / 1.00 Remark
Rev.
2.1.1 Internal Connection Diagram
3
2.0
2
1
6/,'(53$57
E106129
3042 SLIDER PCB
CN7[1..50]
CN8[1..50]
CN?[1..50]
CN?[1..50]
CN9[1..50]
CN10[1..50]
CN?[1..50]
CN?[1..50]
CN11[1..50]
CN12[1..50]
CN?[1..50]
CN?[1..50]
H1~2 R HEAD1
GEN4
H3~4 R HEAD2
GEN4
H5~6 R HEAD3
GEN4
D
E106247
Y ORG_L-ENC cable Assy
CN19[1..7]
E106245
CN[1..3]
Y ORG SNS
OJ-6505-N2
CN?[1..4]
ENCODER PCB Assy
E103961
CN[1..2]
LED POINTER
LED pointer Assy
CN17[1..8]
CN
CN
P[1..2]
P[1..2]
P[1..2]
P[1..2]
SMP-02V-BC
FAN3 MIST VACCUM FAN Assy
E106318
CN[1..2]
SMR-02V-B
2
(109-1003G ABS finger guard)
CN
P[1..2]
P[1..2]
CN2[1..30]
1
SMP-02V-BC
CN4[1..30]
CN6[1..30]
CN1[1..12]
<&$%/(*8,'(
CN[1..3]
FAN2
E106429 LED-UVx2 DRV PCB
CN3[1..3]
CN15[1..22]
IPPR3_short13 Assy
E106086
E106488
CN4[1..2]
CN18[1..10]
E106489
CN1[1..8]
3042 UVDRV control Assy
CN2[1..16]
(109-149E finger guard)
LED1~4
E106487
LED-UV cable Assy
CN5[1..10]
3
UVDRV cooling FAN Assy
CN[1..2]
UVLED PCB
E105982
CN1[1..10]
C
E106487
LED-UV cable Assy
LED5~8
CN6[1..10]
UVLED PCB
E105982
CN1[1..10]
4
/('89,55$',$7,213$57
E106329
:25.$5($6(1625
BEAM Sensor(OUT)
SNS1
CN10[1..16]
BEAM Sensor(IN)
CN?[1..3]
CN?[1..2]
SMTR2
3042 PUMP3 PCB
Stepper motor
CN[1..6]
E106271
Pump MTR connection Assy
E300513
SMTR3
CN8[1..2]
E106259
BEAM SENSOR Assy
Stepper motor
CN[1..6]
E300513
SMTR4
Stepper motor
CN[1..6]
Stepper motor
CN[1..6]
CN2[1..16]
E106255
Wiper MTR cableAssy
E300513
S1
CN11[1..16]
5
E300513
SMTR5
Wiper sns cable Assy
CN[1..3]
E106256
CN5[1..8]
B
E104675
CN[1..3]
CN
E106273
3042 Diaphram cable Assy
CN
P[1..4]
P[1..4]
CN9[1..2]
P[1..4]
P[1..4]
5557-02R
5559-02P
CN
3042 Station3 PCB
E106262
Vacuum FAN Cable Assy
E106328
CN14[1..8]
CN
P[1..4]
P[1..4]
5559-02P
CN
P[1..4]
P[1..4]
P[1..4]
P[1..4]
5559-02P
E106263
Z MTR Cable Assy
E106264
Z ORG Cable Assy
CN
FFC100R-10-1600
CN
M[1..2]
M[1..2]
CN
M[1..2]
M[1..2]
LS1
CN6[1..2]
CN3[1..4]
CN5[1..4]
P[1..2]
P[1..2]
YLP-02V
YLR-02V
SMP-02V-BC SMR-02V-B
E106251
REMOTE SW Assy
ISW1
SW[1..2]
Safety SW Assy
3
© 2011 MIMAKI ENGINEERING CO.,LTD.
E300513
Stepper motor
CN[1..3]
Z ORG SENS1
OJ-6505-N2
A165E-S-01
2
7
MTR1
POW[1..2]
Xmotor
E300532
CN[1..3]
E106252
X ORG SENS
A
OJ-6505-N2
8
;027253$57
SPOWSW
SW[1..4]
E106249
CN[1..6]
CN
P[1..2]
P[1..2]
S36G24-1(TOKYO CONE PAPER MFG)
CN1[1..10]
VacuumFAN Assy
7$%/(3$57
Speaker Assy
GP KEYBOARD Assy
E106274
FAN[1..2]
ENC[1..4]
.(<%2$5'3$57
E106244
P[1..4]
P[1..4]
5557-02R
Micro SW
D3M-01K1-3
CN[1..3]
E106250
X Org Sensor Cable Assy
E300762
FAN1
,6:
5557-02R
Cover Sensor
cable TB Assy
E106319
E106257
X-Motor cable Assy
67$7,213$57
CN
SMTR1
CN13[1..12]
CN3[1..20]
CN15[1..12]
6
Diaphram Pump Assy
SUB POW SW
ACEA32327G
Safety SW
1
2.1.1
R.2.0
P.2
Maintenance Manual > Electrical Parts > Operating Description
1
2. Electrical Parts
2.1
Block Diagram
2.2
Operating Description
2.3
Circuit Board Specifications
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
© 2011 MIMAKI ENGINEERING CO.,LTD.
Maintenance Manual > Electrical Parts > Circuit Board Specifications
1
2. Electrical Parts
2.1
Block Diagram
2.2
Operating Description
2.3
Circuit Board Specifications
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
© 2011 MIMAKI ENGINEERING CO.,LTD.
Maintenance Manual > Electrical Parts > Circuit Board Specifications > Power Supply PCB Assy.
Model UJF-3042/FX Issued 2010.08.27 Revised 2011.09.30 F/W ver 1.80 / 1.00 Remark
Rev.
2.3.1 Power Supply PCB Assy.
2.0
1
2
 Outline
Board name
:Power Supply PCB Assy.
Mounted position :Main Control Unit part
3
 Main specifications
The power for each control and driving is supplied.
 List of Connectors
Parts No.
Pin
Connected to:*
CN1
CN2
CN3
5
10
3
Noise Filter
Main PCB Assy.
Main PCB Assy.
Connecting destination CN
CN13
CN15
4
Remarks
Input AC100–240V, 50/60Hz, 3.5A
Output DC+35V / 6A, +5V / 3.5A, +3.3V / 3.5A
Remote signal +5VSB 0.7A
* For the details of connecting destinations, refer to the block diagram.
 Fuse Rating
Parts No.
F3
Rating
T6.3AH 250V
Use voltage
AC100–240V
Remarks
AC input part
6
 Volume Specification
Parts No.
VR1
VR2
VR3
Voltage
+35V
+5V
+3.3V
Adjustable range
+34.08V ~ +35.02V
+4.98V ~ +5.02V
+3.28V ~ +3.32V
7
 Power supply confirmation point
Confirmation point
Parts No.
Pin No.
CN2
1Pin, 2Pin
CN2
5Pin, 6Pin
CN2
9Pin, 10Pin
CN3
1Pin
© 2011 MIMAKI ENGINEERING CO.,LTD.
DC Power Voltage
5
Remarks
8
+35V
+5V
+3.3V
+5VSB
2.3.1
R.2.0
P.1
Maintenance Manual > Electrical Parts > Circuit Board Specifications > Main PCB Assy.
Model UJF-3042/FX Issued 2010.08.27 Revised 2011.09.30 F/W ver 1.80 / 1.00 Remark
Rev.
2.3.2 Main PCB Assy.
2.0
1
2
 Outline
Board name
:UJF-3042 MAIN PCB Assy.
Mounted position :Main Control Unit part
 Main specifications
UJF-3042 MAIN PCB Assy is the PCB to connect the GP Key Board Assy, 3042 Station 3 PCB Assy, 3042 Slider
Relay PCB Assy and the X Motor with the external IF.
USB Port
Supports USB2.
LAN Port
Supports 100BASE-TX.
Connection between PCBs
(KEY I/F)
10-pin FFC connection (GP Key Board connection)
Connection between PCBs
(SERIAL IO I/F)
20-pin FFC connection (3042 Station 3 PCB connection)
Connection between PCBs
(HDC I/F)
30-pin FFC connection (3042 Slider Relay PCB connection)
Twisted pair cable (LAN cable is used.)
Motor connection
X Motor, X encorder
3
4
5
 List of Connectors
Parts No.
Pin
Connected to:*
CN1
CN2
CN3
CN4
CN5
CN6
CN7
4
12
100
9
80
30
16
Host PC
Not Use
Not Use
Not Use
Not Use
CN8
12
CN9
CN10
20
10
CN11
CN12
CN13
CN14
CN15
10
3
10
4
10
3042 Slider Relay PCB Assy
X Origen sensor,
GP Key Board
3042 Slider Relay PCB Assy
3042 Station3 PCB Assy
GP Key Board Assy
Power Supply PCB Assy
Power Supply PCB Assy
LAN I/F
X Motor
X Motor
© 2011 MIMAKI ENGINEERING CO.,LTD.
Connecting
destination CN
6
Remarks
USB2.0 I/F
UART 2CH
For Debug
JTAG I/F(For CPLD writing or FPGA JTAG TEST)
For Additional memory board (Connector is not mounted)
HDC IO
CN2
Relay Connec- OJ-6505-N2, Additional +5V supply to GP Key Board , Short
tor
Pin
CN6
Main PCB - 3042 Slider Relay PCB Serializer I/F
CN3
CN1
20 Pin serial IO
GP Key Board SERIAL IO
CN2
CN3
DC Voltage Input
Remote signal
Ethernet (100BASE-TX)
X Motor driver
X Motor encorder
* For the details of connecting destinations, refer to the block diagram.
2.3.2
R.2.0
7
8
P.1
Maintenance Manual > Electrical Parts > Circuit Board Specifications > Main PCB Assy.
Model UJF-3042/FX Issued 2010.08.27 Revised 2011.09.30 F/W ver 1.80 / 1.00 Remark
Rev.
2.3.2 Main PCB Assy.
2.0
 Test point
Parts No.
TP6-7
TP1-5, TP10, TP11
Signal
GND
Debug
Remarks
 LED Specification
Parts No.,
D14
D15
D16
D17
D18
D19
D23
D30
Signal
Write check of U15 (CPLD). If it is written, it lights.
Fuse check of F2 and F3. If both fuses blown out, it is turned off.
Fuse check of F1 and F4. If both fuses blown out, it is turned off.
Sensor check of CN7 No. 3 Pin (X-origin sensor)
Sensor check of CN7 No. 4 Pin (Not Use)
Fuse check of F5. If the fuse blown out, it is turned off.
Fuse check of F6. If the fuse blown out, it is turned off.
Check of +5VSB backup power supply
1
Remarks
2
3
 Fuse Specification
Parts No.,
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
3.15A
3.15A
6.3A
6.3A
3.15A
3.15A
Rate
AC125V, DC60V
AC125V, DC60V
AC125V, DC60V
AC125V, DC60V
AC125V, DC60V
AC125V, DC60V
Using Voltage
+35V
+35V
+35V
+35V
+35V
+5V
Remark
CN6
CN6
CN8
CN8
CN9
CN9, CN10
4
 Power supply confirmation point
Confirmation point
Parts No.
Pin No.
CN11
1Pin
CN11
2PIn
CN11
5Pin, 6Pin
CN11
9Pin, 10Pin
CN12
1Pin
U17
1Pin
U24
1Pin
U25
U26
C227
RA89
1Pin
1Pin
[+] Pin
8Pin
DC Power Voltage
+35V-1
+35V-2
+5V
+3.3V
+5VB
+3.3VB
+2.5V
+1.8V
+1.2V
+12V
A+5V
5
Remarks
UV Lamp
6
Buck up power supply
Buck up power supply
7
+5V
8
© 2011 MIMAKI ENGINEERING CO.,LTD.
2.3.2
R.2.0
P.2
Maintenance Manual > Electrical Parts > Circuit Board Specifications > GP KeyBoard PCB Assy.
Model UJF-3042/FX Issued 2010.08.27 Revised 2011.09.30 F/W ver 1.80 / 1.00 Remark
Rev.
2.3.3 GP KeyBoard PCB Assy.
2.0
1
 Outline
2
Board name
:GP KeyBoard PCB Assy.
Mounted position :Operating part
 Main specifications
The GP KeyBoard PCB Assy is connected with the UJF-3042 MAIN PCB Assy using 10-pin FFC. It displays
information on the LCD, is operated with keys and informs information with sounds.
Information display
Displays on the LCD.
Key Operation
Operates the machine with keys and enters information.
Informs with sounds.
Informs information with sounds using the speaker.
Connection between PCBs
(KET I/F)
10-pin FFC connection (GP keyboard PCB connection)
3
4
 List of Connectors
Parts No.
Pin
Connected to:*
CN1
CN2
CN3
10
16
4
CN4
CN5
CN6
9
4
2
UJF-3042 MAIN PCB Assy
LCD
X Origin sensor cable Assy
EMG SW(A165E-S-01)
Cover sensor cable Assy
Not Use
Remote SW Assy
Speaker Assy
Connecting
destination CN
CN10
Remarks
DC+5V PowerSupply
Safety Stop SW
Table cover sensor
JTAG I/F(For CPLD writing)
Software Power SW
Speaker for sounds guidance.
* For the details of connecting destinations, refer to the block diagram.
5
6
 Test point
Parts No.
TP1, TP2
Signal
GND
Remarks
7
 LED Specification
Parts No.,
D1
D2
D3
Signal
Lights when turning ON the power supply.
Write check of IC3 (CPLD). If it is written, it lights.
Lights when software power switch is OFF.
Remarks
8
 Power supply confirmation point
Confirmation point
Parts No.
Pin No.
IC4
5Pin
IC4
4Pin
DC Power Voltage
© 2011 MIMAKI ENGINEERING CO.,LTD.
Remarks
+5V
+3.3V
2.3.3
R.2.0
P.1
Maintenance Manual > Electrical Parts > Circuit Board Specifications > 3042 Station3 PCB Assy.
Model UJF-3042/FX Issued 2010.08.27 Revised 2011.09.30 F/W ver 1.80 / 1.00 Remark
Rev.
2.3.4 3042 Station3 PCB Assy.
2.0
1
2
3
 Outline
Board name
:3042 Station3 PCB Assy.
Mounted position :Table part
 Main specifications
This PCB controls the stepping motor driving that moves on the table up and down, the origin sensor of the table
(upper and lower) and the absorption FAN of the table.
Stepping motor control
4
For Table moving, Up/Down.
Z Origin sensor
Origin sensor of the table.
Blower control
Adsorption FAN control
Connection between PCBs
(SERIAL IO I/F)
20-pin FFC connection
5
 List of Connectors
Parts No.
Pin
Connected to:*
CN1
CN2
CN3
CN4
CN5
CN6
CN7
CN8
CN9
CN10
CN11
CN12
CN13
CN14
CN15
CN16
CN17
CN18
CN19
4
10
20
2
4
16
2
2
4
16
9
2
12
8
2
2
2
2
14
Not Use
Not Use
UJF-3042 MAIN PCB Assy
Not Use
Not Use
Not Use
Not Use
Not Use
Not Use
Not Use
Not Use
Not Use
Srepping motor
Adsorption FANAssy
Z origin sensor
Not Use
Not Use
Not Use
Not Use
© 2011 MIMAKI ENGINEERING CO.,LTD.
Connecting
destination CN
CN9
Remarks
6
+35V (Preliminary power supply)
Connector is not mounted.
20 Pin Serial I/O
Connector is not mounted.
Connector is not mounted.
Connector is not mounted.
Connector is not mounted.
Connector is not mounted.
Connector is not mounted.
Connector is not mounted.
JTAG I/F(CPLD)
Connector is not mounted.
For Table moving, Up/Down.
Table adsorption FAN
Origin sensor of the table.(OJ-6505-N2)
Connector is not mounted.
Connector is not mounted.
Connector is not mounted.
Connector is not mounted.
7
8
2.3.4
R.2.0
P.1
Maintenance Manual > Electrical Parts > Circuit Board Specifications > 3042 Station3 PCB Assy.
Model UJF-3042/FX Issued 2010.08.27 Revised 2011.09.30 F/W ver 1.80 / 1.00 Remark
Rev.
2.3.4 3042 Station3 PCB Assy.
Parts No.
Pin
Connected to:*
CN20
CN21
CN22
CN23
2
8
10
16
Not Use
Not Use
Not Use
Not Use
2.0
Connecting
destination CN
Remarks
Connector is not mounted.
Connector is not mounted.
Connector is not mounted.
Connector is not mounted.
* For the details of connecting destinations, refer to the block diagram.
1
 Test point
Parts No.
TP1-4
Signal
GND
2
Remarks
 LED Specification
Parts No.,
D1
D9
D10
D11
D12
Signal
Fuse check of F1. If the fuse blown out, it is turned off.
Sensor check of CN15 No. 2 Pin (Z origin sensor)
Sensor check of CN15 No. 5 Pin (not being used)
Sensor check of CN15 No. 8 Pin (not being used)
Sensor check of CN15 No. 11Pin (not being used)
Remarks
3
4
 Fuse Specification
Parts No.,
Rate
F1
3.15A AC125V, DC60V
Using Voltage
+35V
Remark
CN3
 Power supply confirmation point
Confirmation point
Parts No.
Pin No.
EC1
[+] Pin
EC2
[+] Pin
EC12
[+] Pin
IC11
6Pin
IC11
1Pin
IC12
1Pin
DC Power Voltage
+35V
+5VU
+13V - +25.2V
+5V
+3.3V
+1.5
5
Remarks
+5V
For FAN output (variable)
6
7
8
© 2011 MIMAKI ENGINEERING CO.,LTD.
2.3.4
R.2.0
P.2
Maintenance Manual > Electrical Parts > Circuit Board Specifications > 3042 Slider Relay PCB Assy.
Model UJF-3042/FX Issued 2010.08.27 Revised 2011.09.30 F/W ver 1.80 / 1.00 Remark
Rev.
2.3.5 3042 Slider Relay PCB Assy.
2.0
1
2
3
 Outline
Board name
:3042 Slider Relay PCB Assy.
Mounted position :Y-Bar part
 Main specifications
4
This PCB controls the head driving wave shape, the Y motor and other IOs.
Creating wave shape for head driv- HPC
ing
Connecting for Work Area sensor
Beem sensor (Light receiving side)
Connecting for Water cooling sysutem of the UV sytem
Radiator FAN, Water cooling pump, Float sensor of the subtank
Connecting for Cover sensor.
Micro SW
Connecting for the Motor
Y-Motor, Y-Encorder
Connection between PCBs
(Serial IO I/F)
20-pin FFC connection (3042 Station3 PCB connection)
Connection between PCBs
(HDC I/F)
30-pin FFC connection, twisted pair cable connection (LAN cable is used) .
(UJF-3042 MAIN PCB, 3042 Slider PCB)
Connection between PCBs
(Serial IO I/F)
10-pin FFC connection (3042 Pump3 PCB connection)
5
6
7
 List of Connectors
Parts No.
Pin
Connected to:*
CN1
CN2
CN3
CN4
CN5
CN6
CN7
CN8
CN9
CN10
12
30
30
2
12
12
30
30
9
4
3042 SL-Relay power short Assy
UJF-3042 MAIN PCB Assy
3042 Slider PCB Assy
Micro SW(D3M-01K1-3)
3042 Slider PCB Assy
UJF-3042 MAIN PCB Assy
3042 Slider PCB Assy
3042 Slider PCB Assy
Not Use
Cartridge sensor Assy
© 2011 MIMAKI ENGINEERING CO.,LTD.
Connecting
destination CN
CN6
CN2
CN1
CN8
CN4
CN6
Remarks
Using for Power of the LED-UV.
HDC IO
HDC IO
Cover sensor
Slider Relay PCB - Slider PCB Serializer I/F
Main PCB - Slider Relay PCB Serializer I/F
GND etc
COM wave I/F
JTAG IF (CPLD writing or For FPGA JTAG TEST)
For cartrdge 1
2.3.5
8
R.2.0
P.1
Maintenance Manual > Electrical Parts > Circuit Board Specifications > 3042 Slider Relay PCB Assy.
Model UJF-3042/FX Issued 2010.08.27 Revised 2011.09.30 F/W ver 1.80 / 1.00 Remark
Rev.
2.3.5 3042 Slider Relay PCB Assy.
Parts No.
Pin
Connected to:*
CN11
CN12
CN13
CN14
CN15
CN16
CN17
CN18
CN19
CN20
CN21
CN22
CN23
CN24
CN25
CN26
CN27
CN28
CN29
4
4
16
4
4
4
6
10
12
5
4
2
20
2
3
16
5
12
6
Cartridge sensor Assy
Cartridge sensor Assy
Water cooling pump
Cartridge sensor Assy
Cartridge sensor Assy
Cartridge sensor Assy
Float switch Assy
Not Use
ID Contact PCB CN032Assy x 6
Not Use
Not Use
Water cooling FAN Assy
Not Use
Heat radiation FAN Assy
IPPR3_Cascade short 13Assy
3042 Pump3 PCBAssy
Beem sensor Assy
Y -Motor
Y -Motor
2.0
Connecting
destination CN
Remarks
For cartrdge 2
For cartrdge 3
CN1
CN4
CN2
For cartrdge 4
For cartrdge 5
For cartrdge 6
Monitor of quantity of Cooling water
General-purpose sensor input, or IC TAG I/F
For Ink IC reading
1
2
+35V General-purpose output
Radiator FAN
20 Pin serial IO
For heat sink
Short pin
16 Pin serial IO
Light receiving side
Y-motor drive
Y-motor encorder
3
* For the details of connecting destinations, refer to the block diagram.
 Test point
Parts No.
TP14, TP16, TP17
TP13
Signal
GND
+37V
Remarks
5
 LED Specification
Parts No.,
D1
D2
D5
D23
D24
D25
D26
D31
D32
D34
D39
Signal
Fuse check of F1. If the fuse blown out, it is turned off.
Write check of U6 (CPLD). If it is written, it lights.
Fuse check of F2. If the fuse blown out, it is turned off.
Sensor check of CN17 No. 5 Pin (not being used)
Sensor check of CN17 No. 2 Pin (float switch)
Sensor check of CN18 No. 4 Pin (not being used)
Sensor check of CN18 No. 3 Pin (not being used)
Fuse check of F3. If the fuse blown out, it is turned off.
Fuse check of F4. If the fuse blown out, it is turned off.
For +35V power supply check (If it is turned on, it lights.)
CN27 No. 4 Pin (multipurpose input sensor)
Remarks
6
7
8
 Fuse Specification
Parts No.,
F1
F2
F3
F4
Rate
5A AC125V, DC60V
1A AC125V, DC60V
3.15A AC125V, DC60V
3.15A AC125V, DC60V
© 2011 MIMAKI ENGINEERING CO.,LTD.
4
Using Voltage
+35V
+37V
+35V
+5V
Remark
CN3
CN23, CN26
CN23, CN26
2.3.5
R.2.0
P.2
Maintenance Manual > Electrical Parts > Circuit Board Specifications > 3042 Slider Relay PCB Assy.
Model UJF-3042/FX Issued 2010.08.27 Revised 2011.09.30 F/W ver 1.80 / 1.00 Remark
Rev.
2.3.5 3042 Slider Relay PCB Assy.
2.0
 Power supply confirmation point
Confirmation point
Parts No.
Pin No.
C2
[+] Pin
Q3
1Pin
C52
[+] Pin
C71
[+] Pin
U9
1Pin
U10
1Pin
U11
1Pin
U18
4Pin
U18
7Pin
U17
4Pin
DC Power Voltage
+35V
+37V
+5V
+12V - +30.4V
+3.3V
+2.5V
+1.2V
+15V
-15V
-7.65V
Remarks
1
For FAN output (variable)
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
© 2011 MIMAKI ENGINEERING CO.,LTD.
2.3.5
R.2.0
P.3
Maintenance Manual > Electrical Parts > Circuit Board Specifications > 3042 Pump3 PCB Assy.
Model UJF-3042/FX Issued 2010.08.27 Revised 2011.09.30 F/W ver 1.80 / 1.00 Remark
Rev.
2.3.6 3042 Pump3 PCB Assy.
2.0
1
2
 Outline
Board name
:3042 Pump3 PCB Assy.
Mounted position :Y-Bar part
3
 Main specifications
This PCB is used for the power supply at floodlighting side of the UJF-3042 /FX station part and the beam sensor
Assy.
Stepping moter control(For Ink pump)
4
Controls the pump motors up to four.
Stepping moter control(For Wiper mov- Controls the wiper motor.
ing)
Connecting for Wiper origin sensor
Reads the wiper origin sensor.
Wipe Suction Pump control
Controls the wipe suction pump.
Work area sensor
Beem sensor (Projection of the light side)
5
 List of Connectors
Parts No.
Pin
Connected to:*
CN1
CN2
CN3
CN4
CN5
CN6
CN7
CN8
CN9
CN10
CN11
4
16
16
2
8
9
10
2
2
16
16
Not Use
3042 Slider Relay PCB Assy
Not Use
Not Use
Wiper sensor cabel Assy
Not Use
Not Use
Work area sensor Assy
Wipe Suction Pump
Stepping motor
Stepping motor
Connecting
destination CN
CN26
Remarks
+35V (Preliminary power supply)
16 Pin SERIAL I/O
Connector is not mounted.
Connector is not mounted.
Wiper origin sensor
JTAG I/F(CPLD)
Connector is not mounted.
Projection of the light side)
6
7
For Ink pump (Max. four pumps)
For wiper
* For the details of connecting destinations, refer to the block diagram.
8
 Test point
Parts No.
TP1 - 4
Signal
GND
© 2011 MIMAKI ENGINEERING CO.,LTD.
Remarks
2.3.6
R.2.0
P.1
Maintenance Manual > Electrical Parts > Circuit Board Specifications > 3042 Pump3 PCB Assy.
Model UJF-3042/FX Issued 2010.08.27 Revised 2011.09.30 F/W ver 1.80 / 1.00 Remark
Rev.
2.3.6 3042 Pump3 PCB Assy.
2.0
 Power supply confirmation point
Confirmation point
Parts No.
Pin No.
EC1
[+] Pin
EC2
[+] Pin
IC3
4Pin
RA10
5Pin
DC Power Voltage
Remarks
+35V
+5V
+3.3V
+24V
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
© 2011 MIMAKI ENGINEERING CO.,LTD.
2.3.6
R.2.0
P.2
Maintenance Manual > Electrical Parts > Circuit Board Specifications > ID Contact PCB CN032 Assy.
Model UJF-3042/FX Issued 2010.08.27 Revised 2011.09.30 F/W ver 1.80 / 1.00 Remark
Rev.
2.3.7 ID Contact PCB CN032 Assy.
2.0
1
 Outline
2
Board name
:ID Contact PCB CN032 Assy.
Mounted position :Cartridge Guide No1 - No.6
 Main specifications
UJF-3042 /FX uses six of this PCB.
It is equipped with the point of contact for reading the cartridge ID.
3
 List of Connectors
Parts No.
Pin
Connected to:*
CN1
2
3042 Slider Relay PCB Assy
Connecting
destination CN
CN19
Remarks
4
* For the details of connecting destinations, refer to the block diagram.
5
6
7
8
© 2011 MIMAKI ENGINEERING CO.,LTD.
2.3.7
R.2.0
P.1
Maintenance Manual > Electrical Parts > Circuit Board Specifications > 3042 Slider PCB Assy.
Model UJF-3042/FX Issued 2010.08.27 Revised 2011.09.30 F/W ver 1.80 / 1.00 Remark
Rev.
2.3.8 3042 Slider PCB Assy.
2.0
1
2
 Outline
Board name
:3042 Slider PCB Assy.
Mounted position :Carriage
 Main specifications
This PCB controls three print heads, LED-UV and other IOs.
Print Head control
3
Available up to three (6 nozzle lines)
LED-UV control
Controls the maximum of two UVLED-DRIVE PCBs.
Y-origin sensor
Origin sensor of the carriage.
Linear encoder signal
Enters the encoder PCB signal.
Other IO
It is equipped with the multipurpose IO.
4
 List of Connectors
Parts No.
Pin
Connected to:*
CN1
CN2
CN3
CN4
CN5
CN6
CN7
CN8
CN9
CN10
CN11
CN12
CN13
CN14
CN15
16
30
3
30
9
30
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
22
CN16
CN17
16
8
CN18
CN19
10
7
CN20
4
3042 Slider Relay PCB Assy
3042 Slider Relay PCB Assy
IPPR3_Cascade short 13 Assy
3042 Slider Relay PCB Assy
Not Use
3042 Slider Relay PCB Assy
Print Head (EVEN)
Print Head (ODD)
Print Head (EVEN)
Print Head (ODD)
Print Head (EVEN)
Print Head (ODD)
Not Use
Not Use
LEDUVx2-DRIVE PCB
Thermistor1
Thermistor2
Not Use
LED Pointer
Mist Absorption FAN
UVDRV cooling FAN
Not Use
Y-origin sensor
Encorder PCB Assy
Not Use
© 2011 MIMAKI ENGINEERING CO.,LTD.
Connecting
Remarks
destination CN
CN5
3042 Slider Relay PCB&3042 Slider PCB Serializer I/F
CN3
HDC IO
Short pin
CN7
GND & etc
JTAG I/F (CPLD writing and FPGA JTAG TEST)
CN8
“COM” Wave I/F
Head control 1
Head control 1
Head control 2
Head control 2
Head control 3
Head control 3
Connector is not mounted
Connector is not mounted
CN1
LED-UV Control
TH
Connects with the thermistor 1 on the UVLED PCB.
TH
Connects with the thermistor 2 on the UVLED PCB.
16 Pin SERIAL I/O
Use for LED pointer
5V Axial flow FAN
5V Axial flow FAN
General-purpose io
Origin sensor for slider. (OJ-6505-N2)
CN1
Reading signal from Encorder PCB.
General-purpose analog input.
* For the details of connecting destinations, refer to the block diagram.
2.3.8
R.2.0
5
6
7
8
P.1
Maintenance Manual > Electrical Parts > Circuit Board Specifications > 3042 Slider PCB Assy.
Model UJF-3042/FX Issued 2010.08.27 Revised 2011.09.30 F/W ver 1.80 / 1.00 Remark
Rev.
2.3.8 3042 Slider PCB Assy.
2.0
 Test point
Parts No.
TP8 - 11
TP1 - 7
Signal
GND
signal
Remarks
For debug
 Fuse Specification
Parts No.,
F1
F2
Rate
5A AC125V, DC60V
2A AC125V, DC60V
Using Voltage
+35V
+35V
1
Remark
CN16
 Power supply confirmation point
Confirmation point
Parts No.
Pin No.
C3
[+] Pin
Q8
[+] Pin
C17
[+] Pin
C75
[+] Pin
U11
1Pin
U12
1Pin
U13
1Pin
DC Power Voltage
Remarks
+35V-1
+35V-2
+37V
+5V
+3.3V
+2.5V
+1.2V
+35V
For UV Lump
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
© 2011 MIMAKI ENGINEERING CO.,LTD.
2.3.8
R.2.0
P.2
Maintenance Manual > Electrical Parts > Circuit Board Specifications > Encorder PCB Assy.
Model UJF-3042/FX Issued 2010.08.27 Revised 2011.09.30 F/W ver 1.80 / 1.00 Remark
Rev.
2.3.9 Encorder PCB Assy.
2.0
1
2
 Outline
Board name
:Encorder PCB Assy.
Mounted position :Carriage part
 Main specifications
It is located on the left rear of the carriage and reads the Y shaft linear encoder scale for 150dpi.
3
 List of Connectors
Parts No.
Pin
Connected to:*
CN1
4
3042 Slider PCB Assy
Connecting destinaRemarks
tion CN
CN19
For Linear encorder
* For the details of connecting destinations, refer to the block diagram.
4
5
6
7
8
© 2011 MIMAKI ENGINEERING CO.,LTD.
2.3.9
R.2.0
P.1
Maintenance Manual > Electrical Parts > Circuit Board Specifications > LEDUVx2-DRIVE PCB Assy.
Model UJF-3042/FX Issued 2010.08.27 Revised 2011.09.30 F/W ver 1.80 / 1.00 Remark
Rev.
2.3.10 LEDUVx2-DRIVE PCB Assy.
2.0
1
2
 Outline
Board name
:LEDUVx2-DRIVE PCB Assy.
Mounted position :UV control part
 Main specifications
3
Performs ON/OFF of the LED-UV PCB and brightness adjustment.
LED-UV control
Brightness is adjustable by one. Drives eight LED-UVs.
Cascade connection
By the cascade connection, expansion of UVLED-DRIVE PCB is available.
4
 List of Connectors
Parts No.
Pin
Connected to:*
CN1
CN2
CN3
CN4
CN5
8
16
9
2
10
CN6
10
3042 Slider PCB Assy
3042 Slider PCB Assy
JTAG
DC FAN (+5V)
Water cool LED_1inch-UVLED
PCB Assy
Water cool LED_1inch-UVLED
PCB Assy
Connecting
Remarks
destination CN
CN15
UVLEDx2-DRIVE power
CN15&CN18 UVLEDx2-DRIVE PCB control
For CPLD writing
+5V DC FAN (~`0.5A)
CN1
Controls four LEDUVs & one thermistor.
CN1
5
Controls four LEDUVs & one thermistor.
* For the details of connecting destinations, refer to the block diagram.
6
 Test point
Parts No.
TP1
Signal
GND
Remarks
7
 LED Specification
Parts No.,
D2
D3
Signal
For checking fo thr +5V power supply
For checking fo thr Power suplly of the LEDUV
Remarks
8
 Power supply confirmation point
Confirmation point
Parts No.
Pin No.
EC1
[+] Pin
U3
5Pin
U3
4Pin
DC Power Voltage
© 2011 MIMAKI ENGINEERING CO.,LTD.
Remarks
+35Pin
5Pin
+3.3Pin
2.3.10
R.2.0
P.1
Maintenance Manual > Electrical Parts > Circuit Board Specifications > Water cool LED_1inch-UVLED PCB Assy.
Model UJF-3042/FX Issued 2010.08.27 Revised 2011.09.30 F/W ver 1.80 / 1.00 Remark
Rev.
2.3.11 Water cool LED_1inch-UVLED PCB Assy.
2.0
1
2
 Outline
Board name
:Water cool LED_1inch-UVLED PCB Assy.
Mounted position :UV control part
 Main specifications
This PCB has four LED-UVs and is made of copper to improve dissipation performance of heat generated from
LED. Though this copper PCB is controlled by water cooling, also thermistor can monitor it in order not to be
broken because the temperature becomes too high.
LED-UV
Has four LED-UVs.
Thermistor
Temperature of PCB can be controlled by the thermistor.
3
4
 List of Connectors
Parts No.
Pin
Connected to:*
CN1
10
UVLEDx2-DRIVE PCB Assy
3042 Slider PCBAssy
Connecting
Remarks
destination CN
CN2
Connect to LED
CN15
Thermistor connecion
* For the details of connecting destinations, refer to the block diagram.
5
6
7
8
© 2011 MIMAKI ENGINEERING CO.,LTD.
2.3.11
R.2.0
P.1
Maintenance Manual > Workflow > Ink Related Parts
1
2
3. Workflow
3.1
Ink Related Parts
3.4
Sensors
3.2
Driving Parts
3.5
UV UNIT
3.3
Electrical Parts
3
4
5
6
7
8
© 2013 MIMAKI ENGINEERING CO.,LTD.
Maintenance Manual > Workflow > Ink Related Parts > Replacement of Head Unit
Model UJF-3042/FX Issued 2010.08.27 Revised 2011.09.30 F/W ver 1.80 / 1.00 Remark
Rev.
3.1.1 Replacement of Head Unit
2.0
1
2
Head
 Never rotate the screws which are not instructed to do so in the following procedure.
Head adjustment is not required when the Head is disassembled or assembled at the user
side.Never rotate the hexagon socket head screws (cap screws) , which are used for adjustment or
attachment.
 Basically, items of the Check category in the following list only require a check of each condition, and
they do not require adjustment work. Only when adjustment is necessary, refer to the reference pages.
3
 List of Replacement Procedures
Item
Ink
Work operation
1.  Preparation of new Head, discharge
of ink and cleaning of Head
Power OFF
2.  Main power OFF
Covers
3.  Removal of the covers
Print Head Unit 4.  Cleaning of the new Head Assy
Description
Ref.
Discharge the ink and then clean the ink path and Head.
4.2.5
4
Perform the steps before the Protective solution
charge in [HEAD WASH] of [#ADJUST].
–
Remove the Front Cover, Upper Cover, Head Cover and Slider
PCB Cover.
6.1.1
Clean the new Head by the cleanig liquid, befor leplacement of the
print head.
6.2.1
5.  Removal of the Head
Remove the old Print Head..
6.  Mounting of the Head
Mount the cleaned new Head.
Covers
7.  Mounting of the covers
Mount the covers which have been removed.
Power ON
8.  Main power ON
Ink
9.  Ink charging to Head
5
6
6.1.1
–
Charge the ink and perform test printing.
Make sure that there is no Nozzle Out or Deflection.
–
Reset
10.  Reset the Shot Count
Reset the Offset Voltage
Reset SHOT COUNTS and OFFSET VOLT of the relevant head
with “RESET SHOT CNTS” of “#ADJUST”.
4.2.18
Check
11.  Check of Head Slant Adjustment
(within #ADJUST)
Print a pattern of [#SLANT ADJUST] and check the Head Slant
Adjustment.
4.2.2
12.  Check of Head Back/Forth Adjustment
(within #ADJUST)
Print a pattern of [#POSITION ADJUST] and check the Back/
Forth Adjustment of the Head.
4.2.2
13.  Check of PRINT Adjustment
(within #ADJUST)
Print a pattern of [#PRINT ADJUST] and check the PRINT
Adjustment.
4.2.1
7
8
Be sure to wear Protective Glasses and Working Gloves during the work operation.
Ink may get in your eyes depending on the working condition, or hand skin may get rough if you touch
the ink.
© 2011 MIMAKI ENGINEERING CO.,LTD.
3.1.1
R.2.0
P.1
Maintenance Manual > Workflow > Ink Related Parts > Replacement of Dumper
Model UJF-3042/FX Issued 2010.08.27 Revised 2011.09.30 F/W ver 1.80 / 1.00 Remark
Rev.
3.1.2 Replacement of Dumper
2.0
1
2
Dumper
3
 List of Replacement Procedures
Item
Ink
Work operation
1.  Discharge of ink
Description
Ref.
Discharge the ink and then clean the ink path and Head.
4.2.5
Perform the steps before the Protective solution
charge in [HEAD WASH] of [#ADJUST].
Power OFF
2.  Main power OFF
Covers
3.  Removal of the covers.
Remove the Front Cover, Upper Cover, Head Cover and Slider
PCB Cover.
6.1.1
Dumper
4.  Removal of the Dumper
Remove the Dumper of the target Head.
Make sure not to leak ink.
6.2.2
5.  Mounting of the Dumper
Mount the new Dumper.
Covers
6.  Mounting of the covers
Mount the covers which have been removed.
Power ON
7.  Main power ON
Ink
8.  Ink filling
–
4
5
6.1.1
–
Charge the ink to the Sub-tank replaced.
–
Be sure to wear Protective Glasses and Working Gloves during the work operation.
Ink may get in your eyes depending on the working condition, or hand skin may get rough if you touch
the ink.
6
7
8
© 2011 MIMAKI ENGINEERING CO.,LTD.
3.1.2
R.2.0
P.1
Maintenance Manual > Workflow > Ink Related Parts > Replacement of Pump Head
Model UJF-3042/FX Issued 2010.08.27 Revised 2011.09.30 F/W ver 1.80 / Remark
Rev.
3.1.3 Replacement of Pump Head
2.0
1
Pump Head 1
Pump Head 2
2
Pump Head 3
 List of Replacement Procedures
Item
Work operation
Description
Ref.
Power OFF
1.  Main power OFF
Covers
2.  Removal of the covers
Remove the Front Cover, Rear Cover-Right, Station Cover.
6.1.1
Station Assy
3.  Removal of the Station Assy
Remove the Station Assy.
6.2.4
Pump Head
4.  Removal of the Pump Head
Remove the Pump Head to be replaced.
Make sure not to leak ink.
6.2.3
Greasing
5.  Lubrication
Apply the grease contained together with the Pump Head.
Pump Head
6.  Pump tube aging
Rotate the pump with an electric screwdriver for one minute and
more.
7.  Mounting of the Pump Head
Mount the Pump Head.
Station Assy
8.  Mounting of the Station Assy
Mount the Station Assy.
6.2.4
Covers
9.  Mounting of the covers
Mount the covers which have been removed.
6.1.1
–
6.2.3
 Be sure to wear Protective Glasses and Working Gloves during the work operation.
Ink may get in your eyes depending on the working condition, or hand skin may get rough if you
touch the ink.
 Wipe the blue cover of Pump Head with a dry cloth for cleaning.
Never use any chemicals such as alcohol, remover or the like since it may result in cracks or surface
separations of cover.
3
4
5
6
7
 Be sure to perform Pump tube aging.
Otherwise, it may cause power swing of the pump motor or abnormal noise.
8
© 2011 MIMAKI ENGINEERING CO.,LTD.
3.1.3
R.2.0
P.1
Maintenance Manual > Workflow > Ink Related Parts > Replacement of Cartridge Guide Assy.
Model UJF-3042/FX Issued 2010.08.27 Revised 2011.09.30 F/W ver 1.80 / 1.00 Remark
Rev.
3.1.4 Replacement of Cartridge Guide Assy.
2.0
Cartridge Guide Assy.
1
2
3
 List of Replacement Procedures
Item
Ink
Work operation
1.  Discharge of ink
Description
Ref.
Discharge the ink and then clean the ink path and Head.
4.2.5
Perform the steps before the Protective solution
charge in [HEAD WASH] of [#ADJUST].
Power OFF
2.  Main power OFF
Covers
3.  Removal of the covers.
Remove the Carriage Cover and Rear Cover.
6.1.1
Disassembly
and
Reassembly
4.  Removal of the Cartridge Guide
Remove the Cartridge Guide Assy..
6.2.6
5.  Replacement of Cartridge Coupling
Assy.
(Perform this process if needed.)
Replace the Cartridge Coupling Assy..
6.2.7
6.  Mounting of the Cartridge Guide
Mount the Cartridge Guide Assy..
6.2.6
Covers
7.  Mounting of the covers
Mount the covers which have been removed.
6.1.1
Power ON
8.  Main power ON
Ink
9.  Ink filling
–
–
Fill the ink.
4
5
6
–
Be sure to wear Protective Glasses and Working Gloves during the work operation.
Ink may get in your eyes depending on the working condition, or hand skin may get rough if you touch
the ink.
7
8
© 2011 MIMAKI ENGINEERING CO.,LTD.
3.1.4
R.1.1
R.2.0
P.1
Maintenance Manual > Workflow > Ink Related Parts > Replacement of Cartridge Coupling Assy.
Model UJF-3042/FX Issued 2010.08.27 Revised 2011.09.30 F/W ver 1.80 / 1.00 Remark
Rev.
3.1.5 Replacement of Cartridge Coupling Assy.
2.0
Cartridge Coupling Assy.
1
2
Cartridge Coupling Assy.
 List of Replacement Procedures
Item
Ink
Work operation
1.  Discharge of ink
Description
Ref.
Discharge the ink and then clean the ink path and Head.
4.2.5
3
Perform the steps before the Protective solution
charge in [HEAD WASH] of [#ADJUST].
Power OFF
2.  Main power OFF
Covers
3.  Removal of the covers.
Remove the Carriage Cover and Rear Cover.
6.1.1
Disassembly
and
Reassembly
4.  Removal of the Cartridge Guide
Remove the Cartridge Guide.
6.2.6
–
5.  Removal of Cartridge Coupling Assy. Remove the Cartridge Coupling Assy..
6.2.7
6.  Mounting of Cartridge Coupling
Assy.
Mount the Cartridge Coupling Assy..
7.  Mounting of the Cartridge Guide
Mount the Cartridge Guide
6.2.6
Covers
8.  Mounting of the covers
Mount the covers which have been removed.
6.1.1
Power ON
9.  Main power ON
Ink
10.  Ink filling
4
5
–
Fill the ink.
–
Be sure to wear Protective Glasses and Working Gloves during the work operation.
Ink may get in your eyes depending on the working condition, or hand skin may get rough if you touch
the ink.
6
7
8
© 2011 MIMAKI ENGINEERING CO.,LTD.
3.1.5
R.2.0
P.1
Maintenance Manual > Workflow > Driving Parts
1
2
3. Workflow
3.1
Ink Related Parts
3.4
Sensors
3.2
Driving Parts
3.5
UV UNIT
3.3
Electrical Parts
3
4
5
6
7
8
© 2013 MIMAKI ENGINEERING CO.,LTD.
Maintenance Manual > Workflow > Driving Parts > Replacement of Z-Driving Screw
Model UJF-3042/FX Issued 2010.08.27 Revised 2011.09.30 F/W ver 1.80 / 1.00 Remark
Rev.
3.2.1 Replacement of Z-Driving Screw
2.0
Z-Driving Screw
1
2
 List of Replacement Procedures
Item
Work operation
Advance prepa- 1.  Arrangement of Y-Bar, Head and
ration
Table
Description
Ref.
Move the Y-Bar to the farthest position and bring the Head to the
cap position. Raise the Table to the highest position.
–
Power OFF
2.  Main power OFF
Covers
3.  Removal of the covers.
Remove the following covers.
• Front Cover •Rear Cover-TB
6.1.1
Disassembly
and
Reassembly
4.  Removal of the Tabel.
Remove the Table.
6.3.3
5.  Replacement of Z-Driving Screw.
Replace the Z-Driving Screw.
6.3.4
6.  Mounting of the Table.
Mount the Table.
6.3.3
–
Power ON
7.  Main power ON
Check
8.  Check of Table up/down operation
Execute [#TEST] -> [#AGEING].-> [Z SERVO]
4.2.6
Covers
9.  Mounting of the covers
Mount the covers which have been removed.
6.1.1
3
4
–
5
6
7
8
© 2011 MIMAKI ENGINEERING CO.,LTD.
3.2.1
R.2.0
P.1
Maintenance Manual > Workflow > Driving Parts > Replacement of Tabel Absorption Fan
Model UJF-3042/FX Issued 2010.08.27 Revised 2011.09.30 F/W ver 1.80 / 1.00 Remark
Rev.
3.2.2 Replacement of Tabel Absorption Fan
2.0
Table Absorption Fan Assy
1
2
Table backside
 List of Replacement Procedures
Item
Work operation
Advance prepa- 1.  Arrangement of Y-Bar, Head and
ration
Table
Description
Ref.
Move the Y-Bar to the farthest position and bring the Head to the
cap position. Raise the Table to the highest position.
–
Power OFF
2.  Main power OFF
Covers
3.  Removal of the covers.
Remove the following covers.
• Front Cover •Rear Cover-TB
6.1.1
Disassembly
and
Reassembly
4.  Removal of the Tabel.
Remove the Table.
6.3.3
5.  Replacement of Table Absorption
Fan.
Replace the Table Absorption Fan.
6.3.7
6.  Mounting of the Table.
Mount the Table.
6.3.3
Covers
7.  Mounting of the covers
Mount the covers which have been removed.
6.1.1
Power ON
8.  Main power ON
–
–
3
4
5
6
7
8
© 2011 MIMAKI ENGINEERING CO.,LTD.
3.2.2
R.2.0
P.1
Maintenance Manual > Workflow > Electrical Parts
1
2
3. Workflow
3.1
Ink Related Parts
3.4
Sensors
3.2
Driving Parts
3.5
UV UNIT
3.3
Electrical Parts
3
4
5
6
7
8
© 2013 MIMAKI ENGINEERING CO.,LTD.
Maintenance Manual > Workflow > Electrical Parts > Replacement of Main PCB
Model UJF-3042/FX Issued 2010.08.27 Revised 2011.09.30 F/W ver 1.80 / 1.00 Remark
Rev.
3.3.1 Replacement of Main PCB
2.0
1
2
Main PCB Assy.
 Outline
If Main PCB Assy. has replaced, various parameters must be registered to Main PCB ROM after the replacement.
Considerable time is required to readjust and reconfigure these settings. Therefore, for ease of use and better printing
quality, copy (upload) the setting value to a PC before replacement, and write (download) the copied settings onto the
Main PCB from the PC after replacement.
If it is impossible to upload the parameters, conduct Parameter Draw to note the setting values.
Then manually register the values after replacing the PCB.
3
4
 List of Replacement Procedures
Item
Work operation
Advance prepa- 1.  Parameter upload
ration
Description
Ref.
Before the PCB is replaced, upload its parameter to the PC.
*1
Power OFF
2.  Main power OFF
Covers
3.  Removal of covers.
Pull the Power Supply Chassis from the back.
6.1.1
Main PCB
Assy.
4.  Removal of the Main PCB Assy.
Remove the Main PCB Assy..
6.4.2
5.  Mounting of the Main PCB Assy.
Mount the Main PCB Assy..
–
Power ON
6.  Main power ON
Check
7.  Updating the firmware
Upgrade the firmware to the latest version.
8.  Parameter initialization
Start up the machine in maintenance mode and initialize the parameters.
9.  Parameter download
Download the parameter which has been uploaded in the operation
“1”.
Covers
10.  Mounting of the covers
6
–
*1
Put the Power Supply Chassis in the original place.
6.1.1
3.3.1
7
*1
* See “SERVICE DOCUMENTS”.
© 2011 MIMAKI ENGINEERING CO.,LTD.
5
R.2.0
8
P.1
Maintenance Manual > Workflow > Electrical Parts > Replacement of 3042 Slider Relay PCB Assy
Model UJF-3042/FX Issued 2010.08.27 Revised 2011.09.30 F/W ver 1.80 / 1.00 Remark
Rev.
3.3.2 Replacement of 3042 Slider Relay PCB Assy
2.0
1
3042 Slider Relay PCB Assy
 Outline
If 3042 Slider Relay PCB Assy. has replaced, various parameters must be registered to 3042 Slider Relay PCB ROM
after the replacement. Considerable time is required to readjust and reconfigure these settings. Therefore, for ease of
use and better printing quality, copy (upload) the setting value to a PC before replacement, and write (download) the
copied settings onto the Main PCB from the PC after replacement.
3
If it is impossible to upload the parameters, conduct Parameter Draw to note the setting values.
Then manually register the values after replacing the PCB.
 List of Replacement Procedures
Item
Work operation
Advance prepa- 1.  Parameter upload
ration
Description
Ref.
Before the PCB is replaced, upload its parameter to the PC.
2
4
*1
Power OFF
2.  Main power OFF
Covers
3.  Removal of covers.
Remove the Rear Cover.
6.1.1
3042 Slider
Relay PCB
Assy
4.  Removal of the 3042 Slider Relay
PCB Assy.
Remove the 3042 Slider Relay PCB Assy..
6.4.3
5.  Mounting of the 3042 Slider Relay
PCB Assy
Mount the 3042 Slider Relay PCB Assy.
Covers
6.  Mounting of the covers
Mount the covers which have been removed.
Power ON
7.  Main power ON
Check
8.  Parameter download
Download the parameter which has been uploaded in the operation
“1”.
9.  Inputting the serial No.
From “#ADJUST” , input the serial No.
–
6.1.1
–
5
6
*1
7
* See “SERVICE DOCUMENTS”.
8
© 2011 MIMAKI ENGINEERING CO.,LTD.
3.3.2
R.2.0
P.1
Maintenance Manual > Workflow > Electrical Parts > Replacement of ID Contact PCB
Model UJF-3042/FX Issued 2010.08.27 Revised 2011.09.30 F/W ver 1.80 / 1.00 Remark
Rev.
3.3.3 Replacement of ID Contact PCB
2.0
ID Contact PCB
ID Contact PCB
1
2
3
 List of Replacement Procedures
Item
Work operation
Description
Ref.
Ink
1.  Discharge of ink
Power OFF
2.  Main power OFF
Covers
3.  Removal of the covers.
Remove the Rear Cover and Cartridge cover.
6.1.1
Disassembly
and
Reassembly
4.  Removal of the Cartridge Guide
Remove the Cartridge Guide.
6.2.6
5.  Replacement of ID Contact PCB
Replace the Cartridge Coupling Assy..
6.4.7
6.  Mounting of the Cartridge Guide
Mount the Cartridge Coupling Assy..
6.2.6
Covers
7.  Mounting of the covers
Mount the covers which have been removed.
6.1.1
Power ON
8.  Main power ON
Ink
9.  Ink filling
Discharge the ink in the path of slot applied, and remove all Ink
Cartridges of the Cartridge Unit.
4.2.5
–
4
5
–
Fill the ink.
–
Be sure to wear Protective Glasses and Working Gloves during the work operation.
Ink may get in your eyes depending on the working condition, or hand skin may get rough if you touch
the ink.
6
7
8
© 2011 MIMAKI ENGINEERING CO.,LTD.
3.3.3
R.2.0
P.1
Maintenance Manual > Workflow > Sensors
1
2
3. Workflow
3.1
Ink Related Parts
3.4
Sensors
3.2
Driving Parts
3.5
UV UNIT
3.3
Electrical Parts
3
4
5
6
7
8
© 2013 MIMAKI ENGINEERING CO.,LTD.
Maintenance Manual > Workflow > UV UNIT
1
2
3. Workflow
3.1
Ink Related Parts
3.4
Sensors
3.2
Driving Parts
3.5
UV UNIT
3.3
Electrical Parts
3
4
5
6
7
8
© 2013 MIMAKI ENGINEERING CO.,LTD.
Maintenance Manual > Workflow > UV UNIT > Replacement of LEDUV Irradiation Assy
Model UJF-3042/FX Issued 2010.08.27 Revised 2011.09.30 F/W ver 1.80 / 1.00 Remark
Rev.
3.5.1 Replacement of LEDUV Irradiation Assy
2.0
LEDUV Irradiation Assy
2
 List of Replacement Procedures
Item
Work operation
Cooling Water
1.  Drain the cooling water
Power OFF
2.  Main power OFF
Covers
3.  Removal of the covers
LED-UV UNIT 4.  Removal and disassembling of the
LED-UV UNIT
Ref.
Description
4.2.8
Drain the cooling water of the LED-UV Unit
“#ADJUST EXCHANGE LED UV”
Remove the Front Cover, Upper Cover.
6.1.1
Remove the LED-UV UNIT and disassemble it.
6.7.1
Replace the LED-UV irradiation Assy.
6.  Assembling of the LED-UV UNIT
and attaching it
Assemble the LED-UV UNIT and attach it.
Covers
7.  Mounting of the covers
Mount the covers which have been removed.
Cooling Water
8.  Filling cooling water
Fill cooling water of the LED-UV UNIT “Total amount: 450ml”.
Power ON
9.  Main power ON
10.  Operation checking of the LED- UV
UNIT
3
4
5.  Replacing Assy
Operation
check
1
6.1.1
-
5
-
Check the operation of the LED - UV UNIT
6
 Be sure to wear Protective Glasses and Working Gloves during the work operation.
7
8
© 2011 MIMAKI ENGINEERING CO.,LTD.
3.5.1
R.2.0
P.1
Maintenance Manual > Workflow > UV UNIT > Replacement of LEDUVx2-DRIVE PCB Assy
Model UJF-3042/FX Issued 2010.08.27 Revised 2011.09.30 F/W ver 1.80 / 1.00 Remark
Rev.
3.5.2 Replacement of LEDUVx2-DRIVE PCB Assy
2.0
1
LEDUVx2-DRIVE PCB Assy
2
 List of Replacement Procedures
Item
Work operation
Cooling Water
1.  Drain the cooling water
Power OFF
2.  Main power OFF
Covers
3.  Removal of the covers
LED-UV UNIT 4.  Removal and disassembling of the
LED-UV UNIT
Description
Ref.
Drain the cooling water of the LED-UV Unit
“#ADJUST EXCHANGE LED UV”
4.2.8
-
Remove the Front Cover, Upper Cover.
6.1.1
Remove the LED-UV UNIT and disassemble it until PCB can be
replaced.
Perform the procedures up to the Step 11. of “6.7.1 LED-UV
UNIT”
6.7.1
5.  Exchange the PCB
Exchange the LEDUVx2-DRIVE PCB Assy.
6.  Assembling of the LED-UV UNIT
and attaching it
Assemble the LED-UV UNIT and attach it.
Covers
7.  Mounting of the covers
Mount the covers which have been removed.
Cooling Water
8.  Filling cooling water
Fill cooling water of the LED-UV UNIT “Total amount: 450ml”.
Power ON
9.  Main power ON
Operation
check
10.  Operation checking of the LED- UV
UNIT
3
4
6.1.1
-
5
Check the operation of the LED - UV UNIT
-
6
 Be sure to wear Protective Glasses and Working Gloves during the work operation.
7
8
© 2011 MIMAKI ENGINEERING CO.,LTD.
3.5.2
R.2.0
P.1
Maintenance Manual > Adjustment > Operation Matrix
1
2
3
4. Adjustment
4.1
Operation Matrix
4.2
Adjustment Items
4.3
Mechanical Adjustment
4
5
6
7
8
© 2013 MIMAKI ENGINEERING CO.,LTD.
Maintenance Manual > Adjustment > Adjustment Items
1
2
3
4. Adjustment
4.1
Operation Matrix
4.2
Adjustment Items
4.3
Mechanical Adjustment
4
5
6
7
8
© 2013 MIMAKI ENGINEERING CO.,LTD.
Maintenance Manual > Adjustment > Adjustment Items > PRINT ADJUST
Model UJF-3042/FX Issued 2010.08.27 Revised 2011.09.30 F/W ver 1.80 / 1.00
Rev.
Remark
4.2.1 PRINT ADJUST
2.0
 Outline
Draw the built-in patterns, and compensate the parameter so that the drop positions of other heads are on the same
line as the drop position of reference head (Head 1) in the Y-direction.
 Work Procedures
1. Set Media at X-origin
FUNCTION
#ADJUST
<ent>
#ADJUST
PRINT ADJUST
<ent>
1
.
Set the drawing origin as follows;
(Set in [LOCAL] -> [ORIGIN])
X Š 0, Y > 0
2. Display [#ADJUST] -> [PRN.adjust].
#PRINT ADJUST
SELCT :SiDir
2
3. Select “SiDir” on the [SELECT] display.
4. Press the [ENTER] key to draw the pattern.
#PRINT ADJUST
SiDir:PRINT
[ENTER]: To start Pattern drawing
Pattern drawing
[]: Screen to input compensation value
(Without drawing)
[] [] []: To start Jog mode (move the drawing origin)
5. Check and compensate the patterns.
Check and execute the compensation for H1A-H1B~H4B.
[] / []: Compensating value input
3
4
[ENTER]: Confirms (Next)
Enlarged (x60)
Reference head mark
Input unit: 35 µm (720dpi)
Input the compensating value, referring to the figure
below, if the displacement on the drop position of
head applied for the compensation occurs either right
or left against the reference head.
Head under adjustment
Reference
head
Reference head
6
Head under adjustment
#PRINT ADJUST
H1A-H1B : 0.0
-99.9~99.9
Adjust on the same line as
Reference head.
5
Reference head
Head under
adjustment
7
6. When compensated, draw and check the patterns again.
#PRINT ADJUST
H1A-H4B :
0.0
-99.9~99.9
© 2011 MIMAKI ENGINEERING CO.,LTD.
Repeat “Drawing -> Checking (Compensating)” until
any compensation is not required.
4.2.1
R.2.0
8
P.1
Maintenance Manual > Adjustment > Adjustment Items > HEAD ADJUST
Model UJF-3042/FX Issued 2010.08.27 Revised 2011.09.30 F/W ver 1.80 / 1.00
Rev.
Remark
4.2.2 HEAD ADJUST
2.0
 Outline
On the drawing with the built-in patterns, the slant and the back and forth positions of each head are checked and
mechanically adjusted.
 [HEAD ADJUST] consists of the slant adjustment and back/forth adjustment.
When either one of the above is adjusted, be sure to check the other. If any adjustment is required,
repeat both of the adjustments alternately until any adjustment is not required on both.
 When the head adjustment is incorrect, be sure to execute the adjustment since it affects other parameter adjustments.
2
 Head Adjusting Flow
START
Pattern print (Slant adjust: Normal)
Head Slant
Adjustment
(refer to Page2)
Pattern check
Normal?
Adjusting (Slant adjust: Normal)
3
No
Yes
Pattern print (Slant adjust: Fine)
Pattern check
Normal?
Adjusting (Slant adjust: Fine)
4
No
Yes
Pattern print (Position adjust) 1, 2
Head Back/Forth
Adjustment (refer to
Page7)
1
Pattern check
Normal?
Adjusting (Position adjust: Normal) 1, 2
5
No
Yes
Adjusted after
Slant adjust?
Yes
No
6
Refer to PRINT ADJUST (4.2.1)
7
8
© 2011 MIMAKI ENGINEERING CO.,LTD.
4.2.2
R.2.0
P.1
Maintenance Manual > Adjustment > Adjustment Items > HEAD ADJUST
Model UJF-3042/FX Issued 2010.08.27 Revised 2011.09.30 F/W ver 1.80 / 1.00
Rev.
Remark
4.2.2 HEAD ADJUST
2.0
 Outline of Head Slant Adjustment
34
192 nozzle
 Slant adjust: Normal
2
4
1
150 dpi
56
3 nozzle
(When CMWKWR is set)
150 dpi
192 nozzle
12
2
5
3
Enlarged
Bad
Good Exam-
4
5
Specified value:
0±10µm
X(+)-direction
Adjust so that the dots in the
overlapping area are in alignment.
 Slant adjust: Fine
2
4
6
5
Enlarged
Bad
Good Exam-
7
8
Specified value:
0±10µm
X(+)-direction
© 2011 MIMAKI ENGINEERING CO.,LTD.
Adjust so that the dots in the
overlapping area are in alignment.
4.2.2
R.2.0
P.2
Maintenance Manual > Adjustment > Adjustment Items > HEAD ADJUST
Model UJF-3042/FX Issued 2010.08.27 Revised 2011.09.30 F/W ver 1.80 / 1.00
Rev.
Remark
4.2.2 HEAD ADJUST
2.0
 Procedures of Head Slant Adjustment
1. Set Media at X-origin.
FUNCTION
#ADJUST
<ent>
#ADJUST
HEAD ADJUST
<ent>
Set the drawing origin as follows;
(Set in [LOCAL] -> [ORIGIN])
X ≥ 0, Y > 0
#HEAD ADJUST
SLANT ADJUST
<ent>
POSITION ADJUST <ent>
2. Display [#ADJUST] -> [HEAD ADJUST] -> [SLANTadjust].
#HEAD ADJUST
MODE :NORMAL
FINE
4. Press the [ENTER] key to draw the pattern.
1
3. Select “NORMAL” on the mode selecting screen.
2
[ENTER]: To start Pattern drawing
[] [] [] [] : To start Jog mode (move the drawing origin)
#SLANT ADJUST
PRINT START
:ent
3
#SLANT ADJUST
PRINTING
5. Check if no displacement occurs between the 1st scanning and
the 2nd scanning of the head.
*If the adjustment is required, execute the Procedures of Head
Slant Adjustment Adjusting Procedure (p.4).
 Check patterns on all heads (1-8).
(Execute for all heads even when one head is
replaced.)
Specified value:
0±10µm
#HEAD ADJUST
SLANT ADJUST
<ent>
POSITION ADJUST <ent>
 If there is no displacement, execute “Procedures
of Head Back/Forth Adjustment (p.7)” successively.
6. Select “FINE” on the mode selecting screen of
[#HEAD ADJUST] -> [SLANTadjust] then draw the pattern.
#SLANT ADJUST
PRINT START
5
6
7. Select “FINE” on the mode selecting screen.
8. Press the [ENTER] key to draw the pattern.
#HEAD ADJUST
MODE :FINE
NORMAL
4
7
[ENTER]: To start Pattern drawing
[ONLINE]: Adjusts overlap amount (0~192)
8
:ent
#SLANT ADJUST
PRINTING
© 2011 MIMAKI ENGINEERING CO.,LTD.
4.2.2
R.2.0
P.3
Maintenance Manual > Adjustment > Adjustment Items > HEAD ADJUST
Model UJF-3042/FX Issued 2010.08.27 Revised 2011.09.30 F/W ver 1.80 / 1.00
Rev.
Remark
4.2.2 HEAD ADJUST
2.0
9. Check if no displacement occurs between the 1st scanning and
the 4nd scanning of the head.
*If the adjustment is required, execute the Procedures of Head
Slant Adjustment Adjusting Procedure (p.4).
 Check patterns on all heads (1-8).
(Execute for all heads even when one head is
replaced.)
 If there is no displacement, execute “Procedures
of Head Back/Forth Adjustment (p.7)” successively.
Specified value:
0±10µm
1
2
 Procedures of Head Slant Adjustment Adjusting Procedure
1. Loosen the slant fixing screw of the target head.
3
Slant fixing screw
4
Head slant adjustment screw
2. Rotate the slant adjustment screw according to the amount of
displacement to adjust the slant.
Overlapped portion
To correct slanting left: CCW
Rough indication of turning angle: About 2.5 µm by one-eighth
rotation
Direction of turning the Micro Adjuster
To correct slanting left: Turn counterclockwise (CCW).
To correct slanting right: Turn clockwise (CW).
To correct slanting right: CW
Overlapped portion
Y (+)
6
7
3. Tighten the loosened slant fixing screw.
X (+)
5
Tighten the screws with care that the head is not
shifted from the correct position.
4. Redraw Patterns and check if there is no slanting.
8
Repeat “Adjusting” -> “Patterns Drawing” until no
more displacement is available.
© 2011 MIMAKI ENGINEERING CO.,LTD.
4.2.2
R.2.0
P.4
Maintenance Manual > Adjustment > Adjustment Items > HEAD ADJUST
Model UJF-3042/FX Issued 2010.08.27 Revised 2011.09.30 F/W ver 1.80 / 1.00
Rev.
Remark
4.2.2 HEAD ADJUST
2.0
 Head Back/Forth Adjusting Patterns 1
1
head2
Enlarged
2
head3
3 nozzle
3
4
192 nozzle
192 nozzle
head1
Basic head
Specified value:
0±10µm
head 1
5
head 2
Bad
Good Exam-
6
7
8
© 2011 MIMAKI ENGINEERING CO.,LTD.
4.2.2
R.2.0
P.5
Maintenance Manual > Adjustment > Adjustment Items > HEAD ADJUST
Model UJF-3042/FX Issued 2010.08.27 Revised 2011.09.30 F/W ver 1.80 / 1.00
Rev.
Remark
4.2.2 HEAD ADJUST
2.0
 Head Back/Forth Adjusting Patterns 2
The pattern below is drawn in 1 Pass. This is the pattern to adjust back and forth using overlap of the basic
Head and 3 nozzle of the Head 3.
head1
Basic head
head2
192 nozzle
1
head3
3 nozzle
Overlap of 3 nozzle
192 nozzle
2
3
4
W
Y
M
CL
B
C
Adjust three colors of Magenta, Yellow and
White so that they are overlapped each other.
Adjust three colors of Cyan, Black and Clear
so that they are overlapped each other.
Specified value : 0±10µm
Specified value : 0±10µm
5
6
7
8
© 2011 MIMAKI ENGINEERING CO.,LTD.
4.2.2
R.2.0
P.6
Maintenance Manual > Adjustment > Adjustment Items > HEAD ADJUST
Model UJF-3042/FX Issued 2010.08.27 Revised 2011.09.30 F/W ver 1.80 / 1.00
Rev.
Remark
4.2.2 HEAD ADJUST
2.0
 Procedures of Head Back/Forth Adjustment
1. Set Media at X-origin.
FUNCTION
#ADJUST
<ent>
#ADJUST
HEAD ADJUST
<ent>
Set the drawing origin as follows;
(Set in [LOCAL] -> [ORIGIN])
X ≥ 0, Y > 0
#HEAD ADJUST
POSITION ADJUST <ent>
SLANT ADJUST
<ent>
2. Display [#ADJUST] -> [HEAD ADJUST] -> [POSITION
ADJUST].
1
3. Select either of the pattern 1 or the pattern 2.
#POSITION ADJUST
PATTERN : pattern1
pattern2
2
4. Press the [ENTER] key to draw the pattern.
[ENTER]: To start Pattern drawing
#POSITION ADJUST
PRINT START
:ent
[] [] [] [] :To start Jog mode (move the drawing origin)
Specified value:
0±10µm
5. Check if the space of pattern 1 is in compliance with the specification.
head 1
head 2
Specified value: head 1-2 : 0 ± 10 µm
head 1-3 : 254 ± 10 µm
(The space of each head shall be according to
the value shown in the left figure.)
3
4
• *If the pattern is out of the specification, execute the Head
back/forth adjustment (refer to Page8).
If the adjustment with [SLANT ADJUST] or [POSITION ADJUST] is executed, check them again from
the beginning then repeat this process until any
adjustment is not required on both.
5
6
7
8
© 2011 MIMAKI ENGINEERING CO.,LTD.
4.2.2
R.2.0
P.7
Maintenance Manual > Adjustment > Adjustment Items > HEAD ADJUST
Model UJF-3042/FX Issued 2010.08.27 Revised 2011.09.30 F/W ver 1.80 / 1.00
Rev.
Remark
4.2.2 HEAD ADJUST
2.0
 Head Back/Forth Adjustment Adjusting Procedure
1. Loosen the back/forth fixing screw of the target head.
2. Rotate the back/front adjustment screw according to the amount
of displacement to adjust the back and forth positions.
Rough indication of turning angle: About 5 µm by one-eighth
rotation
Back/forth fixing
screw
Head back/forth
adjustment screw
Direction of turning the micro adjuster
Dot position down: Turn clockwise (CW).
Dot position up: Turn counterclockwise (CCW).
1
2
3. Tighten the loosened back/forth fixing screw.
Tighten the screws with care that the head is not
shifted from the correct position.
3
4. Draw the pattern again and check if no displacement occurs.
Repeat “Adjusting” -> “Patterns Drawing” until no
more displacement is available.
4
5
6
7
8
© 2011 MIMAKI ENGINEERING CO.,LTD.
4.2.2
R.2.0
P.8
Maintenance Manual > Adjustment > Adjustment Items > CAPPING
Model UJF-3042/FX Issued 2010.08.27 Revised 2011.09.30 F/W ver
1.80 / 1.00
Rev.
Remark
4.2.3 CAPPING
2.0
 Outline
Adjusts the location for capping and wiper. Adjusted value is saved in the system parameter.
 Adjustment procedure
1. Select [#ADJUST] -> [CAPPING].
FUNCTION
#ADJUST
<ent>
#ADJUST
CAPPING
<ent>
1
2. Adjust the capping position.
#CAPPING
CAP POS. =
(1) Be sure to adjust it to the position at which the cap may contact the head.
0.0mm
Plus numeric
direction
Minus numeric
direction
(2) Turn off the power supply, and check that the carriage does
not move to the table side.
[] / []: Horizontally shifts the head.
2
3
[ENTER]: Finalizes
[END]: End
 When the excitation of the motor has been cut, the
carriage may move to the table side by itself. At
this time, the cap Assy moves to the bottom, and it
results in capping defect. Therefore, be sure to
check (2) above.
Cap slider perspective diagram
4
5
6
Capping OK
Power OFF
7
The carriage moves by
itself.
The cap slider moves to the position at
which it goes down, and it results in capping defect.
CappingNG
8
3. After adjustment, register with the [END] key and then terminate the operation.
© 2011 MIMAKI ENGINEERING CO.,LTD.
4.2.3
R.2.0
P.1
Maintenance Manual > Adjustment > Adjustment Items > ADJUST WIPER
Model UJF-3042/FX Issued 2010.08.27 Revised 2011.09.30 F/W ver
1.80 / 1.00
Rev.
Remark
4.2.4 ADJUST WIPER
2.0
 Outline
Adjusts the wiper position.
 Adjustment procedure
1. Select [#ADJUST] -> [ADJUST WIPER].
FUNCTION
#ADJUST
<ent>
#ADJUST
ADJUST WIPER
<ent>
1
2. Confirm and adjust the center position of the head and the wiper
nozzle.
#ADJUST WIPER
WIPER POS.
= 0.0
-20.0 ~20.0
[] / []: Horizontally shifts the head.
2
3
[ENTER]: Finalizes and end
[END]: End
3. After adjustment, register with the [END] key and then terminate the operation.
Head
4
Wiper nozzle
5
6
7
8
© 2011 MIMAKI ENGINEERING CO.,LTD.
4.2.4
R.2.0
P.1
Maintenance Manual > Adjustment > Adjustment Items > HEAD WASH(#ADJUST)
Model UJF-3042/FX Issued 2010.08.27 Revised 2011.09.30 F/W ver 1.80 / 1.00 Remark
Rev.
4.2.5 HEAD WASH(#ADJUST)
2.0
 Outline
Discharge the ink and clean the Tube, Dumper and Head using dedicated cleaning liquid. This process is normally
performed at the factory.
 As non-filling state remains after the completion of cleaning, the Initial Filling or filling of corresponding
head is required.
 There is a [HEAD WASH] item in [MAINTENANCE] function (open to users), however, it is different
from the procedure described in this section.
1
 Procedure of HEAD WASH
1. Select [#ADJUST] -> [HEAD WASH].
2
<LOCAL>
[FUNCTION]
FUNCTION
#ADJUST
<ENT>
#ADJUST
HEAD WASH
<ent>
3
2. Select the Head to be cleaned.
[] [] [] [] : Head selection
WASH
HEAD [MCYKWR]
4
[ENTER]: Confirms (Next)
WASH
REMOVE CARTRIDGE
3. Remove the INK CARTRIDGE of the Head to be cleaned.
When removal of the INK CARTRIDGE is confirmed, the next
step will be taken.
WASHING
PLEASE WAIT
4. Ink discharge starts.
After a certain processing time, the next step will be taken.
5. Set the Cleaning Tool to the target slot and then press ENTER
key.
WASH
SET CLEAN TOOL
[ENTER]
WASHING
PLEASE WAIT
6. Cleaning liquid is taken in, and the ink path is cleaned.
5
6
After a certain processing time, the next step will be taken.
7. Remove the Cleaning Tool.
WASH
REMOVE TOOL
When removal of the Cleaning Tool is confirmed, the next step
will be taken.
WASHING
PLEASE WAIT
7
8. Cleaning liquid is discharged.
After a certain processing time, the next step will be taken.
This process is performed twice.
TUBE CLEANING
COMPLETED :ent
© 2011 MIMAKI ENGINEERING CO.,LTD.
8
9. The above steps 5 to 8 are performed again.
After that, the next step will be taken.
10. As it enters in the status waiting for tube cleaning work, fill
cleaning liquid inside the Air Bleeder Tube and when it is completed, press the ENTER key.
4.2.5
R.2.0
P.1
Maintenance Manual > Adjustment > Adjustment Items > HEAD WASH(#ADJUST)
Model UJF-3042/FX Issued 2010.08.27 Revised 2011.09.30 F/W ver 1.80 / 1.00 Remark
Rev.
4.2.5 HEAD WASH(#ADJUST)
2.0
* Cleaning method of Air Bleeder Tube
 For this work, the syringe is used, however, do not
pull out the piston when you connect with the air
drain port. It may absorb foreign object into the
nozzle and cause nozzle defect.
Fill 30ml of cleaning liquid for F-200 from the air drain port
located next to the head.
Tube : SJ-MMK-3x5
Syringe
Use the jig of the syringe with the filter (Millex
SLLHH25NS) and extension tube.
1
(1) Remove the jig from the air drain port.
(2) Fill air into the syringe and set again the jig whose filter was
replaced on the air drain port.
(3) Fill air into the air drain port by pulling out cleaning liquid.
Filter : SLLHH25NS
Fitting : VRM306
WIPER CLEANING
COMPLETED
:ent
2
(4) Remove the jig and cap the air drain port.
Press the ENTER key and proceed to the next step.
11. The machine becomes ready for Wiper cleaning. Perform Wiper
cleaning and after that press ENTER key.
3
12. Select whether to finish Head cleaning or to continue.
WASH
END<
>CONTINUE
[] (END)
: Finishes the HEAD WASH (this sequence).
[] (CONTINUE) : Goes to the protective solution charge
sequence.
（See below description for each selection.)
 When the HEAD WASH is finished, the initial
ink charge state is defined as unprocessed.
 When selecting finish
4
5
Returns to [#ADJUST] function selection window.
#ADJUST
HEAD WASH
<ent>
6
 When selecting the Protective solution charge
1. Set the transfer tool containing protective solution to the ink
slot.
WASH
SET TRANS TOOL
When attachment of transfer tool is confirmed, the next step
will be taken.
WASHING
PLEASE WAIT
2. Protective solution is taken in, and it is charged to the Tube,
Dumper and Head.
WASH
REMOVE TOOL
After a certain processing time, the next step will be taken.
3. Remove the Trans Tool.
WASHING
PLEASE WAIT
#ADJUST
HEAD WASH
7
When removal of the Trans Tool is confirmed, the next step will
be taken.
<ent>
8
4. Protective solution is discharged.
After a certain processing time, the next step will be taken.
5. Returns to [#ADJUST] function selection window.
© 2011 MIMAKI ENGINEERING CO.,LTD.
4.2.5
R.2.0
P.2
Maintenance Manual > Adjustment > Adjustment Items > HEAD ID
Model UJF-3042/FX Issued 2010.08.27 Revised 2011.09.30 F/W ver
1.80 / 1.00
Rev.
Remark
4.2.6 HEAD ID
2.0
 Outline
HEAD ID represents each head characteristic written at shipping. The variation between heads is unified by inputting
the value to printer.
Additionally, the number of shots is cleared by setting the indication part of the number of shots to “0”.
As this machine reads the head ID from the mounted memory (ROM) on the print head at each startup, it
is not necessary to set the head ID.
1
You can confirm/change the head ID by the following procedures.
However, as the head ID you changed is not stored, it will return to the value set in the memory of the
print head when the power supply is turned OFF.
2
 Work Procedures
1. Select [#ADJUST] -> [HEAD ID].
FUNCTION
#ADJUST
<ent>
#ADJUST
HEAD ID
<ent>
3
4
2. Confirm the Head ID from the label stuck on head FFC.
P/N N2207920
S/N 0000-000000D
Vpp-Odd 16.4V
Vpp-Even 16.1V
Even row side
Odd row side
For this machine, Vpp-Odd indicated on FFC of the
head represents the even row and Vpp-Even represents the odd row. Be careful about it.
5
3. Select the input nozzle row (ID).
HEAD ID
HEAD[1]
Vod =27.0 Vev =27.0
HEAD ID
HEAD[1]
Vod =27.0 Vev =27.2
6
4. Input the driving voltages (Vod, Vev).
Value of Vpp-Odd
Value of Vpp-Even
[ENTER]: To select Head
[] / []: To move Cursor.
7
[] / []: To change Value
[END]: To fix and end
8
© 2011 MIMAKI ENGINEERING CO.,LTD.
4.2.6
R.2.0
P.1
Maintenance Manual > Adjustment > Adjustment Items > HEAD TEMP
Model UJF-3042/FX Issued 2010.08.27 Revised 2011.09.30 F/W ver 1.80 / 1.00
Rev.
Remark
4.2.7 HEAD TEMP
2.0
 Function
Confirms/sets the head temperature.
Under normal conditions, do not change this.
1
 Procedure
1. Select [#ADJUST] -> [HEAD TEMP].
FUNCTION
#ADJUST
<ent>
#ADJUST
HEAD TEMP
<ent>
2
3
2. Enter (confirm) the head temperature.
#HEAD TEMP
TEMP = 45°C
[] / []: Changes values.
[ENTER]: Confirms
[END]: Return
4
5
6
7
8
© 2011 MIMAKI ENGINEERING CO.,LTD.
4.2.7
R.2.0
P.1
Maintenance Manual > Adjustment > Adjustment Items > EXCHANGE LED UV
Model UJF-3042/FX Issued 2010.08.27 Revised 2011.09.30 F/W ver 1.80 / 1.00 Remark
Rev.
4.2.8 EXCHANGE LED UV
2.0
 Outline
To exchange the LED-UV UNIT, the cooling water must be drained according to the following steps. This procedure
is used also for Water Cooling Device maintenance.
 Procedure of EXCHANGE LED UV
FUNCTION
#ADJUST
1. Select [#ADJUST] -> [EXCHANGE LED UV<ent>] then press
ENTER key.
<ENT>
The machine becomes ready for draining the water from the
Cooling water tank.
#ADJUST
EXCHANGE LED UV<ent>
1
2
2. Drain the cooling water using a syringe.
3
3. When the machine confirms that the cooling water is drained, it
displays [WASTE AF :ent] in the window. Press Enter key.
#EXCHANGE LED UV
WASTE AF
:ent
4. [PLEASE WAIT] is displayed in the window. The Cooling
water Pump is activated and water inside the Tube is drained
(directed to the tank).
#EXCHANGE LED UV
PLEASE WAIT
5. When [READY to EXCHANGE] is displayed in the window,
drain the cooling water from the tank again. Water should be
drained completely at this time.
#EXCHANGE LED UV
READY to EXCHANGE
#ADJUST
EXCHANGE LED UV<ent>
6. After a while, the first menu will be displayed.
4
5
6
Goes back to first menu
7. Charge the cooling water when LED-UV UNIT exchange is
completed.
Charge the full volume (450 ml) as in the case of installation or
cooling water exchange.
7
8
© 2011 MIMAKI ENGINEERING CO.,LTD.
4.2.8
R.2.0
P.1
Maintenance Manual > Adjustment > Adjustment Items > SERIAL No.
Model UJF-3042/FX Issued 2010.08.27 Revised 2011.09.30 F/W ver 1.80 / 1.00
Rev.
Remark
4.2.9 SERIAL No.
2.0
 Outline
Confirming and changing of the serial No. of UJF-3042/FX.
Normally, don’t change the serial No., which has been registered.
1
 Work Procedures
1. Select [#ADJUST] -> [SERIAL No.].
FUNCTION
#ADJUST
<ent>
#ADJUST
SERIAL No.
<ent>
2
2. Confirm the serial No., or change it.
#SERIAL No.
S/N 00000000
3
[] / []: To move Cursor
[] / []: To change Value
[ENTER]: Confirms
[END]: Return
4
5
6
7
8
© 2011 MIMAKI ENGINEERING CO.,LTD.
4.2.9
R.2.0
P.1
Maintenance Manual > Adjustment > Adjustment Items > DEALER No.
Model UJF-3042/FX Issued 2010.08.27 Revised 2011.09.30 F/W ver 1.80 / 1.00
Rev.
Remark
4.2.10 DEALER No.
2.0
 Outline
Check and set the dealer No.
For dealer No., 8-digit alphameric characters (0 to 9, A to Z) can be input.
 Procedures
1. Select [#ADJUST] -> [DEALER No.].
FUNCTION
#ADJUST
<ENT>
#ADJUST
DEALER No.
<ENT>
1
2
2. Input (check) the dealer No.
#DEALER No.
D/N : 10000000
[] / [] : Changing value
[] / [] : Moving cursor
(When the cursor is at the right end or the left end, even if the key is
pressed, it does not move.)
[ENTER] : Confirmation
3
[END] : Cancel
4
5
6
7
8
© 2011 MIMAKI ENGINEERING CO.,LTD.
4.2.10
R.2.0
P.1
Maintenance Manual > Adjustment > Adjustment Items > ORIGIN ADJUST
Model UJF-3042/FX Issued 2010.08.27 Revised 2011.09.30 F/W ver 1.80 / 1.00
Rev.
Remark
4.2.11 ORIGIN ADJUST
2.0
1
Origin Seal
25
2
32
 Outline
The pattern is drawn and the origin position (the drawing reference point located at the front right) is parameter-compensated.
 Work Procedures
3
1. Display [#ADJUST] -> [ORIGIN ADJUST].
FUNCTION
#ADJUST
<ent>
#ADJUST
ORIGIN ADJUST
<ent>
4
2. Press the [] key to draw the pattern.
[]: To execute Pattern drawing
[]: To initialize Adjustment value
#ORIGN ADJUST
CLEAR <
> DRAW
5
#ORIGN ADJUST
PRINTING
3. Compensate it so that the corner part of pattern and the inside
corner part of Origin Seal align on the same line.
#ORIGN ADJUST
X=***.* Y=***.*
Specified value: X=22.0
Y=32.0
7
[],[]: To move Cursor.
[],[]: To change Compensating value
(unit: 0.1 mm)
Pattern
6
[ENTER]: To register Compensating value
Origin
4. After compensated, draw the pattern again, and then check the
displacement and compensate it if necessary.
8
Form
© 2011 MIMAKI ENGINEERING CO.,LTD.
4.2.11
R.2.0
P.1
Maintenance Manual > Adjustment > Adjustment Items > TABLE ADJUST
Model UJF-3042/FX Issued 2010.08.27 Revised 2011.09.30 F/W ver 1.80 / 1.00
Rev.
Remark
4.2.12 TABLE ADJUST
2.0
 Outline
[#TABLE ADJUST] consists of the following 4 items.
Item
Function
Measure the Head gap and register the measured value, and then adjust it to the length of Gap pin.
GAP PIN
Z-ORIGIN SENSOR
Compensate the height of Z-origin sensor automatically.
TABLE CHECK
Measure the height of specified point with the Gap Pin, and indicate the relative value from the reference point
(1.1).
The description is omitted in this manual since the adjustment is impossible in field.
FLAT PATTERN
Draws the pattern to check the flatness of table.
 Procedures of GAP PIN
2
1. Display [#ADJUST] -> [TABLE ADJUST].
FUNCTION
#ADJUST
<ent>
#ADJUST
TABLE ADJUST
<ent>
1
3
2. 2. Set ON/OFF of the slider.
#TABLE ADJUST
SLIDER :ON
[] / [] : Switches
4
OFF
3. Confirm with the [ENTER] key to terminate the setting.
#TABLE ADJUST
CPMPLETED
:ent
[ENTER]: Confirms
5
[END]: Return
6
7
8
© 2011 MIMAKI ENGINEERING CO.,LTD.
4.2.12
R.2.0
P.1
Maintenance Manual > Adjustment > Adjustment Items > SET QUALITY
Model UJF-3042/FX Issued 2010.08.27 Revised 2011.09.30 F/W ver 1.80 / 1.00
Rev.
Remark
4.2.13 SET QUALITY
2.0
 Outline
Setting of the operation mode of user-setting print quality.
 SET QUALITY List of Items
No
Item
Description
1
Resolution selection
300, 600, 900, 1200
2
Print quality selection
NORMAL, FINE, FAST
3
Number of passes selection
2, 4, 6, 8, 12, 16, 18, 24, 32
4
High-speed scan selection
ON/ OFF
1
2
 Work Procedures
1. Select [#ADJUST] -> [SET QUALITY].
FUNCTION
#ADJUST
<ent>
#ADJUST
SET QUALITY
<ent>
3
2. Select then change the resolution (DPI).
#SET QUALITY
X DPI : 300
[] / []: Switch
600
900
1200
4
[ENTER]: Confirms (Next)
[END]: Return
3. Select then change the print quality.
#SET QUALITY
QUALITY :NORMAL
[] / []: Switch
FINE
FAST
5
[ENTER]: Confirms (Next)
[END]: Return
4. Select then change the number of partition passes.
#SET QUALITY
PASS : 2pass
[] / []: Switch
6
[ENTER]: Confirms (Next)
[END]: Return
5. Select then change ON/OFF of the High-speed scan.
#SET QUALITY
HIGHSPEED :OFF
ON
 This can be set if the number of partition passes is
not minimum.
7
[] / []: Switch
[ENTER]: Confirms (End)
8
[END]: Return
© 2011 MIMAKI ENGINEERING CO.,LTD.
4.2.13
R.2.0
P.1
Maintenance Manual > Adjustment > Adjustment Items > FEED COMP.2
Model UJF-3042/FX Issued 2010.08.27 Revised 2011.09.30 F/W ver
1.80 / 1.00
Rev.
Remark
4.2.14 FEED COMP.2
2.0
 Function
Compensates basic feeding amount of media. (Provides a baseline value for user compensation value.)
Adjust this when the parameter is initialized or the head is replaced.
1
2
 By this adjustment, the user compensation value is cleared.
 Procedure
1. Select [#ADJUST] -> [FEED COMP 2].
FUNCTION
#ADJUST
<ent>
#ADJUST
FEED COMP 2
<ent>
3
2. Draw an adjustment pattern.
#FEED COMP 2
PRINT START
4
[ENTER]: Executes drawing.
:ent
[]: To the screen for adjustment
(Without drawing)
Pattern drawing
[END]: Completes drawing and inputs compensation
value.
3. Check the adjustment pattern.
5
A pattern having width of
media is drawn.
Resolution is 150 dpi.
6
Compensation value is
too large.
7
Compensation value is
too small.
4. Enter the compensation value.
#FEED COMP 2
ADJUST = 0
Compensation value: -500 to 500
8
[] / []: Changes adjustment values.
[END]: Cancellation of input
 n actual feeding amount compensation, compensation value for each feed set in the SETUP function
are added to this compensation value.
© 2011 MIMAKI ENGINEERING CO.,LTD.
4.2.14
R.2.0
P.1
Maintenance Manual > Adjustment > Adjustment Items > ANGLE ADJUST
Model UJF-3042/FX Issued 2010.08.27 Revised 2011.09.30 F/W ver 1.80 / 1.00
Rev.
Remark
4.2.15 ANGLE ADJUST
2.0
Compensating to the (+) side
Y-bar part
Compensation
value (+) side
Pattern right end
Compensation
value (-) side
1
Compensating to the (-) side
Pattern right end
2
Section Paper
 Outline
The displacement amount is measured by overlapping the Section Paper on the pattern drawn, correct the tilt of the Y
bar part with the adjusting screw located at the back of the X bar.
 About full adjustment in the field
Basically, full adjustment is the work in the production process, and it is not recommended to perform it in the field because there are too many restrictions. Therefore, this chapter shall be used for
reference of emergency measure.
That is because it is required to fix the base of the Y bar movable in the LM guide tightly before
adjustment and the accuracy of this fixing directly affects the adjustment accuracy. In addition, it is
very difficult to perform this fixing in the field with high accuracy.
3
4
 Work Procedures
5
1. Set Media.
FUNCTION
#ADJUST
<ent>
#ADJUST
ANGLE ADJUST
<ent>
#ANGLE ADJUST
PRINT START
:ent
2. Display [#ADJUST] -> [ANGLE ADJUST].
3. Press the [ENTER] key to draw a square pattern.
6
#ANGLE ADJUST
PRINTING
7
Enlarged
±0.2 mm
4. Check the displacement amount of the line of the right side
when the Section paper is overlapped on the pattern drawn and
the right bottom corner and the bottom side are put together.
Specified value: within ± 0.2 mm
Pattern
(280x280)
Put together
© 2011 MIMAKI ENGINEERING CO.,LTD.
8
• *End the work when the displacement amount is within 0.2
mm.
4.2.15
R.2.0
P.1
Maintenance Manual > Adjustment > Adjustment Items > DEFAULT SET
Model UJF-3042/FX Issued 2010.08.27 Revised 2011.09.30 F/W ver 1.80 / 1.00
Rev.
Remark
4.2.16 DEFAULT SET
2.0
 Outline
Returning each parameter to the initial value.
 DEFAULT SET List of Items
No
Item
Operation
1
SYSTEM param
Initialize the parameter in question.
2
MAINTE param
Initialize the parameter in question.
3
SERVO param
Initialize the parameter in question.
4
FEED param
Initialize the parameter in question.
5
HEAD param
Initialize the parameter in question.
6
INK param. 1
Initialize the parameter in question.
7
INK param. 2
Initialize the parameter in question.
8
SCAN param
Initialize the parameter in question.
9
WAVE PARAM 1
Initialize the parameter in question.
10 WAVE PARAM 2
Initialize the parameter in question.
11 WAVE PARAM 3
Initialize the parameter in question.
12 WAVE PARAM 4
Initialize the parameter in question.
13 SHIPPING set
Initializing parameters of others than the adjustments.
Remarks
1
2
3
4
 Work Procedures
1. Select [#ADJUST] -> [DEFAULT SET].
FUNCTION
#ADJUST
<ent>
#ADJUST
DEFAULT SET
<ent>
#DEFAULT SET
SYSTEM param.
MAINTE param.
SERVO param.
:
<ent>
5
2. Select the parameter to be initialized, and then fix it by
[ENTER].
6
[] / []: Switch
[ENTER]: Confirms (to Confirmation display)
[END]: Return
3. Initialize by [ENTER].
#DEFAULT SET
INITIAL. OK?
:ent
7
[ENTER]: Execute
[END]: Return
Parameter initialized
8
© 2011 MIMAKI ENGINEERING CO.,LTD.
4.2.16
R.2.0
P.1
Maintenance Manual > Adjustment > Adjustment Items > Head Voltage Adjustment
Model UJF-3042/FX Issued 2010.08.27 Revised 2011.09.30 F/W ver 1.80 / 1.00 Remark
Rev.
4.2.17 Head Voltage Adjustment
2.0
 Outline
This section describes the head voltage adjustment which is performed when the ink discharge becomes unstable and
the deflection of ink drop flight path occurs. As an adjusted value, an offset value for the head-specific reference voltage is set.
If this adjustment does not improve the situation, the head needs to be replaced.
 Check
1
1. Set the media in the table.
FUNCTION
#ADJUST
<ent>
2. Select [#ADJUST] -> [HEAD VOLT ADJ].
#ADJUST
HEAD VOLT ADJ <ent>
2
3. Select “CHECK” for [SELECT].
#HEAD VOLT ADJUST
SELECT :CHECK
ADJUST
4. Press [ENTER] and print a pattern.
[ENTER]: Starts printing a pattern.
#HEAD VOLT ADJUST
PRINT START
:ent
3
HEAD TEMP. CONTROL
PLEASE WAIT
4
#HEAD VOLT ADJUST
PRINTING
Patern Drawing
5. Check the pattern.
Check Patern (all color)
Enlarge a single shot line from nozzle row of each color and
check the dots in the line.
If the deviation of each dot in Y direction is within the following range, the color (nozzle row) is considered acceptable.
Good example
Bad example
“0 ±30 um
If the deviation is big as shown in “Bad example” in the left figure, perform the voltage adjustment described below.
Single shot from one
nozzle row
5
Acceptable deviation
of each dot in the same
nozzle row:
“0 ±30 um”
6
7
0~30um
 Work Procedures
6. Select [#ADJUST] -> [HEAD VOLT ADJ].
FUNCTION
#ADJUST
8
<ent>
#ADJUST
HEAD VOLT ADJ <ent>
7. Select “ADJUST” for [SELECT], and Press [ENTER] key.
#HEAD VOLT ADJUST
SELECT :ADJUST
CHECK
© 2011 MIMAKI ENGINEERING CO.,LTD.
4.2.17
R.1.1
R.2.0
P.1
Maintenance Manual > Adjustment > Adjustment Items > Head Voltage Adjustment
Model UJF-3042/FX Issued 2010.08.27 Revised 2011.09.30 F/W ver 1.80 / 1.00 Remark
Rev.
4.2.17 Head Voltage Adjustment
#HEAD VOLT ADJUST
NZZL SLCT:H1-Odd(C)
H1-Evn(M)
H2-Evn(Y)
H2-Odd(K)
H3-Evn(W)
H3-Odd(CL)
Select target nozzle
#HD OFFSET :[ 0.0]V
start : 0.0V
-3.0~+3.0
Enter test start voltage
e.g.: 0.0V
#HD OFFSET :[ 0.0]V
stop : 2.0V
-3.0~+3.0
Enter test finish voltage
e.g.: 2.0V
#HD OFFSET :[ 0.0]V
step : 0.2V
0.1~1.0
Enter step value from test
start to test finish
e.g.: 0.2V
2.0
8. Select the nozzle row (color) to be adjusted.
[] / [] : Select nozzle
[ENTER] : Confirm (next)
9. Enter the offset voltage used when printing a pattern for adjustment.
(The pattern will look like the image shown in the step 11
below.)
1),Set the offset voltage for printing the first pattern.
2
(-3.0 to +3.0V, increments of 0.1V).
2),Set the offset voltage for printing the last pattern.
(-3.0 to +3.0V, increments of 0.1V).
3),Set the voltage added at every step from the above 1) to 2).
(0.1 to +1.0V, increments of 0.1V)
#HEAD VOLT ADJUST
PRINT START
:ent
The entered values are reflected to the reference voltage of the head.
(A preset offset value will be ignored.)
HEAD TEMP. CONTROL
PLEASE WAIT
1
3
4
#HEAD VOLT ADJUST
PRINTING
10. Press [ENTER] key to start printing.
Patern Drawing
11. Find the optimum offset value.
Enlarge the pattern and find the offset value which presents the
acceptable (within the specified range), smallest deviation in Y
direction.
5
Test start
6
The acceptable range of deviation is given in the step 5.
7
Test end
Print the patterns from the test start voltage to the test finish voltage (both set in the step 9) in increments of set step value.
* Numerical values indicate offset values for the head reference
voltage.
8
12. Set the offset voltage.
#HD OFFSET :[ 0.0]V
H1-Odd(C): *.*V
-3.0~+3.0
© 2011 MIMAKI ENGINEERING CO.,LTD.
Enter the value considered optimum in the step 11.
4.2.17
R.1.1
R.2.0
P.2
Maintenance Manual > Adjustment > Adjustment Items > Shot Count Reset
Model UJF-3042/FX Issued 2010.08.27 Revised 2011.09.30 F/W ver 1.80 / 1.00
Rev.
Remark
4.2.18 Shot Count Reset
2.0
 Outline
This section describes how to “reset the shot count” and “reset the offset value of the Head driving power voltage” of
selected head.
 Use this menu when you replace the head.
1
 Work Procedures
1. Select [#ADJUST] -> [RESET SHOT CNTS].
FUNCTION
#ADJUST
<ent>
2
#ADJUST
RESET SHOT CNTS<ent>
#RESET SHOT CNTS
HEAD [MCYKW C L ]
#RESET SHOT CNTS
HEAD [ YKW C L ]
2. Select a head and set whether or not to reset, and then press
ENTER key.
[] / [] :Select head
[] / [] :Select whether or not to reset
Head to be reset: Displayed
Head not reset: Not displayed
4
[ENTER] : Confirm
[END] : Back
#OFFSET VOLT
INITIAL.OK?
<ent>
3
3. Determine whether you reset the offset voltage of the head
selected in the Step 2 or not.
[ENTER] : Reset it.
5
[END] : Not reset it.
6
7
8
© 2011 MIMAKI ENGINEERING CO.,LTD.
4.2.18
R.2.0
P.1
Maintenance Manual > Adjustment > Adjustment Items > Wash Tube
Model UJF-3042/FX Issued 2012.05.31 Revised
F/W ver 3.00/3.00
Rev.
Remark
4.2.19 Wash Tube
1.0
 Outline
After washing the head, run washing liquid through from the air purge port to the head in order to wash ink remaining
in the air purge port.
 Procedure of WASH TUBE
1. Select [#ADJUST] -> [WASH TUBE].
1
<LOCAL>
[FUNCTION]
FUNCTION
#ADJUST
<ENT>
#ADJUST
WASH TUBE
<ent>
2
2. Press the ENTER key.
3. Select a path to wash, and press the ENTER key.
#WASH TUBE
HEAD
[MCYKMMCC]
SET WASH TOOL
COMPLETE
:ent
When you press the ENTER key, the cartridge valve closes.
4. Mount the close cartridge, and attach the washing liquid tube to
the air purge port.
When the work has been completed, press the ENTER key.
When you press the ENTER key, the absorption pump operates.
#WASH TUBE
COMPLETE
:ent
5. The absorption pump operates and it absorbs washing liquid
from the air purge port. After 40-second absorption, the absorption pump stops.
(When you press the FUNCTION key, the absorption pump
operates again.)
By pressing the ENTER key, you can proceed to the next step.
3
4
5
When you press the FUNCTION key, absorption operation is
performed again.
When you press the ENTER key, the cartridge valve opens.
REMOVE WASH TOOL
COMPLETE
:ent
6. Remove the mounted close cartridge, and remove the washing
liquid tube from the air purge port.
When the work has been completed, press the ENTER key.
When you press the ENTER key, the cartridge valve closes.
7. This is the end of washing air purge port.
#ADJUST
WASH TUBE
6
7
<ent>
8
© 2012 MIMAKI ENGINEERING CO.,LTD.
4.2.19
R.1.0
P.1
Maintenance Manual > Adjustment > Adjustment Items > MACHINE NAME(UJF-3042FX)
Model UJF-3042/FX Issued 2012.05.31 Revised 2013.02.08 F/W ver 3.50/3.50 Remark
Rev.
4.2.20 MACHINE NAME(UJF-3042FX)
1.0
 Outline
Switch the model name to UJF-3042FX or UJF-A3FX.
1
 This menu is used when A3FX for China is produced.
 Procedure of WASH TUBE
1. Select [#ADJUST] -> [WASH TUBE].
FUNCTION
#ADJUST
<ENT>
#ADJUST
MACHINE NAME
<ent>
2
2. Press the ENTER key.
3
3. Input (confirm) the name.
#MACHINE NAME
Machine Name =3042
[] / []: Change the machine name.
A3
[ENTER]: Finalizes
4
[END]: End
5
6
7
8
© 2012 MIMAKI ENGINEERING CO.,LTD.
4.2.20
R.1.0
P.1
Maintenance Manual > Adjustment > Mechanical Adjustment
1
2
3
4. Adjustment
4.1
Operation Matrix
4.2
Adjustment Items
4.3
Mechanical Adjustment
4
5
6
7
8
© 2013 MIMAKI ENGINEERING CO.,LTD.
Maintenance Manual > Adjustment > Mechanical Adjustment > Adjustment of theTable Flatness
Model UJF-3042/FX Issued 2010.08.27 Revised 2011.09.30 F/W ver 1.80 / 1.00 Remark
Rev.
4.3.1 Adjustment of theTable Flatness
2.0
 Outline
Adjust the table flatness by adjusting the contacting position between the four Up/Down cams and Rollers under the
table.
1
2
3
 Procedures
1. Remove the following covers: (See6.1.1)
Rear Cover TB
4
1),Rear Cover TB
5
2. Raise the table with the up/down key so that LCD indicates
50mm for height.
ORIGIN SET UP
TABLE HEIGHT 25.0
6
3. Adjust the four points shown in the left figure.
ORIGIN SET UP
300
190
ORIGIN SET UP
300
00
Rear
Move the head with the up, down, right and left keys in
<LOCAL> mode.
(You can start adjustment from any point.)
• The following procedure is shared by four adjusting points.
Table
Front
ORIGIN SET UP
00
190
8
ORIGIN SET UP
00
00
© 2011 MIMAKI ENGINEERING CO.,LTD.
7
4.3.1
R.2.0
P.1
Maintenance Manual > Adjustment > Adjustment Items > Adjustment of theTable Flatness
Model UJF-3042/FX Issued 2010.08.27 Revised 2011.09.30 F/W ver 1.80 / 1.00 Remark
Rev.
4.3.1 Adjustment of theTable Flatness
2.0
4. Place the Thickness gauge under the carriage (see the figure).
The Thickness gauge should be placed in the same
position of the carriage, for all the adjusting points.
If it varies, the carriage may be inclined.
1.5mm
1
Side of UV protection plate
(same between right and
left sides)
5. Loosen the Fixing screws of the Up/Down cam.
Loosen the cap bolt located in the side hole of the UV protection plate, inserting a wrench into the hole.
Fixing screws of the
Up/Down Cam
3
6. Adjust the height.
Front
Adjust the table height so that the gap between the height
adjustment jig placed in the step 4 and carriage is cleared.
1), Loosen the red circled Lock Nut and rotate the cap bolt to
move the Up/Down cam back and forth, and fine adjust the
table height.
Up/Down cam
 The inclined surface of the Up/Down cam should be
always in contact with the Roller during adjustment.
Roller
 It is ideal to move the Up/Down cam with your
hands to keep it in absolute contact with the Roller.
Rear
2
 Be careful not to deform the carriage by excessive
pressure.
2),Tighten the Lock Nut when the height is adjusted.
4
5
6
3),Tighten the Fixing screws of the Up/Down cam loosened in
the step 5.
4),Confirm that there is no gap between the Up/Down cam and
Roller.
Up/Down cam
Roller
7. Adjust all the four points specified in the step 3 following the
above procedure.
8. Reattach the cover.
© 2011 MIMAKI ENGINEERING CO.,LTD.
4.3.1
R.2.0
7
8
P.2
Maintenance Manual > Adjustment > Mechanical Adjustment > Carriage height Adjustment
Model UJF-3042/FX Issued 2010.08.27 Revised 2011.09.30 F/W ver 1.80 / 1.00 Remark
Rev.
4.3.2 Carriage height Adjustment
2.0
1
Gap : 1.5mm
Gap : 1.5mm
2
As a precondition for this adjustment, the table flatness should be adjusted correctly.
Refer to “4.3.1 Adjustment of theTable Flatness” before checking or performing this adjustment.
3
 Check the Slant of Carriage
1. Raise the table to the highest position.
ORIGIN SET UP
TABLE HEIGHT
50.0
2. Move the Carriage to place of “X=150,Y=150”.
4
ORIGIN SET UP
150.0
150
3. Turn the sub-power switch to OFF then the main power to OFF.
4. Remove the Front cover. (See6.1.1)
5. Measure the gap between the table and the base of the carriage
using a thickness gauge.
5
The measured values at both sides should be within the specified range.
Measurement point : Right and left sides of the carriage
The rated value
: 1.5 ±0.25mm
* If the measured value is out of the specified range, adjust the
height of the carriage.
The adjustment procedure is given in the following steps.
Measurement point
7
8
Gap : 1.5mm
© 2011 MIMAKI ENGINEERING CO.,LTD.
6
4.3.2
R.2.0
P.1
Maintenance Manual > Adjustment > Mechanical Adjustment > Carriage height Adjustment
Model UJF-3042/FX Issued 2010.08.27 Revised 2011.09.30 F/W ver 1.80 / 1.00 Remark
Rev.
4.3.2 Carriage height Adjustment
2.0
 Adjustment procedure
Perform the following steps as follow-ups of the procedure previously described in ”Check the Slant of carriage”.
6. Remove the following covers: (See6.1.1)
1,Head Cover
2,Fitting Cover
7. Loosen the two carriage Fixing screws located at the back of the
carriage. (See left figure)
1
 To loosen the right screw, insert a ballpoint wrench
slightly from an angle and rotate it.
8. Insert a 1.5mm thickness gauge between the upper surface of
the table and the base of the carriage, and adjust the gap so that
the right and left sides have the equal height. After that, tighten
the screws that were loosened.
Fxing screws of Carriage
Insert wrench from an angle and rotate.
The measurement point and adjustment value are specified
in the step 5.
2
3
9. Perform the assembly by reversing the disassembly procedure.
4
5
6
7
8
© 2011 MIMAKI ENGINEERING CO.,LTD.
4.3.2
R.2.0
P.2
Maintenance Manual > Adjustment > Mechanical Adjustment > Carriage Front/Rear Tilt Adjustment
Model UJF-3042/FX Issued 2010.08.27 Revised 2011.09.30 F/W ver 1.80 / 1.00 Remark
Rev.
4.3.3 Carriage Front/Rear Tilt Adjustment
2.0
1
2
 Outline
The image quality deteriorates when the Carriage is not in parallel to the Table.
In this manual, the condition that the carriage is wholly tilting back and forth to the table is called as “Front/rear tilt”.
The checking procedures and adjusting procedure of “Front/rear tilt” are described as follows:
3
As a precondition for this adjustment, the table flatness should be adjusted correctly.
Refer to “4.3.1 Adjustment of theTable Flatness” before checking or performing this adjustment.
 Check for carriage Tilt
4
1. Raise the table to the highest position.
ORIGIN SET UP
TABLE HEIGHT
2. Move the carriage to place of “X=150,Y=150”.
5
ORIGIN SET UP
150.0
150
3. Turn the sub-power switch to OFF then the main power to OFF.
4. Remove the Front cover. (See6.1.1)
5. Measure the gap between the table and the base of the carriage
using a thickness gauge.
The measured values at both sides should be within the specified range.
Measurement point : Right and left sides of the carriage
The rated value
: 1.5 ±0.25mm
6
7
* If the measured value is out of the specified range, loosen the
screws on the side of the carriage and adjust the tilt.
Measurement point
The adjustment procedure is given in the following steps.
8
Gap : 1.5mm
© 2011 MIMAKI ENGINEERING CO.,LTD.
4.3.3
R.2.0
P.1
Maintenance Manual > Adjustment > Mechanical Adjustment > Carriage Front/Rear Tilt Adjustment
Model UJF-3042/FX Issued 2010.08.27 Revised 2011.09.30 F/W ver 1.80 / 1.00 Remark
Rev.
4.3.3 Carriage Front/Rear Tilt Adjustment
2.0
 Adjustment procedure
Perform the following steps as follow-ups of the procedure previously described in ”Check for carriage Tilt”.
6. Remove the LED-UV Unit. (See6.7.1)
Both side of the carriage
7. Loosen the screws located on the both sides of the carriage.
8. Insert a 1.5mm thickness gauge between the table and carriage
and adjust the height so that the right and left sides (near and far
sides) of the carriage have the equal height. After that, tighten
the screws that were loosened.
The measurement point and adjustment value are specified
in the step 5.
1
2
Fixing screw of the CarriageBase
 Since the carriage is relatively small, you can
check both the near and far sides together by
inserting a long thickness gauge into the far side.
3
9. Perform the assembly by reversing the disassembly procedure.
4
5
6
7
8
© 2011 MIMAKI ENGINEERING CO.,LTD.
4.3.3
R.2.0
P.2
Maintenance Manual > Adjustment > Mechanical Adjustment > LED-UV Unit Height Adjustment
Model UJF-3042/FX Issued 2010.08.27 Revised 2011.09.30 F/W ver 1.80 / 1.00 Remark
Rev.
4.3.4 LED-UV Unit Height Adjustment
2.0
LED-UV Unit
1
2
2.0mm
 Outline
The up/down position of the LED-UV Unit is mechanically adjusted. The gap between the LED-UV Unit and table is
set to 2mm while the head gap is 1.5mm.
3
 Check the Height of LED-UV Unit
1. Raise the table to the highest position.
4
ORIGIN SET UP
TABLE HEIGHT
50.0
2. Move the carriage to place of “X=150,Y=150”.
ORIGIN SET UP
150.0
150
3. Turn the sub-power switch to OFF then the main power to OFF.
5
4. Remove the Front cover. (See6.1.1)
5. Measure the gap between the LED-UV Unit and table using a
thickness gauge.
6
Measurement point : One point from center part of the LEDUV Unit base
The rated value
: 2.0 ±0.25mm
* If the measured value is out of the specified range, adjust the
height of the LED-UV Unit.
7
The adjustment procedure is given in the following steps.
8
Measurement point
© 2011 MIMAKI ENGINEERING CO.,LTD.
4.3.4
R.2.0
P.1
Maintenance Manual > Adjustment > Mechanical Adjustment > LED-UV Unit Height Adjustment
Model UJF-3042/FX Issued 2010.08.27 Revised 2011.09.30 F/W ver 1.80 / 1.00 Remark
Rev.
4.3.4 LED-UV Unit Height Adjustment
2.0
 Adjustment procedure
Perform the following steps as follow-ups of the procedure previously described in”Check the Height of LED-UV
Unit” .
Loosen
6. Loosen the Fixing screw of LED-UV Unit.
7. Adjust the gap between the LED-UV Unit and the upper surface
of the table so that it settles within the specified range. After
that, tighten the LED-UV Unit fixing screw.
The measurement point and adjustment value are specified
in the step 5.
1
2
2.0 mm
3
8. Perform the assembly by reversing the disassembly procedure.
4
5
6
7
8
© 2011 MIMAKI ENGINEERING CO.,LTD.
4.3.4
R.2.0
P.2
Maintenance Manual > Adjustment > Mechanical Adjustment > Work Area Sensor Height Adjustment
Model UJF-3042/FX Issued 2010.08.27 Revised 2011.09.30 F/W ver 1.80 / 1.00 Remark
Rev.
4.3.5 Work Area Sensor Height Adjustment
2.0
1
2
 Outline
To protect the print head, check if the light axis of the LED transmission sensor is at the specified height, and adjust it
if necessary.
The appropriate height of the light axis for this unit is “0.5mm under the head surface”.
3
 Adjustment standard
1. Raise the table to the highest position.
1mm thickness gauge
(LCD display: ”Table height 50 ”)
2. Execute [#SENSOR TEST WorkHeight] from [# TEST]. The
following results indicate the good condition.
4
1),Without a light shield: “WorkHeight: ON”
2),Place a 1mm thickness gauge on the table to shield the light:
“WorkHeight: OFF”
5
Sensor rays
Table
6
 Work Procedures
Sensor BKT
Height Adjust screw
3. Remove the following covers: (See6.1.1)
1),Right Cover
Lock Nut
2),Left Cover
7
Fxing screw
4. Loosen the Fixing screw of Sensor BKT.
Parallel
10mm
Reference point
5. Adjust the gap between the overhanging parts of the side panel
and the Sensor BKT to 10mm, and also arrange those overhanging parts parallel to each other.
1),Loosen the Lock Nut of the Height Adjust Screw.
2),Adjust the height by rotating the Height Adjustment screw.
8
3),Tighten the Lock Nut and then tighten the BKT Fixing screw.
The right and left sides (projector and receiver sides) of the
main unit have the same structure. Adjust the both sides at the
same time.
6. Perform the step 1 and 2 to check.
© 2011 MIMAKI ENGINEERING CO.,LTD.
4.3.5
R.2.0
P.1
Maintenance Manual > Test > Test Items
1
2
3
4
5. Test
5.1
Test Items
5.2
Other Test
5
6
7
8
© 2011 MIMAKI ENGINEERING CO.,LTD.
Maintenance Manual > Test > Test Items > CHECK PATTERN
Model UJF-3042/FX Issued 2010.08.27 Revised 2011.09.30 F/W ver
1.80 / 1.00
Rev.
Remark
5.1.1 CHECK PATTERN
2.0
 Outline
Following 12 “CHECK PATTERN” types are printable.
100%
50%
25%
6.25%
NOZZLE
V-LINE
H-LINE
SLANT
GRADATE
V-1B1W
H-1B1W
DROP CHECK*
1
 List of CHECK PATTERN
No
Operation
Selectable Values / Description
1
Select a pattern
Select a desired one among the check patterns listed above.
2
Select Y resolution
300, 600, 900, 1200 dpi
3
Select X resolution
360, 540, 720, 1080, 1440 dpi
4
Select scan direction and the number Direction : UNI-D, :BI-D
of divisions.
Divisions : 2, 4, 6, 8, 12, 16, 24, 32 passes
5
Select the Linewidth
1~1500dots(Only as for V-LINE and H-LINE and SLANT)
6
Select the interval of the line.
1~9999dots(Only as for V-LINE and H-LINE and SLANT)
7
Select drawing size *2
X: 10 ~ 420 mm
Y: 10 ~ 300 mm
8
Select drawing color
MCYKWR
9
Start drawing.
[ENTER]: Starts drawing.
[REMOTE]: Selects nozzles and Switches between high speed scanning ON and OFF.
10 During drawing.
2
3
4
[END]: Stop the drawing.
* Pattern of the [DROP CHECK] dose not heve menu of the [Y resolution]-[Drawing color].
5
6
7
8
© 2011 MIMAKI ENGINEERING CO.,LTD.
5.1.1
R.2.0
P.1
Maintenance Manual > Test > Test Items > AGEING
Model UJF-3042/FX Issued 2010.08.27 Revised 2011.09.30 F/W ver
1.80 / 1.00
Rev.
Remark
5.1.2 AGEING
2.0
 Outline
For the durability testing, continuous reciprocating operation is executed.
 List of AGEING items
Name of Test
Function
XYZ SERVO*
Continuous reciprocating operation in X-axis, Y-axis and Table Up/Down.
XY SERVO*
Continuous reciprocating operation in X-axis and Y-axis
X SERVO
Continuous reciprocating operation in X-axis
Y SERVO*
Continuous reciprocating operation in Y-axis
PUMP MOTOR
Continuous operation of Ink-supplying Pump Motor (Max.72Hours)
WIPER MOTER
Continuous reciprocating operation of Wiper Motor (Max.9999Times)
Z SERVO
Continuous reciprocating operation of Table Up/Down.
(This menu can choose the value that is bigger than "speed and acceleration" of XYZ SERVO.)
HEAD WIPE
Continuous reciprocating operation of Wiping. (Max.9Times)
CAPPING
Continuous reciprocating operation of Capping.
CLEANING
Execution of cleaning operation by the designated times (Max.500Times)
FLASHING
Continuous reciprocating operation of Flashing.
RADIATOR PUMP
Continuous operation of the Pump Motor of Water cooling device.
X measure
Continuous operation of the X measure.
COM
For developmental debugging
1
2
3
4
*It may cause ink leakage from the Head when executed in keeping the ink charged.
5
For the work, put down unused media or the like in advance since it may cause ink leakage when
[Y SERVO] or [XYZ SERVO] or [XY SERVO] is executed.
6
7
8
© 2011 MIMAKI ENGINEERING CO.,LTD.
5.1.2
R.2.0
P.1
Maintenance Manual > Test > Test Items > SENSOR TEST
Model UJF-3042/FX Issued 2010.08.27 Revised 2011.09.30 F/W ver
1.80 / 1.00
Rev.
Remark
5.1.3 SENSOR TEST
2.0
 Outline
Each sensor is tested.
 List of SENSOR TEST
Name of Test
Function
LCD display
Cover
Displaying the status of the Cover Sensor.
(The identification by the cover name is not possible. Because
each cover sensor for series connection.)
Y -Org
Displaying the status of the Y-origin Sensor.
ON/OFF
X -Org
Displaying the status of the X-origin Sensor .
ON/OFF
Z-Org
Displaying the status of the Z-origin Sensor (Table).
ON/OFF
Wiper-Org
Displaying the status of the Wiper Origin Sensor.
ON/OFF
WorkHeight
Displaying the status of the WorkHeight Limit Sensor.
ON/OFF
InkCtrg 1
Displaying the status of the Ink Cartridge1 Sensor.
ON/OFF
InkCtrg 2
Displaying the status of the Ink Cartridge2 Sensor.
ON/OFF
InkCtrg 3
Displaying the status of the Ink Cartridge3 Sensor.
ON/OFF
InkCtrg 4
Displaying the status of the Ink Cartridge4Sensor.
ON/OFF
InkCtrg 5
Displaying the status of the Ink Cartridge5 Sensor.
ON/OFF
InkCtrg 6
Displaying the status of the Ink Cartridge6 Sensor.
ON/OFF
InkNear 1
Displaying the status of the Ink Near End Sensor.(color 1)
OK/NEND
InkNear 2
Displaying the status of the Ink Near End Sensor.(color 2)
OK/NEND
InkNear 3
Displaying the status of the Ink Near End Sensor.(color 3)
OK/NEND
InkNear 4
Displaying the status of the Ink Near End Sensor.(color 4)
OK/NEND
InkNear 5
Displaying the status of the Ink Near End Sensor.(color 5)
OK/NEND
InkNear 6
Displaying the status of the Ink Near End Sensor.(color 6)
OK/NEND
CoolFloat
Displaying the status of the Float Sensor of water cooling device.
1
OPEN/CLOSE
2
3
4
5
ON/OFF
6
7
8
© 2011 MIMAKI ENGINEERING CO.,LTD.
5.1.3
R.2.0
P.1
Maintenance Manual > Test > Test Items > PARAM. DRAW
Model UJF-3042/FX Issued 2010.08.27 Revised 2011.09.30 F/W ver
1.80 / 1.00
Rev.
Remark
5.1.4 PARAM. DRAW
2.0
 Outline
Select a parameter, and draw the settings. The selectable parameters are as follows:
 List of PARAM. DRAW
No.
PARAMETER
1
SYSTEM PRM
2
MAINTE PRM
3
SERVO PRM
4
FEED PRM.2
5
HEAD PRM
6
INK PRM.1
7
INK PRM.2
8
SCAN PRM
9
WAVE PRM 1 (There is color choice.)
1
2
3
10 WAVE PRM 2 (There is color choice.)
11 WAVE PRM 3(There is color choice.)
12 WAVE PRM 4(There is color choice.)
4
 For the details of parameters, refer to “4.1.4 Parameter functions” of “SERVICE DOCUMENTS”.
5
6
7
8
© 2011 MIMAKI ENGINEERING CO.,LTD.
5.1.4
R.2.0
P.1
Maintenance Manual > Test > Test Items > MEMORY CHECK
Model UJF-3042/FX Issued 2010.08.27 Revised 2011.09.30 F/W ver
1.80 / 1.00
Rev.
Remark
5.1.5 MEMORY CHECK
2.0
 Outline
Checks each memory of the machine.
 Content
Item
Content
F-ROM check
Executes hash check of F-ROM.
 When a check sum error occurs, “F-ROM SUM ERROR” is displayed.
S-RAM check
Executes Read/Write check of S-RAM.
 When a DATA error occurs, “S-RAM D:xxxxxxxx” is displayed.
 When a Address error occurs, “S-RAM A:xxxxxxxx” is displayed.
SDRAM check
Executes Read/Write check of SDRAM.
 When a DATA error occurs, “SDRAM D:xxxxxxxx” is displayed.
 When a Address error occurs, “SDRAM A:xxxxxxxx” is displayed.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
© 2011 MIMAKI ENGINEERING CO.,LTD.
5.1.5
R.2.0
P.1
Maintenance Manual > Test > Test Items > Key Board Test
Model UJF-3042/FX Issued 2010.08.27 Revised 2011.09.30 F/W ver 1.80 / Remark
Rev.
5.1.6 Key Board Test
2.0
 Outline
Tests the panel switch.
 Content
When the panel switch is pressed, the name of the switch is displayed on the LCD.
1
If none is pressed, “NONE” is displayed on the LCD.
When you press the [END] key, “Test end” is displayed and the keyboard test is completed.
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
© 2011 MIMAKI ENGINEERING CO.,LTD.
5.1.6
R.2.0
P.1
Maintenance Manual > Test > Test Items > LCD Test
Model UJF-3042/FX Issued 2010.08.27 Revised 2011.09.30 F/W ver
1.80 / 1.00
Rev.
Remark
5.1.7 LCD Test
2.0
 Outline
The characters are displayed on the LCD.
 Content
After LCD test starts, each character will be displayed repeatedly on the LCD.
1
When you press the [END] key, the LCD test is completed.
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
© 2011 MIMAKI ENGINEERING CO.,LTD.
5.1.7
R.2.0
P.1
Maintenance Manual > Test > Test Items > Temperature Check
Model UJF-3042/FX Issued 2010.08.27 Revised 2011.09.30 F/W ver
1.80 / 1.00
Rev.
Remark
5.1.8 Temperature Check
2.0
 Outline
Temperature check of each part that monitors temperature is available.
 Content
The temperature in the table below is displayed.
Display
HT SINK
Heat sink temperature of slider relay PCB
HEAD1
Head temperature of head 1 EVEN side
HEAD2
Head temperature of head 1 ODD side
HEAD3
Head temperature of head 2 EVEN side
HEAD4
Head temperature of head 2 ODD side
HEAD5
Head temperature of head 3 EVEN side
HEAD6
Head temperature of head 3 ODD side
HEAD7
Not Use
HEAD8
Not Use
LED UV1
Temperature of UVLED PCB 1
LED UV2
Temperature of UVLED PCB 2
LED UV3
Temperature of LED UV DRIVE PCB
RADIATER
Not Use
HD BASE2
Not Use
HD BASE
Not Use
LCD
1
Content
2
3
4
5
Temperature of Key Board PCB
6
7
8
© 2011 MIMAKI ENGINEERING CO.,LTD.
5.1.8
R.2.0
P.1
Maintenance Manual > Test > Test Items > UV LEVEL Check
Model UJF-3042/FX Issued 2010.08.27 Revised 2013.07.18 F/W ver
1.80 / 1.00
Rev.
Remark
5.1.9 UV LEVEL Check
2.1
 Outline
Operates for measuring the amount of light of LED-UV.
 Content
1
Wear protective eyewear to prevent injury to your eyes.
1 Align the sensor part of the light checker installed on the measurement jig with the mark on the back right side of
the table.
Sensor part
2
Take care to prevent misalignment of the
position in the X direction, and upward
movement of the sensor and jig.
3
2 Set the range of the UV light checker to "H".
3 Set the mode to "DHMAX".
Press the button on the left side several
times until the display on the LCD screen
says "DHMAX".
4
Set to "H".
5
6
4 In JOG mode, set the height of the table to 41.7 mm.
5 Press the [ENTER] key to exit JOG mode.
6 From the [FUNCTION] menu, select [MAINTENANCE] -> [UV LAMP] -> [CHECK UV LEVEL].
7 Point: Select 1, and then press the [ENTER] key.
7
8 Move the slider back and forth 3 times or more.
9 During UV irradiation, confirm that the cooling fan on the front of the UV lamp unit runs.
10Press the END key to return the slider to the station.
11Confirm the measured value on the light checker.
12If the measured value is less than 400 mW, confirm the position of the sensor for the light checker and the height of
the UV unit, and then perform the measurement again.
8
13Disengage the MAX hold on the UV light checker, and return the display on the UV light checker to 0.
14Point: Always use Steps 7 through 11, in order, to measure 2 through 8.
15Point: Select ALL = all lamps on for 3 minutes. Confirm that no errors occur and that there are no problems.
16Press the[ END] key several times to exit brightness measurement.
© 2011 MIMAKI ENGINEERING CO.,LTD.
5.1.9
R.2.1
P.1
Maintenance Manual > Test > Test Items > INK IC Check
Model UJF-3042/FX Issued 2010.08.27 Revised 2011.09.30 F/W ver
1.80 / 1.00
Rev.
Remark
5.1.10 INK IC Check
2.0
 Outline
Check the ink cartridge IC.
 Content
Check is performed by reading the IC chip data, and then displays the number of errors for each cartridge.
1
When an error occurs, “IC=1 ERR=1” is displayed.
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
© 2011 MIMAKI ENGINEERING CO.,LTD.
5.1.10
R.2.0
P.1
Maintenance Manual > Test > Test Items > INK TEST
Model UJF-3042/FX Issued 2010.08.27 Revised 2011.09.30 F/W ver
1.80 / 1.00
Rev.
Remark
5.1.11 INK TEST
2.0
 Outline
This is a function to adjust the wave shape. Discharges by changing the wave shape and the voltage, and searches the
proper wave shape.
 Content
Draws by changing one value of the specified wave shape parameter little by little.
1
For drawing, you can specify either of test drawing, 1B15W, density 6.25% or density 100%.
You can also perform cleaning before drawing.
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
© 2011 MIMAKI ENGINEERING CO.,LTD.
5.1.11
R.2.0
P.1
Maintenance Manual > Test > Test Items > ENCORDER Check
Model UJF-3042/FX Issued 2010.08.27 Revised 2011.09.30 F/W ver
1.80 / 1.00
Rev.
Remark
5.1.12 ENCORDER Check
2.0
 Outline
Checks the operation of the linear encoder and the motor encoder by moving the slider.
 Content
“M: xxx E: xxx” is displayed on the lower row of the LCD. The coordinate value of the motor encoder is displayed in
M, and that of the linear encoder is displayed in E in units of mm.
With[] []key, you can move the slider to right and left.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
© 2011 MIMAKI ENGINEERING CO.,LTD.
5.1.12
R.2.0
P.1
Maintenance Manual > Test > Test Items > EVENT LOG
Model UJF-3042/FX Issued 2010.08.27 Revised 2011.09.30 F/W ver
1.80 / 1.00
Rev.
Remark
5.1.13 EVENT LOG
2.0
 Outline
Displays the event log.
 Content
Displays the latest event log from the beginning in order.
1
You can change logs with [] []key and display the details with the [TEST] key.
When the [DATACLEAR] key is pressed, the event log is initialized.
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
© 2011 MIMAKI ENGINEERING CO.,LTD.
5.1.13
R.2.0
P.1
Maintenance Manual > Test > Test Items > Message Check
Model UJF-3042/FX Issued 2010.08.27 Revised 2011.09.30 F/W ver
1.80 / 1.00
Rev.
Remark
5.1.14 Message Check
2.0
 Outline
Error messages and warning messages are displayed.
 Content
You can display error messages and warning messages with [] [] key in order.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
© 2011 MIMAKI ENGINEERING CO.,LTD.
5.1.14
R.2.0
P.1
Maintenance Manual > Test > Test Items > HW Test
Model UJF-3042/FX Issued 2010.08.27 Revised 2011.09.30 F/W ver
1.80 / 1.00
Rev.
Remark
5.1.15 HW Test
2.0
 Outline
Port test of the hardware
 Content
As this is a function for development, the details are not disclosed.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
© 2011 MIMAKI ENGINEERING CO.,LTD.
5.1.15
R.2.0
P.1
Maintenance Manual > Test > Other Test
1
2
3
4
5. Test
5.1
Test Items
5.2
Other Test
5
6
7
8
© 2011 MIMAKI ENGINEERING CO.,LTD.
Maintenance Manual > Test > Other Test > Ink route leak confirmation procedure
Model UJF-3042/FX Issued 2010.08.27 Revised 2011.09.30 F/W ver 1.80 / 1.00 Remark
Rev.
5.2.1 Ink route leak confirmation procedure
2.0
 Outline
This chapter explains ink route leak confirmation procedure after replacing the dumper adapter and the dumper.
In addition, perform this before attaching ink tube from the cartridge with the dumper port.
 Confirmation procedure
Port
Tube(Single Black)
SJ-MMK 2.5 x 4.5
1. Connect two dumper ports by the tube 2.5mm in inside diameter.
1
2
Dumper
2. Remove the Station Cover.
3
(Make the port for checking negative pressure usable.)
• Fixing screw x2
Station Cover
Head2
Head1
4
Head3
5
Port for checking negative pressure
Tube
Inside 2.5mm
 Do not press the piston of the syringe.
Dumper
It may absorb foreign object into the nozzle and
cause discharging defect.
Dumper
Adupter
Air drain
port
Air drain port
4. Check the “Leak”.
• Pull the Piston of syrige.
Head
Cap
Leak Cheking jig
Syringe
Tube
pump
3. Attach the Leak Checking jig (Syringe) with the port for checking negative pressure.
Port for checking negative pressure
Criteria
OK: When you pull the piston of the syringe, you feel load, and
if you loose the power to pull, it tries to return backward.
(There is no leak of air and when you pull the piston, the
route becomes in the vacuum status.)
NG: If you can pull the piston of the syringe easily, or even if
you loose the power to pull, it does not return backward.
6
7
8
(There is any leak of air somewhere in the route and air
has entered in the syringe.)
© 2011 MIMAKI ENGINEERING CO.,LTD.
5.2.1
R.2.0
P.1
Maintenance Manual > Disassembly and Reassembly > Covers
1
2
3
4
5
6. Disassembly and Reassembly
6.1
Covers
6.4
PCBs
6.7
UV Parts
6.2
Ink-related Parts
6.5
Sensors
6.8
Greasing
6.3
Driving Parts
6.6
Other Electrical Parts
6
7
8
© 2013 MIMAKI ENGINEERING CO.,LTD.
Maintenance Manual > Disassembly and Reassembly > Covers > Cover Layout
Model UJF-3042/FX Issued 2010.08.27 Revised 2011.09.30 F/W ver
--Remark
Rev.
6.1.1 Cover Layout
2.0
 Front
Cartrige Cover
Left Cover
1
Head Cover
Slider PCB Cover
Upper Cover
Right Cover
Front Cover
Front-Left Cover
Front Cover
Under-TB
2
3
Front Cover TB
Side Cover
(Right and left are common)
Station Cover
Wast ink Tank Door
4
 Rear
5
Rear Cover
Rear Left Cover
6
Rear Right Cover
Rear Cover TB
7
8
Power Supply Chassis
Rear Panel
© 2011 MIMAKI ENGINEERING CO.,LTD.
6.1.1
R.2.0
P.1
Maintenance Manual > Disassembly and Reassembly > Covers > Key Panel Assy
Model UJF-3042/FX Issued 2010.08.27 Revised 2011.09.30 F/W ver
--Remark
Rev.
6.1.2 Key Panel Assy
2.0
1
2
Key Panel Assy.
3
To turn power off, be sure to turn the main power OFF.
 Procedures
4
1. Turn the main power OFF
2. Remove the following covers:
• Key Board Cover -Under
5
The state that excluded Key
Board Cover-Under
3. Disconnect the FFC from the Key Board PCB.
Disconnect the FFC
 When the FFC is connected, be sure not to mistake
the frond and back.
6
 Do not connect it at an angle.
7
Key Board PCB
8
© 2011 MIMAKI ENGINEERING CO.,LTD.
6.1.2
R.2.0
P.1
Maintenance Manual > Disassembly and Reassembly > Covers > Key Panel Assy
Model UJF-3042/FX Issued 2010.08.27 Revised 2011.09.30 F/W ver --- Remark
Rev.
6.1.2 Key Panel Assy
Power Switch Relay Connector
2.0
4. Disconnect the following Connecters.
1),Power Switch Relay Connector
2),Emergency Switch Relay Connector
1
Emergency Switch Relay Connector
Remove the Side Cover of right and left.
5. Remove the Side Cover of right and left.
2
6. Remove the Key Panel Assy. (Four Screws)
Screw : P4x8SMW x4
3
4
5
 The following process may be required at maintenance such as parts replacement.
Front Panel
7. Remove the Front Panel. (Five Screws)
6
7
8
© 2011 MIMAKI ENGINEERING CO.,LTD.
6.1.2
R.2.0
P.2
Maintenance Manual > Disassembly and Reassembly > Covers > “Tube_FFC Holder” Stick the Protection tape
Model UJF-3042/FX Issued 2010.08.27 Revised 2011.09.30 F/W ver
--Remark
Rev.
6.1.3 “Tube_FFC Holder” Stick the Protection tape
2.0
1
Lower part of the Slider PCB BKT
On the Bear Guide
Tube_FFC Holder
2
To turn power off, be sure to turn the main power OFF.
 Outline
FFC connected with the slider PCB is fixed with “Tube_FFC Holder” (at two positions). By the screw coming out
from this plate may damage FFC.
3
To prevent this, or as the countermeasure to prevent it from recurring after a problem occurred, paste protection tape
on this plate.
4
 Procedures
1. Turn the main power OFF
2. Remove the following covers:
• Upper Cover
• Rear Cover
• Slider PCB Cover
5
Refer to “ 6.1.1 Cover Layout ”
6
 Explanation of Slider PCB BKT part
3. Remove the Bear Fixing BKT.
• Fixing Screw x2
7
Bear Fixing BKT
8
Fixing Screw
© 2011 MIMAKI ENGINEERING CO.,LTD.
6.1.3
R.2.0
P.1
Maintenance Manual > Disassembly and Reassembly > Covers > “Tube_FFC Holder” Stick the Protection tape
Model UJF-3042/FX Issued 2010.08.27 Revised 2011.09.30 F/W ver
--Remark
Rev.
6.1.3 “Tube_FFC Holder” Stick the Protection tape
Tube_FFC Holder
2.0
4. Remove the “Tube_FFC Holder”.
• Fixing Screw x2
1
Fixing Screw
2
5. Stick the Protection tape on the “Tube_FFC Holder”.
• Recommended tape: Acetate fiber tape of 40mm width
 Method and note for pasting tape are as below:
Do not seal holes.
Protection tape
Paste tape so that
the screw to fix the
tube holder (TM04) can be screened
out.
3
4
5
Tape width: 40mm
6. Reverse the disassembly procedure for reassembly.
6
 Explanation of bear guide part
7. Remove the Bear Fixing BKT.
• Fixing Screw x2
7
8
Bear Fixing BKT
© 2011 MIMAKI ENGINEERING CO.,LTD.
6.1.3
R.2.0
P.2
Maintenance Manual > Disassembly and Reassembly > Covers > “Tube_FFC Holder” Stick the Protection tape
Model UJF-3042/FX Issued 2010.08.27 Revised 2011.09.30 F/W ver
--Remark
Rev.
6.1.3 “Tube_FFC Holder” Stick the Protection tape
2.0
8. Take the Ink Tubes off from the “Tube_FFC Holder”
9. Remove the “Tube_FFC Holder”.
• Fixing Screw x2
1
2
Tube_FFC Holder
10. Stick the Protection tape on the “Tube_FFC Holder”.
• Recommended tape: Acetate fiber tape of 40mm width
3
 Method and note for pasting tape are as below:
Do not seal holes.
4
Protection tape
Paste tape so that
the screw to fix the
tube holder (TM04) can be screened
out.
5
Tape width: 40mm
6
11. Reverse the disassembly procedure for reassembly.
7
8
© 2011 MIMAKI ENGINEERING CO.,LTD.
6.1.3
R.2.0
P.3
Maintenance Manual > Disassembly and Reassembly > Ink-related Parts
1
2
3
4
5
6. Disassembly and Reassembly
6.1
Covers
6.4
PCBs
6.7
UV Parts
6.2
Ink-related Parts
6.5
Sensors
6.8
Greasing
6.3
Driving Parts
6.6
Other Electrical Parts
6
7
8
© 2013 MIMAKI ENGINEERING CO.,LTD.
Maintenance Manual > Disassembly and Reassembly > Ink-related Parts > Head Assy
Model UJF-3042/FX Issued 2010.08.27 Revised 2011.09.30 F/W ver
--Remark
Rev.
6.2.1 Head Assy
2.0
 Be sure to wear Protective Glasses and Working Gloves during the work operation.Ink may get in
your eyes depending on the working condition, or hand skin may get rough if you touch the ink.
 Never rotate the screws which are not instructed to do so in the following procedure.
Head adjustment is not required when the Head is disassembled or assembled at the user
side.Never rotate the hexagon socket head screws (cap screws) specified in the following figure,
which are used for adjustment or attachment.
Front-back set
screw
1
2
Inclination set
screw
3
Front-back set
screw
Adjusting
screw
 Procedures of Head Washing before Replacing the Head
Before replacing the head, wash the new Head Assy washed with acetone with F-200 Cleaning Liquid. Washing process is described first.
Be sure to perform the washing process as below.
 Filling ink without washing may cause the nozzle clogging or deflection.
4
5
 After washing, be sure to fill ink in 24 hours.
F-200 Clearning
liquid
1. Set the Filter to the Dumper Adapter of the Head Assy.
50cc syringe
Filter : Millex SLLHH25NS (MILLIPORE)
6
2. Remove the cap of the Air Bleeder Tube.
3. Set the syringe containing F-200 Cleaning Liquid to the Filter,
and then fill the cleaning liquid until about 10 cc of the liquid
discharges from the Air Bleeder Tube.
Filter
0.45um 25mm
Head Assy
Dumper Adapter
Remove the
cap
Never pull the piston of the syringe.
Foreign material may be sucked into the nozzle.
8
Waste liquid
Head
7
Air Bleeder
Tube
Waste liquid
© 2011 MIMAKI ENGINEERING CO.,LTD.
6.2.1
R.2.0
P.1
Maintenance Manual > Disassembly and Reassembly > Ink-related Parts > Head Assy
Model UJF-3042/FX Issued 2010.08.27 Revised 2011.09.30 F/W ver
--Remark
Rev.
6.2.1 Head Assy
2.0
F-200 Clearning
liquid
4. Close the cap of the Air Bleeder Tube.
5. Push the syringe to discharge 30 cc of F-200 Cleaning Liquid
from the nozzles.
Filter
0.45um 25mm
Check F-200 Cleaning Liquid squirts out of all
the nozzles.
F-200 Clearning
liquid
Dumper Adapter
1
close the cap
2
Drain cleaning
liqiud from
Nozle
3
Head
Waste liquid
6. Remove the cap of the Air Bleeder Tube.
Air
7. Set the syringe filled with air to the Filter, and then inject the
air.
Remaining F-200 Cleaning Liquid is discharged from the Air
Bleeder Tube.
Filter
0.45um 25mm
Remove the
cap
Dumper Adapter
Waste liquid
8. After discharging all F-200 Cleaning Liquid, inject another 60
cc air. (The Cleaning Liquid is discharged from the Air Bleeder
Tube.)
Never pull the piston of the syringe.
Foreign material may be sucked into the nozzle.
9. Close the cap of the Air Bleeder Tube, and remove the Filter.
Head
4
5
6
10. Perform Step 1 to 9 to the other nozzle row.
Waste liquid
After washing, be sure to fill ink in 24 hours.
• Note: If needed, remove the “GEN Head Holder” before
working.
Two screws
7
8
GEN Head Holder
© 2011 MIMAKI ENGINEERING CO.,LTD.
6.2.1
R.2.0
P.2
Maintenance Manual > Disassembly and Reassembly > Ink-related Parts > Head Assy
Model UJF-3042/FX Issued 2010.08.27 Revised 2011.09.30 F/W ver
--Remark
Rev.
6.2.1 Head Assy
2.0
 Procedures of Disassembly and Reassembly
Dumper &
Dumper Cover
Screw
1. Turn the main power OFF
2. Disconnect the FPCof the Print Head from the Head Slider
PCB.
3. Remome the screw of Dumper Cover.
1
Screw : P3x6SMW x1
4. Remome the Dumper & Dumper Cover.
As shown in the lower right figure, the Dumper Cover is
attached by inserting the tab. Tilt and remove the tab with care
not to damage the Dumber or Tube.
Tab
Air Bleeder Tube
5. Remome the Air Bleeder Tube.
1), Remome the screw of Fitting Cover.
Screw : B3x6 x1
Air Bleeder BKT
2
2)Loosen the nut on the back of the Air Bleeder BKT (lower
right figure) and remove the Tube.
3
4
Fitting Cover
5
Nut
Head fixing screw
6. Remove the two screws that fix the Head.
6
Use a slotted screwdriver.
7. Remove the Head Assy.
GEN Head
Holder
(with the GEN Head Holder (metal plate) attached)
7
Head Assy
8
© 2011 MIMAKI ENGINEERING CO.,LTD.
6.2.1
R.2.0
P.3
Maintenance Manual > Disassembly and Reassembly > Ink-related Parts > Head Assy
Model UJF-3042/FX Issued 2010.08.27 Revised 2011.09.30 F/W ver
--Remark
Rev.
6.2.1 Head Assy
2.0
8. Remove the GEN Head Holder (imetal plate) from the Head
Assy.
Screw : B3x6 x2
1
Head Assy
2
GEN Head Holder
9. Perform the assembly by reversing the disassembly procedure.
3
4
5
6
7
8
© 2011 MIMAKI ENGINEERING CO.,LTD.
6.2.1
R.2.0
P.4
Maintenance Manual > Disassembly and Reassembly > Ink-related Parts > Dumper
Model UJF-3042/FX Issued 2010.08.27 Revised 2011.09.30 F/W ver
--Remark
Rev.
6.2.2 Dumper
2.0
 Procedures
 To turn power off, be sure to turn the main power OFF.
 Be sure to wear Protective Glasses and Working Gloves during the work operation.Ink may get in
your eyes depending on the working condition, or hand skin may get rough if you touch the ink.
1
 Be sure to start the work after confirming the working process.
(Refer to “3.1.2 Replacement of Dumper”)
 Spread the media or the like around the Carriage not to soil the surroundings.
Tube
Cap Nut
1. Turn the main power OFF.
2. Remove the Head FPC of the target Head from the Slider PCB.
2
3. Remove the Cap Nut, and pull of the Ink Tube.
Dumper
Take care not to stain any object by ink dripping.
3
O Ring
4
Dumper Cover
5
Dumper &
Dumper Cover
4. Remome the screw of Dumper Cover.
Screw : P3x6SMW x1
5. Remome the Dumper & Dumper Cover.
As shown in the lower right figure, the Dumper Cover is
attached by inserting the tab. Tilt and remove the tab with care
not to damage the Dumber or Tube.
6
7
8
Tab
© 2011 MIMAKI ENGINEERING CO.,LTD.
6.2.2
R.2.0
P.1
Maintenance Manual > Disassembly and Reassembly > Ink-related Parts > Dumper
Model UJF-3042/FX Issued 2010.08.27 Revised 2011.09.30 F/W ver
--Remark
Rev.
6.2.2 Dumper
Dumper Cover
2.0
6. Take out the Dumper from the Dumper Cover.
 Do not press the film or round button of the
Dumper.
Dumper
It may cause ink dripping.
1
button
2
film
7. Perform the assembly by reversing the disassembly procedure.
3
4
5
6
7
8
© 2011 MIMAKI ENGINEERING CO.,LTD.
6.2.2
R.2.0
P.2
Maintenance Manual > Disassembly and Reassembly > Ink-related Parts > Pump Head
Model UJF-3042/FX Issued 2010.08.27 Revised 2011.09.30 F/W ver
--Remark
Rev.
6.2.3 Pump Head
2.0
 Removing Procedure of Pump Head
 To turn power off, be sure to turn the main power OFF.
 Be sure to wear Protective Glasses and Working Gloves during the work operation.
Ink may get in your eyes depending on the working condition, or hand skin may get rough if you
touch the ink.
 Wipe the blue cover of Pump Head with a dry cloth for cleaning.
Never use any chemicals such as alcohol, remover or the like since it may result in cracks or surface
separations of cover.
1
2
 Be sure to start the work after confirming the working process.
(Refer to “3.1.3 Replacement of Pump Head”)
 Take care not soil the surroundings.
3
1. Confirm the pump position to be replaced.
The pump No. is identical with the Head No.
Take care not to confuse it.
ÇP
2
 Perform the following process with the removed
Station Assy upside down.
3
4
Station Assy
Nut
2. Remove the Nut and Sleeve from each of the right and left
tubes.
5
Take care not to stain any object by ink dripping.
Sleeve
6
7
3. Remove the Pump head.
(1) Remove the Pump base.
Screw x4
8
(2) Remove the Pump head from the Pump base.
Pump base
Pump head
© 2011 MIMAKI ENGINEERING CO.,LTD.
6.2.3
R.2.0
P.1
Maintenance Manual > Disassembly and Reassembly > Ink-related Parts > Pump Head
Model UJF-3042/FX Issued 2010.08.27 Revised 2011.09.30 F/W ver --- Remark
Rev.
6.2.3 Pump Head
2.0
 Tube replacing/Pump head assembling procedure
4. Pull the catch part of Pump Cover frontward to remove the
Pump Cover.
1
Pump Tube
5. After the replacement of Pump Tube, put the tube between rollers in parallel, and insert the Pump Roller into the main unit.
 Apply the silicon grease, which is included in the
Maintenance Tube Set, to the Pump Roller and
Pump Tube. (approx. half a bag for one pump)
2
3
4
6. Assemble the pump cover.
In the following case, the assembling is not accepted.
 The hook of Pump Cover is not firmly engaged
with the base.
5
6
7
7. Perform Pump tube aging.
Rotate the pump with an electric screwdriver for one minute
and more.
 Be sure to perform this before attaching.
Otherwise, it may cause power swing of the
pump motor or abnormal noise.
8
8. Attach the pump head to the station Assy.
Attach it in the reverse procedures of the Step 3.
© 2011 MIMAKI ENGINEERING CO.,LTD.
6.2.3
R.2.0
P.2
Maintenance Manual > Disassembly and Reassembly > Ink-related Parts > Pump Head
Model UJF-3042/FX Issued 2010.08.27 Revised 2011.09.30 F/W ver --- Remark
Rev.
6.2.3 Pump Head
2.0
9. Assemble the Nut and Sleeve to the right and left tube.
Nut
Sleeve
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
© 2011 MIMAKI ENGINEERING CO.,LTD.
6.2.3
R.2.0
P.3
Maintenance Manual > Disassembly and Reassembly > Ink-related Parts > Station Assy.
Model UJF-3042/FX Issued 2010.08.27 Revised 2011.09.30 F/W ver
--Remark
Rev.
6.2.4 Station Assy.
2.0
 Description of this section
This section provides the procedure for removing the unit for easier maintenance of certain parts, such as the Pump
Head and Wiper Assy.
 To turn power off, be sure to turn the main power OFF.
1
 Be sure to wear Protective Glasses and Working Gloves during the work operation.
 Spread the media or the like around the Carriage not to soil the surroundings.
2
 Procedures
1. Move the Y-Bar to the farthest position.
2. Turn the main power OFF.
3
3. Remove the following covers:
• Front Cover •Rear Cover-Right •Station Cover
4. Open the Waste Ink Tank Door and remove the Waste Ink Tank.
4
5. Move the Carriage to the far left.
Waste Ink Tank
6. Disconnect the relay connector of the Diaphragm Pump.
7. Disconnect the black tube of the Nozzle Suction Bottle.
Tube
 Take care not to stain any object by ink dripping
5
6
Connecter
8. Disconnect the connecter from the Wiper Motor.
7
9. Disconnect the connector of the Pump Motor.
( 3042 Pump3 PCB [CN10] )
Connector of the
Pump Motor
Connecter of the Wiper
Sensor
10. Disconnect the connecter of the Wiper Sensor.
( 3042 Pump3 PCB [CN5] )
8
Wiper Motor
© 2011 MIMAKI ENGINEERING CO.,LTD.
6.2.4
R.2.0
P.1
Maintenance Manual > Disassembly and Reassembly > Ink-related Parts > Station Assy.
Model UJF-3042/FX Issued 2010.08.27 Revised 2011.09.30 F/W ver --- Remark
Rev.
6.2.4 Station Assy.
2.0
11. Remove the three screws.
Screw : P4x8SMW x3
1
12. Remove the Station Assy.
Carefully remove the Assy so as not to damage the cables or
tubes.
In order to protect the underside parts, place the
removed Station Assy on a thick material as shown
in the below figure, keeping its underside untouched
partially.
2
3
4
13. Perform the assembly by reversing the disassembly procedure.
5
6
7
8
© 2011 MIMAKI ENGINEERING CO.,LTD.
6.2.4
R.2.0
P.2
Maintenance Manual > Disassembly and Reassembly > Ink-related Parts > Wipe Suction Pump Assy.
Model UJF-3042/FX Issued 2010.08.27 Revised 2011.09.30 F/W ver
--Remark
Rev.
6.2.5 Wipe Suction Pump Assy.
2.0
Wipe Suction Pump Assy.
1
2
 Procedures
 To turn power off, be sure to turn the main power OFF.
 Be sure to wear Protective Glasses and Working Gloves during the work operation.
3
1. Turn the main power OFF.
2. Remove the following covers:
• Rear panel
3. Open the Waste Ink Tank Door and disconnect the relay connector.
4. Disconnect the Tube and remove the Wipe Suction Pump Assy.
Disconnect the Tube
4
5
Screw : P3x8SMW x4
6
7
5. Perform the assembly by reversing the disassembly procedure.
8
© 2011 MIMAKI ENGINEERING CO.,LTD.
6.2.5
R.2.0
P.1
Maintenance Manual > Disassembly and Reassembly > Ink-related Parts > Cartridge Guide Assy.
Model UJF-3042/FX Issued 2010.08.27 Revised 2011.09.30 F/W ver
--Remark
Rev.
6.2.6 Cartridge Guide Assy.
2.0
 Procedures
 To turn power off, be sure to turn the main power OFF.
 Be sure to wear Protective Glasses and Working Gloves during the work operation.Ink may get in
your eyes depending on the working condition, or hand skin may get rough if you touch the ink.
1
 Be sure to start the work after confirming the working process.
(Refer to “3.1.4 Replacement of Cartridge Guide Assy.”)
 Take care not soil the surroundings.
1. Turn the main power OFF.
Numbers indicate the color order
2
1
3
4
5
6
Group 1
Group 2
2
1
4
3
6
5
2
2. Remove the Cartridge Cover and the Rear Cover.
3. Check the slots.
The Cartridge Guide Assy consists of two groups of
cartridge guides, and each group contains three cartridge guides arranged one on top of the other.
Assembly/disassembly is performed by group. Check
the position of the target cartridge before disassembling.
4. Disconnect all connectors(cable) from the ID Contact PCB.
3
4
5
ID Contact PCB (x6)
5. Remove the Cartridge Sensor Assy from the Slider Relay PCB,
and draw the cable to the back of the Cartridge Guide Assy.
See the following table for connector numbers and cartridge
numbers of the Slider Relay PCB board.
Cartridge sensor
Assy
© 2011 MIMAKI ENGINEERING CO.,LTD.
CN No.
CN10
CN11
CN12
CN14
CN15
CN16
Cartridge No.
Cartridge 1
Cartridge 2
Cartridge 3
Cartridge 4
Cartridge 5
Cartridge 6
6
7
8
6.2.6
R.2.0
P.1
Maintenance Manual > Disassembly and Reassembly > Ink-related Parts > Cartridge Guide Assy.
Model UJF-3042/FX Issued 2010.08.27 Revised 2011.09.30 F/W ver
--Remark
Rev.
6.2.6 Cartridge Guide Assy.
2.0
6. Remove the Cap Nut, and pull of the Ink Tube..
 Take care not to stain any object by ink dripping
and also not to lose the O-ring.
1
7. Remove the Ink Slot Guide GASS(steel plate).
Screw : P3x6SMW x3
2
Important notes for the following steps 8 to 11.
3
The red circles in the above figure indicate the fitting
positions of the resin ribs from the Cartridge Guide
and the plate. Be careful not to break the ribs.
8. Remove the two screws that fix the Ink Slot Guide BKT1(steel
plate).
Screw(x2)
9. Remove the Cartridge Guide(Group1).
The Ink Slot Guide BKT1(steel plate) should be kept attached.
Ink Slot Guide
BKT1
5
6
Cartridge
Guide(Group1)
10. Remove the two screws that fix the Ink Slot Guide BKT2(steel
plate).
Screw(x2)
11. Remove the Cartridge Guide(Group2).
The Ink Slot Guide BKT2(steel plate) should be kept attached.
Ink Slot Guide
BKT2
4
8
Cartridge
Guide(Group2)
© 2011 MIMAKI ENGINEERING CO.,LTD.
7
6.2.6
R.2.0
P.2
Maintenance Manual > Disassembly and Reassembly > Ink-related Parts > Cartridge Guide Assy.
Model UJF-3042/FX Issued 2010.08.27 Revised 2011.09.30 F/W ver
--Remark
Rev.
6.2.6 Cartridge Guide Assy.
2.0
12. Remove the Cartridge Base Assy from the Ink Slot Guide
BKT1(or Ink Slot Guide BKT2).
1
Cartridge Base Assy
2
13. Remove the Cartridge Guide Assy.
3
Cartridge Guide Assy.
14. Perform the assembly by reversing the disassembly procedure.
4
5
6
7
8
© 2011 MIMAKI ENGINEERING CO.,LTD.
6.2.6
R.2.0
P.3
Maintenance Manual > Disassembly and Reassembly > Ink-related Parts > Cartridge Coupling Assy.
Model UJF-3042/FX Issued 2010.08.27 Revised 2011.09.30 F/W ver
--Remark
Rev.
6.2.7 Cartridge Coupling Assy.
2.0
 Procedures
Be sure to wear Protective Glasses and Working Gloves during the work operation.Ink may get in your
eyes depending on the working condition, or hand skin may get rough if you touch the ink.
1
 Be sure to start the work after confirming the working process.
(Refer to “3.1.5 Replacement of Cartridge Coupling Assy.”)
 Take care not soil the surroundings.
2
1. Remove the Cap Nut, and pull of the Ink Tube.
Take care not to stain any object by ink dripping and
also not to lose the O-ring.
3
Cap Nut
4
O-ring (S4)
Ink Tube
2. Remove the nut and the fixing screws, and remove the Cartridge Coupling Assy..
5
6
Cartridge Coupling Assy.
Nut (M3)
3. Perform the assembly by reversing the disassembly procedure.
7
8
© 2011 MIMAKI ENGINEERING CO.,LTD.
6.2.7
R.2.0
P.1
Maintenance Manual > Disassembly and Reassembly > Ink-related Parts > Capping
Model UJF-3042/FX Issued 2010.08.27 Revised 2011.09.30 F/W ver
--Remark
Rev.
6.2.8 Capping
2.0
1
Cap Assy
 To turn power off, be sure to turn the main power OFF.
 Be sure to wear Protective Glasses and Working Gloves during the work operation.
Ink may get in your eyes depending on the working condition, or hand skin may get rough if you
touch the ink.
2
 Take care not soil the surroundings.
3
 Working Procedure
 Method to remove cap by unit
4
1. Turn the main power OFF
2. Remove the following covers:
• Front Cover
• Upper Cover
5
Cap Assy
3. Pull out the tube from the cap from the fitting.
6
7
Tube from cap
4. Take Cap Base off.
8
• Screw x4
Cap Base
© 2011 MIMAKI ENGINEERING CO.,LTD.
6.2.8
R.2.0
P.1
Maintenance Manual > Disassembly and Reassembly > Ink-related Parts > Capping
Model UJF-3042/FX Issued 2010.08.27 Revised 2011.09.30 F/W ver
--Remark
Rev.
6.2.8 Capping
2.0
5. Remove the Cap Slider.
(1) Remove the Cap Slider from the guide flute by extending
the side surface of the Cap Base.
(2) Take two springs off.
1
Cap Slider
 Method to disassemble by units of part such as cap rubber
2
3
1. Pull out the tube from the cap from the fitting.
4
5
Tube from cap
Cap Cover
2. Remove the Cap Cover.
6
• Screw x5
7
Cap Rubber
3. Perform maintenance on each part and replace it.
8
Cap spring
© 2011 MIMAKI ENGINEERING CO.,LTD.
6.2.8
R.2.0
P.2
Maintenance Manual > Disassembly and Reassembly > Ink-related Parts > Wiper unit Assy(Belt, Sensor)
Model UJF-3042/FX Issued 2010.08.27 Revised 2011.09.30 F/W ver
--Remark
Rev.
6.2.9 Wiper unit Assy(Belt, Sensor)
2.0
1
Wiper Unit Assy
 To turn power off, be sure to turn the main power OFF.
 Be sure to wear Protective Glasses and Working Gloves during the work operation.
Ink may get in your eyes depending on the working condition, or hand skin may get rough if you
touch the ink.
 Take care not soil the surroundings.
3
4
 Working Procedure
1. Turn the main power OFF
Station Assy
2
2. Take the Station Assy off, from the machine.
• Refer to 6.2.4 Station Assy.
5
6
3. Take the Wiper unit Assy off, from the Station Assy.
7
8
Wiper unit Assy
© 2011 MIMAKI ENGINEERING CO.,LTD.
6.2.9
R.2.0
P.1
Maintenance Manual > Disassembly and Reassembly > Ink-related Parts > Wiper unit Assy(Belt, Sensor)
Model UJF-3042/FX Issued 2010.08.27 Revised 2011.09.30 F/W ver
--Remark
6.2.9 Wiper unit Assy(Belt, Sensor)
Wiper Cover
Rev.
2.0
4. Remove the following parts:
• Wiper Cover
• Wiper BKT 2
1
Wiper BKT 2
5. Take the Belt pulley off. (with the nozzle Assy fixed)
• Remove the E-Ring.
2
3
E-Ring
4
5
6. Take the Nozzle Assy off.
• Remove the Belt holder.
6
Belt holder
7. Take the Wipaer Origin Sensor off.
7
8. Perform the assembly by reversing the disassembly procedure.
8
Wiper Origin Sensor
© 2011 MIMAKI ENGINEERING CO.,LTD.
6.2.9
R.2.0
P.2
Maintenance Manual > Disassembly and Reassembly > Driving Parts
1
2
3
4
5
6. Disassembly and Reassembly
6.1
Covers
6.4
PCBs
6.7
UV Parts
6.2
Ink-related Parts
6.5
Sensors
6.8
Greasing
6.3
Driving Parts
6.6
Other Electrical Parts
6
7
8
© 2013 MIMAKI ENGINEERING CO.,LTD.
Maintenance Manual > Disassembly and Reassembly > Driving Parts > X-axis Motor Assy
Model UJF-3042/FX Issued 2010.08.27 Revised 2011.09.30 F/W ver
--Remark
Rev.
6.3.1 X-axis Motor Assy
2.0
X-axis Motor Assy
1
2
To turn power off, be sure to turn the main power OFF.
3
 Procedures
1. Move the Y-Bar to the farthest position.
2. Raise the Table to the highest position and then remove it.
Refer to “6.3.3 Table” for removing method.
4
3. Remove the Key Panel Assy.
Refer to ” 6.1.2 Key Panel Assy “ for removing method.
5
fixing screws of the coupling
4. Loosen the two fixing screws of the coupling of the worm gear
side.
 Screws of X motor side is fixed with the Screw
adhesive , it cannot be removed.
6
7
5. Remove the four cap screws that fix the X Motor BKT.
8
cap screw x4
© 2011 MIMAKI ENGINEERING CO.,LTD.
6.3.1
R.2.0
P.1
Maintenance Manual > Disassembly and Reassembly > Driving Parts > X-axis Motor Assy
Model UJF-3042/FX Issued 2010.08.27 Revised 2011.09.30 F/W ver
--Remark
Rev.
6.3.1 X-axis Motor Assy
L
Encoder Connector
2.0
6. Disconnect the Encoder Connector and relay connector, and
then take out the motor.
Remove the motor, taking care not to drop it.
1
relay connector
coupling
X Motor
*Disassembling shall be up to the status in the left figure.
• As the fixing screw of the coupling to the X motor shaft is
locked, it cannot be removed. Therefore, you cannot remove
the X motor BKT.
 Maintenance parts for replacing the X motor is
provided in the Assy indicated in the left figure.
2
3
X Motor BKT
7. Perform the assembly by reversing the disassembly procedure.
4
5
6
7
8
© 2011 MIMAKI ENGINEERING CO.,LTD.
6.3.1
R.2.0
P.2
Maintenance Manual > Disassembly and Reassembly > Driving Parts > Y-axis Motor
Model UJF-3042/FX Issued 2010.08.27 Revised 2011.09.30 F/W ver
--Remark
Rev.
6.3.2 Y-axis Motor
2.0
1
Y-axis Motor
2
 Procedures
3
To turn power off, be sure to turn the main power OFF.
Loosen (Four screws)
1. Remove the Left Cover .
4
2. Disconnect the two relay connectors of the motor.
3. Loosen the four screws specified in the figure.
5
Y-Motor BKT
4. Loosen the belt tension.
1) Press the Y Motor BKT in the direction of the arrow until the
belt is well loosened.
2) Tighten the four screws previously loosened.
6
Tighten securely to prevent the Y Motor BKT from moving
back by spring tension.
7
Press
Two Screws
5. Remove the YM Top BKT.(Do not remove the bearing.)
Screw : P4x10SMW x2
8
YM Top BKT
© 2011 MIMAKI ENGINEERING CO.,LTD.
6.3.2
R.2.0
P.1
Maintenance Manual > Disassembly and Reassembly > Driving Parts > Y-axis Motor
Model UJF-3042/FX Issued 2010.08.27 Revised 2011.09.30 F/W ver
--Remark
Rev.
6.3.2 Y-axis Motor
2.0
6. Remove the Y Motor Assy from the Y-Motor BKT.
Two Screws
Screw : P4x10SMW x2
1
2
7. Loosen a Hexagon Socket Head Screw then remove the pulley
from the motor.
3
4
Pay attention to missing of the screw.
Pulley
5
Hexagon Socket Head Screw
8. Perform the assembly by reversing the disassembly procedure.
Bad
Example:
Belt tilted.
Put the belt on the center of both pulleys in parallel.
(Acceptable on the upper)
Bad
Example:
7
Belt biased to either upper
or lower.
Good
Example:
8
Put it on the pulley center in
parallel.
© 2011 MIMAKI ENGINEERING CO.,LTD.
6
6.3.2
R.2.0
P.2
Maintenance Manual > Disassembly and Reassembly > Driving Parts > Table
Model UJF-3042/FX Issued 2010.08.27 Revised 2011.09.30 F/W ver
---
Rev.
Remark
6.3.3 Table
2.0
Table
1
2
3
 Procedures
To turn power off, be sure to turn the main power OFF.
4
1. Make a printer the next state.
1), Move the Y-Bar to the farthest position.
2), Move the Carriage to the capping position.
3), Raise the Table to the highest position.
5
2. Turn the main power OFF.
Rear Cover-TB
3. Remove the following covers.
• Front Cover
•Rear Cover-TB (See left figure)
6
Screw two positions
Rear side of machine
Relay connector of the Suction fan Assy
7
4. Disconnect the relay connector of the Suction fan Assy .
8
© 2011 MIMAKI ENGINEERING CO.,LTD.
6.3.3
R.2.0
P.1
Maintenance Manual > Disassembly and Reassembly > Driving Parts > Table
Model UJF-3042/FX Issued 2010.08.27 Revised 2011.09.30 F/W ver
---
Rev.
Remark
6.3.3 Table
Lift straight up
2.0
5. Open the Front Cover-TB.(Pull the cover toward you.)
6. Lift and remove the Table.
 Hold both sides of the Table and lift it straight up.
If not, the parts specified in the following figure
may be damaged
Front Cover-TB
1
2
Table Guide mechanism
7. Perform the assembly by reversing the disassembly procedure.
3
4
5
6
7
8
© 2011 MIMAKI ENGINEERING CO.,LTD.
6.3.3
R.2.0
P.2
Maintenance Manual > Disassembly and Reassembly > Driving Parts > Z-Driving Screw
Model UJF-3042/FX Issued 2010.08.27 Revised 2011.09.30 F/W ver
--Remark
Rev.
6.3.4 Z-Driving Screw
2.0
 Procedures
To turn power off, be sure to turn the main power OFF.
1
 Be sure to start the work after confirming the working process.
(Refer to “3.2.1 Replacement of Z-Driving Screw”)
Z-Motor-Reinforce Plate
Front Cover-Under TB
2
1. Remove the following covers:
• Front Cover-Under TB
(The Front Cover-TB can be kept attached.)
3
• Z-Motor-Reinforce Plate
Z-Driving Screw
4
Front-Cover-TB
E Ring
2. Remove the E Ring attached to the far side of the Z-Driving
Screw.
Notes for removing E Ring.
1. Remove two screws that fix the Z-Driving
Base.
5
2. Pull the Z-Driving Base.
By this, gap is created between the E Ring and Bearing, and this will allow you to remove the E Ring
easily.
Z-Driviing Base
6
E Ring & Bearing
7
8
Pull toward you
© 2011 MIMAKI ENGINEERING CO.,LTD.
6.3.4
R.2.0
P.1
Maintenance Manual > Disassembly and Reassembly > Driving Parts > Z-Driving Screw
Model UJF-3042/FX Issued 2010.08.27 Revised 2011.09.30 F/W ver
--Remark
Rev.
6.3.4 Z-Driving Screw
2.0
3. Remove the Z Motor BKT.
The Z Motor and Pulley can be kept attached.
1
Z MotorBKT
Z Motor
4. Remove the Z-Driving Screw.
Rotate the Z-Driving Screw counterclockwise until it comes
off.
2
3
Z-Driving Screw
Bearing
E Ring
5. Remove the parts shown in the left figure from the Z-Driving
Screw.
4
5
Pulley
Cap screw
6. Perform the assembly by reversing the disassembly procedure.
6
Grease the thread part when attaching a new Z-Driving Screw.
Grease used: [FLOIL]
7
8
© 2011 MIMAKI ENGINEERING CO.,LTD.
6.3.4
R.2.0
P.2
Maintenance Manual > Disassembly and Reassembly > Driving Parts > Slider Relay Cooling Fan Assy
Model UJF-3042/FX Issued 2010.08.27 Revised 2011.09.30 F/W ver
--Remark
Rev.
6.3.5 Slider Relay Cooling Fan Assy
2.0
1
Slider Relay Cooling Fan Assy
2
 Procedures
3
 To turn power off, be sure to turn the main power OFF.
CN24
1. Turn the main power OFF.
4
2. Remove the Rear Cover.
3. Disconnect the Connecter from the Slider Relay PCB Assy.
[CN24]
5
4. Remove the Slider Relay Coolig Fan Assy.
Screw : CS3x20 x2
Slider Relay Cooling Fan Assy
5. Perform the assembly by reversing the disassembly procedure.
6
7
8
© 2011 MIMAKI ENGINEERING CO.,LTD.
6.3.5
R.2.0
P.1
Maintenance Manual > Disassembly and Reassembly > Driving Parts > Mist Suction Fan Assy
Model UJF-3042/FX Issued 2010.08.27 Revised 2011.09.30 F/W ver
--Remark
Rev.
6.3.6 Mist Suction Fan Assy
2.0
1
2
Mist Suction Fan Assy
To turn power off, be sure to turn the main power OFF.
3
 Procedure
1. Turn the main power OFF.
Relay connector
4
2. Remove the following covers:
• Front Cover
• Upper Cover
• Slider PCB Cover
5
3. Disconnect the relay connector shown in the left figure.
Slider PCB
Mist Suction Fan Assy
4. Remove the Mist Suction Fan Assy.
6
Screw : P3x35SMW x4
7
5. Perform the assembly by reversing the disassembly procedure.
8
 When assembling, pass wiring of the fan under the
ink tube and be careful about wiring not coming
out.
© 2011 MIMAKI ENGINEERING CO.,LTD.
6.3.6
R.2.0
P.1
Maintenance Manual > Disassembly and Reassembly > Driving Parts > Tabel Absorption Fan
Model UJF-3042/FX Issued 2010.08.27 Revised 2011.09.30 F/W ver
--Remark
Rev.
6.3.7 Tabel Absorption Fan
2.0
 Procedure
To turn power off, be sure to turn the main power OFF.
1
L
 Be sure to start the work after confirming the working process.
(Refer to “3.2.2 Replacement of Tabel Absorption Fan”)
2
1. Remove the Table and reverse it.
Table backside
(Refer to“6.3.3 Table” for removing method.)
3
4
Table Absorption Fan Assy
2. Remove the Cable saddle.
Remove the Cable saddle
Screw : P3x10SMW x2
5
3. Remove the Fan Motor.
Screw : CS4x40 x2
6
Fan Motor
4. Perform the assembly by reversing the disassembly procedure.
7
8
© 2011 MIMAKI ENGINEERING CO.,LTD.
6.3.7
R.2.0
P.1
Maintenance Manual > Disassembly and Reassembly > Driving Parts > Linear Encorder Scale
Model UJF-3042/FX Issued 2010.08.27 Revised 2011.09.30 F/W ver
--Remark
Rev.
6.3.8 Linear Encorder Scale
2.0
Linear Encoder Scale
1
2
 To turn power off, be sure to turn the main power OFF.
 Working Procedure
Scale hook
3
1. Turn the main power OFF
2. Remove the Front Cover.
3. Take the Scale hook off.
4
• Remove the spring(Scale SP).
Spring(Scale SP)
4. Remove the attachment on the right side (scale holder R).
5
6
Remove the screws.
5. Remove the Scale hook from the Linear Encorder Scale.
7
• Remove the two screws.
8
6. Perform the assembly by reversing the disassembly procedure.
It is sandwiched between plates.
© 2011 MIMAKI ENGINEERING CO.,LTD.
6.3.8
R.2.0
P.1
Maintenance Manual > Disassembly and Reassembly > Driving Parts > X Gear Box
Model UJF-3042/FX Issued 2010.08.27 Revised 2013.07.18 F/W ver
--Remark
Rev.
6.3.9 X Gear Box
2.0
To turn power off, be sure to turn the main power OFF.
 Procedures
1. Move the Y-Bar to the farthest position.
2. Down the table to the lowest position and turn the power OFF.
1
3. Remove the front cover.
2
4. Remove the LED UV UNIT.
Refer to “6.7.1 LED UV UNIT” for removing method.
5. Remove the table.
Refer to “6.3.3 Table” for removing method.
X slider
6. Remove the screws (P4x12SMW) fixing the X slider and X
coupling block.
3
4
X joint block
7. Remove the X joint block from the timing belt. Use a sound
wave type belt tension gauge to measure and record the tension
of the timing belt.
5
[Tension gauge setting values]
• Unit weight: 1.3g/mm width x m length
• Belt width: 20mm
• Span length: 615mm
6
Measure the belt tension at the center along the
length of the belt.
Back cover TB
8. Pull the Y bar forward, and then remove the back cover under
TB, back cover TB, and PCB cover from the rear of the
machine. (P3×8SMW: 8 locations)
7
8
PCB cover
Back cover under TB
© 2011 MIMAKI ENGINEERING CO.,LTD.
6.3.9
R.2.0
P.1
Maintenance Manual > Disassembly and Reassembly > Driving Parts > X Gear Box
Model UJF-3042/FX Issued 2010.08.27 Revised 2013.07.18 F/W ver
--Remark
Rev.
6.3.9 X Gear Box
2.0
9. Remove the FFC from the Station III PCB, and remove the
clamp on the FFC.
Station III PCB
10. Remove the 4 screws (P4x10SMW) from the base BKT
PCB BKT
1
FFC
X-T pulley
11. Remove the 2 screws (CS3x40) from the X-T pulley, and
remove the X-T pulley.
2
3
12. Remove the 5 screws (CS3x25) fixing the X gearbox Assy.
4
5
13. Lift the X gearbox Assy, and disconnect the relay connector and
encoder connector connected to the X motor.
6
Relay connector
Encoder connector
7
X motor
8
© 2011 MIMAKI ENGINEERING CO.,LTD.
6.3.9
R.2.0
P.2
Maintenance Manual > Disassembly and Reassembly > Driving Parts > X Gear Box
Model UJF-3042/FX Issued 2010.08.27 Revised 2013.08.01 F/W ver
--Remark
Rev.
6.3.9 X Gear Box
2.0
14. Remove the X gearbox Assy.
Z slide BKTF
When passing the X gearbox Assy below the Z slide BKTF, use
the available space to tilt the X gearbox Assy as needed.
1
15. Perform steps 1 through 14 in reverse to install the replacement
X gearbox Assy.
16. At this time, adjust the tension of the timing belt to the tension
before replacement ±10N. (Tightening the adjustment screw on
the X-T pulley will increase the tension.)
Measure the belt tension at the center along the
length of the belt.
2
3
4
17. Turn the power ON.
18. Use the JOG key to move the Y bar forward/back, to confirm
that it moves correctly with no abnormal noise.
19. Perform FEED COMP 2.
5
6
7
8
© 2011 MIMAKI ENGINEERING CO.,LTD.
6.3.9
R.2.0
P.3
Maintenance Manual > Disassembly and Reassembly > Driving Parts > Motor Coupling
Model UJF-3042/FX Issued 2010.08.27 Revised 2013.07.18 F/W ver
--Remark
Rev.
6.3.10 Motor Coupling
2.0
Applicable scope:
M013772_X gearbox Assy II (UJF-3042-FX #1191 or later)
The coupling for the previous type, M009998_X gearbox Assy cannot be replaced.
To turn power off, be sure to turn the main power OFF.
1
 Procedures
1. Remove the X gear box Assy.
Refer to ("6.3.9 X Gear Box") for the removal procedure.
2
3
2. Loosen the clamp bolt on the coupling, and remove the screws
(CS4x8 SMW) on the X motor BKT.
Remove the X motor, X motor BKT, and coupling from the X
gearbox Assy.
4
Coupling
Do not remove the clamp bolt from the coupling.
5
3. Replace the coupling.
6
7
X motor BKT
8
© 2011 MIMAKI ENGINEERING CO.,LTD.
6.3.10
R.2.0
P.1
Maintenance Manual > Disassembly and Reassembly > Driving Parts > Motor Coupling
Model UJF-3042/FX Issued 2010.08.27 Revised 2013.07.18 F/W ver
--Remark
Rev.
6.3.10 Motor Coupling
2.0
4. Temporarily tighten the screws (CS4x8 SMW) removed in Step
2.
Move back and forth
in the direction of the
arrows.
Position the motor on top, and the X gearbox Assy vertically.
Move the coupling back and forth in the direction of the arrows,
and ensure that the coupling moves smoothly.
5. Tighten the screws that were temporarily tightened in the order
shown in the figure below.
3
2
2
X motor
1
4
6. Press the coupling and worm shaft by hand in the direction of
the arrow, and tighten the screw holding the coupling.
Press
1
3
4
Warm shaft
Press
5
7. Perform Steps 1 through 14 in "6.3.9 X Gear Box" in the
reverse order to install the assembly.
6
7
8
© 2011 MIMAKI ENGINEERING CO.,LTD.
6.3.10
R.2.0
P.2
Maintenance Manual > Disassembly and Reassembly > PCBs
1
2
3
4
5
6. Disassembly and Reassembly
6.1
Covers
6.4
PCBs
6.7
UV Parts
6.2
Ink-related Parts
6.5
Sensors
6.8
Greasing
6.3
Driving Parts
6.6
Other Electrical Parts
6
7
8
© 2013 MIMAKI ENGINEERING CO.,LTD.
Maintenance Manual > Disassembly and Reassembly > PCBs > Power Supply PCB Assy
Model UJF-3042/FX Issued 2010.08.27 Revised 2011.09.30 F/W ver
--Remark
Rev.
6.4.1 Power Supply PCB Assy
2.0
Power Supply
Assy.
 Procedures
 Start work after a lapse of 5 minutes from turning the main power OFF; otherwise, high voltage may
cause electric shock.
1
2
 Remove the Power Plug.
 Never touch any solders on the back of Power Supply PCB. Residual high voltage may cause electric
shock.
Main PCB Assy.
1. Turn off the main power and remove the Power Plug from the
Main body.
2. Pull the Power Supply Chassis from the back.:
4
The Main PCB should be seen.
Screw : P3x8SMW x5
Power Supply Chassis
Power Supply PCB Assy
3. Disconnect all the cables and connectors from the Main PCB,
and remove the clamps for cables.
4. Pull out the Power Supply Chassis completely.
 When pulling out the Power Supply Chassis, be
careful not to yank the cables or damage the connectors. Make sure that the above step 3 is performed properly.
Power Supply PCB Assy
3
5. Disconnect all connectors on PCB.
5
6
6. Remove the Power Supply PCB Assy.
Screw : P3x8SMW x7
7
8
7. Reverse the disassembly procedure for reassembly.
© 2011 MIMAKI ENGINEERING CO.,LTD.
6.4.1
R.2.0
P.1
Maintenance Manual > Disassembly and Reassembly > PCBs > Main PCB
Model UJF-3042/FX Issued 2010.08.27 Revised 2011.09.30 F/W ver
---
Rev.
Remark
6.4.2 Main PCB
2.0
 Procedures
 A button type lithium battery is used for this board. Warn following 1)~4).
1), Danger of explosion if battery is incorrectly replaced.
2), Replace only with the same or equivalent type recommended by the manufacture.
1
Recommended type : [CR2032]
3), Dispose of used batteries according to the manufacturer's instructions.
4),When the battery is replaced with a new one, pay attention to the polarity at replacing.
 To turn power off, be sure to turn the main power OFF.
 Remove the Power Plug. Adjacent parts can be at high voltage and it may cause electrical shock.
2
 Be sure to start the work after confirming the working process.
(Refer to “3.3.1 Replacement of Main PCB”)
1. Turn the main power OFF.
3
2. Remove the Power Plug.
3. Disconnect all connectors on PCB.
4. Remove the Main PCB Assy.
Main PCB Assy.
Screws : P3x8SMW x6
4
5
6
5. Reverse the disassembly procedure for reassembly.
When a used Main PCB is to be discarded, remove
the installed battery (CR2032).
Disposal of the used battery according to manufacturer’s instructions
7
8
© 2011 MIMAKI ENGINEERING CO.,LTD.
6.4.2
R.2.0
P.1
Maintenance Manual > Disassembly and Reassembly > PCBs > 3042 Slider Relay PCB Assy
Model UJF-3042/FX Issued 2010.08.27 Revised 2011.09.30 F/W ver
--Remark
Rev.
6.4.3 3042 Slider Relay PCB Assy
2.0
1
2
3042 Slider Relay PCBAssy.
 Procedures
 To turn power off, be sure to turn the main power OFF.
 Be sure to start the work after confirming the working process.
(Refer to “3.3.2 Replacement of 3042 Slider Relay PCB Assy”)
3042 Slider Relay PCB Assy.
3
1. Turn the main power OFF.
2. Remove the Rear cover.
4
3. Disconnect all connectors on PCB.
When the PCB has been replaced, do not forget to
connect the following Connecters.
1),3042_Slider Relay Power short Assy (CN1)
2),IPPR3_Cascade short 13 Assy (CN25)
Four screws
4. Remove the 3042 Slider Relay PCB Assy.
Screw : P3x8SMW x4
5. Reverse the disassembly procedure for reassembly.
Make sure to perform the followings after reassembling.
 Restore the parameters backed up in the Main PCB
for this board.
1), Turn on the power while holding down the
right and left keys at the same time to enter the
system parameter input mode.
2), Enter "4" in [INITIAL] of the system parameter number 56, and then press ENTER key.
3), Restart the machine.
© 2011 MIMAKI ENGINEERING CO.,LTD.
5
6.4.3
R.2.0
6
7
8
P.1
Maintenance Manual > Disassembly and Reassembly > PCBs > 3042 Station 3 PCB Assy
Model UJF-3042/FX Issued 2010.08.27 Revised 2011.09.30 F/W ver
--Remark
Rev.
6.4.4 3042 Station 3 PCB Assy
2.0
1
 Procedures
2
 To turn power off, be sure to turn the main power OFF.
PCB Cover
1. Move the Y-Bar to the near side.
3
2. Turn the main power OFF.
3. Remome the PCB Cover.
Screw : P3x8SMW x4
4
5
4. Disconnect all connectors on PCB.
5. Remove the PCB.
Screw : P3x8SMW x4
6
7
Installing direction seen from the back
of machine
6. Reverse the disassembly procedure for reassembly.
8
© 2011 MIMAKI ENGINEERING CO.,LTD.
6.4.4
R.2.0
P.1
Maintenance Manual > Disassembly and Reassembly > PCBs > Slider PCB
Model UJF-3042 Issued 2010.04.08 Revised
F/W ver --- Remark
Rev.
6.4.5 Slider PCB
1.0
1
Slider PCB Assy.
2
 Procedures
To turn power off, be sure to turn the main power OFF.
Slider PCB Assy
3
1. Turn the main power OFF.
2. Remove the following covers:
• Upper Cover
• Slider PCB Cover
4
3. Disconnect all connectors on PCB.
4. Remove the Slider PCB Assy..
5
Screw : P3x8SMW x4
5. Reverse the disassembly procedure for reassembly.
6
7
8
© 2013 MIMAKI ENGINEERING CO.,LTD.
6.4.5
R.1.0
P.1
Maintenance Manual > Disassembly and Reassembly > PCBs > 3042 Pump 3 PCB Assy
Model UJF-3042 Issued 2010.04.08 Revised
F/W ver --- Remark
Rev.
6.4.6 3042 Pump 3 PCB Assy
1.0
1
3042 Pump 3 PCB Assy
2
 Procedures
To turn power off, be sure to turn the main power OFF.
3042 Pump 3 PCB Assy
3
1. Move the Y-Bar to the farthest position.
2. Turn the main power OFF.
3. Remove the Rear Cover-Right.
4
4. Disconnect all connectors on PCB.
5. Remove the 3042 Pump 3 PCB Assy..
Screw : P3x6SMW x4
5
6. Reverse the disassembly procedure for reassembly.
6
7
8
© 2013 MIMAKI ENGINEERING CO.,LTD.
6.4.6
R.1.0
P.1
Maintenance Manual > Disassembly and Reassembly > PCBs > ID Contact PCB
Model UJF-3042/FX Issued 2010.08.27 Revised 2011.09.30 F/W ver
--Remark
Rev.
6.4.7 ID Contact PCB
2.0
 Procedures
To turn power off, be sure to turn the main power OFF.
1
 Be sure to start the work after confirming the working process.
(Refer to 3.3.3 Replacement of ID Contact PCB)
 Take care not soil the surroundings.
Cartridge Frame
1. Loosen the screws and remove the ID Contact PCB from the
Cartridge Frame.
Loosen
2
3
ID Contact PCB
4
2. Reverse the disassembly procedure for reassembly.
When the Cartridge Frame is assembled, firstly,
tighten the screws temporarily, and then tighten the
screws after the position is adjusted.
5
6
Match the
surface
7
Cartridge Frame
8
© 2011 MIMAKI ENGINEERING CO.,LTD.
6.4.7
R.2.0
P.1
Maintenance Manual > Disassembly and Reassembly > PCBs > Keyboard PCB
Model UJF-3042/FX Issued 2010.08.27 Revised 2011.09.30 F/W ver
--Remark
Rev.
6.4.8 Keyboard PCB
2.0
1
2
Keyboard PCB Assy.
 Procedures
3
To turn power off, be sure to turn the main power OFF.
1. Turn the main power OFF.
Keyboard PCB Assy.
4
2. Remove the Key Panel Assy.
Refer to ” 6.1.2 Key Panel Assy “ for removing method.
Perform the following process with the removed Station Assy
upside down.
5
Key Panel Assy. (back side)
3. Disconnect all connectors on PCB.
Keyboard PCB Assy.
6
4. Remove the KB Frame.
Screw : P3x8SMW x10
5. Remove the Keyboard PCB Assy
Screw : P3x8SMW x10
7
KB Frame
6. Reverse the disassembly procedure for reassembly.
 Make sure that the Key Tops are oriented properly
and the contacts are free from fatigue.
 Make sure that the LCD surface and the inside of
the LCD of the nameplate are free from scratches,
dust and dirt or fingerprints.
8
 Tighten the screws in the order shown. After
assembly, press every button and make sure that a
click is felt.
© 2011 MIMAKI ENGINEERING CO.,LTD.
6.4.8
R.2.0
P.1
Maintenance Manual > Disassembly and Reassembly > PCBs > Linear Encoder PCB
Model UJF-3042/FX Issued 2010.08.27 Revised 2011.09.30 F/W ver
--Remark
Rev.
6.4.9 Linear Encoder PCB
2.0
1
Linear Encoder PCB Assy.
 Procedures
To turn power off, be sure to turn the main power OFF.
2
3
1. Turn the main power OFF.
L-Sensor BKT
2. Remove the following covers:
4
• Front Cover
• Upper Cover
• Head Cover
• Slider PCB Cover
5
3. Remove the L-Sensor BKT together with the PCB.
Linear Encoder PCB Assy.
4. Remove the Linear Encoder PCB Assy..
L-Sensor BKT
Linear Encoder PCB
Assy.
6
5. Reverse the disassembly procedure for reassembly.
 When the encoder is assembled, adjust the up/
down and front/back position of encoder surely
not to contact to the scale.
Set to the center as far
as possible.
1~1.5 mm
Encoder Scale
© 2011 MIMAKI ENGINEERING CO.,LTD.
8
Encoder
6.4.9
7
R.2.0
P.1
Maintenance Manual > Disassembly and Reassembly > Sensors
1
2
3
4
5
6. Disassembly and Reassembly
6.1
Covers
6.4
PCBs
6.7
UV Parts
6.2
Ink-related Parts
6.5
Sensors
6.8
Greasing
6.3
Driving Parts
6.6
Other Electrical Parts
6
7
8
© 2013 MIMAKI ENGINEERING CO.,LTD.
Maintenance Manual > Disassembly and Reassembly > Sensors > X origin sensor
Model UJF-3042/FX Issued 2010.08.27 Revised 2011.09.30 F/W ver
--Remark
Rev.
6.5.1 X origin sensor
2.0
1
X origin sensor
2
 To turn power off, be sure to turn the main power OFF.
 Working Procedure
3
1. Turn the main power OFF
PCB Cover
2. Remove the following cover:
• PCB Cover
• Rear Cover-under TB
4
Rear cover-Under TB
3. Loosen the fixing of the cable and pull out all connectors from
the PCB.
5
6
4. Remove the PCB BKT.(It is OK if PCB is attached with it.)
7
8
PCB BKT
X origin Sensor
© 2011 MIMAKI ENGINEERING CO.,LTD.
6.5.1
R.2.0
P.1
Maintenance Manual > Disassembly and Reassembly > Sensors > X origin sensor
Model UJF-3042/FX Issued 2010.08.27 Revised 2011.09.30 F/W ver
--Remark
Rev.
6.5.1 X origin sensor
2.0
5. Take the Sensor off.
• Remove Fixng screw.
• Disconnect the connecter of the sensor.
1
6. Perform the assembly by reversing the disassembly procedure.
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
© 2011 MIMAKI ENGINEERING CO.,LTD.
6.5.1
R.2.0
P.2
Maintenance Manual > Disassembly and Reassembly > Sensors > Z origin sensor
Model UJF-3042/FX Issued 2010.08.27 Revised 2011.09.30 F/W ver
--Remark
Rev.
6.5.2 Z origin sensor
2.0
Z origin sensor
1
2
 To turn power off, be sure to turn the main power OFF.
 Working Procedure
Z-Motor-Reinforce Plate
3
1. Remove the Table.
• Refer to 6.3.3 Table.
2. Turn the main power off.
4
3. Remove the Z-Motor-Reinforce Plate.
5
6
4. Take the Sensor off.
• Remove fixing screw.
• Disconnect the connector of the sensor.
7
8
5. Perform the assembly by reversing the disassembly procedure.
© 2011 MIMAKI ENGINEERING CO.,LTD.
6.5.2
R.2.0
P.1
Maintenance Manual > Disassembly and Reassembly > Sensors > Work area sensor
Model UJF-3042/FX Issued 2010.08.27 Revised 2011.09.30 F/W ver
--Remark
Rev.
6.5.3 Work area sensor
2.0
1
Work area sensor
Projection of the light side
Work area sensor
Light receiving side
 To turn power off, be sure to turn the main power OFF.
2
 Working Procedure
1. Turn the main power off.
3
2. Remove the following covers:
•
•
•
•
Right cover
Left cover
Rear cover
Rear Right cover
4
 Disassembly of the “ Projection of the light side”
Work area sensor BKT
3. Loosen the Cable fixing.
5
4. Take the Work area sensor BKT off.
6
Cable fxing
5. Disconnect the connector.
• “CN8” of the 3042 Pump3 PCB Assy.
7
CN8
3042 Pump3 PCB Assy.
Fixing screw x2
8
6. Take the sensor off from the Work area sensor BKT.
• Fixing screw x2
© 2011 MIMAKI ENGINEERING CO.,LTD.
6.5.3
R.2.0
P.1
Maintenance Manual > Disassembly and Reassembly > Sensors > Work area sensor
Model UJF-3042/FX Issued 2010.08.27 Revised 2011.09.30 F/W ver
--Remark
Rev.
6.5.3 Work area sensor
2.0
 Disassembly of the “ Light receiving side”
Work area sensor BKT
7. Loosen the Cable fixing.
8. Take the Work area sensor BKT off.
1
Cable fxing
3042 Slider relay PCB Assy
9. Disconnect the connector.
• “CN27” of the 3042 Slider relay PCB Assy.
2
3
4
CN27
Fixing screw x2
10. Take the sensor off from the Work area sensor BKT.
• Fixing screw x2
5
11. Perform the assembly by reversing the disassembly procedure.
6
 After assembling, be sure to adjust the light axis.
Refer to “ 4.3.5 Work Area Sensor Height
Adjustment “
7
8
© 2011 MIMAKI ENGINEERING CO.,LTD.
6.5.3
R.2.0
P.2
Maintenance Manual > Disassembly and Reassembly > Sensors > Cover sensor
Model UJF-3042/FX Issued 2010.08.27 Revised 2011.09.30 F/W ver
--Remark
Rev.
6.5.4 Cover sensor
2.0
Cover sensor
1
2
 To turn power off, be sure to turn the main power OFF.
 Working Procedure
3
1. Turn the main power off.
2. Remove the Front cover.
3. Take the Micro SW-BKTL off .
4
Micro SW-BKTL
5
6
Connector
Sensor
4. Take the Sensor off.
• Disconnect the connector of the sensor.
• Remove two fixing screws.
7
Fixing screw
5. Perform the assembly by reversing the disassembly procedure.
© 2011 MIMAKI ENGINEERING CO.,LTD.
6.5.4
R.2.0
8
P.1
Maintenance Manual > Disassembly and Reassembly > Sensors > Table Cover sensor
Model UJF-3042/FX Issued 2010.08.27 Revised 2011.09.30 F/W ver
--Remark
Rev.
6.5.5 Table Cover sensor
2.0
1
Table Cover sensor
2
 To turn power off, be sure to turn the main power OFF.
 Working Procedure
3
1. Turn the main power off.
Front Cover TB
2. Remove the Following covers.
• Front Cover Under-TB
• Front Cover TB
4
5
Front Cover Under-TB
3. Take the Inter lock BKT off.
Sensor
6
Fixing screw
Inter lock BKT
7
4. Take the Sensor(Micro Switch) off.
• Remove two fixing screws.
• Disconnect the connector of the sensor.
8
5. Perform the assembly by reversing the disassembly procedure.
© 2011 MIMAKI ENGINEERING CO.,LTD.
6.5.5
R.2.0
P.1
Maintenance Manual > Disassembly and Reassembly > Other Electrical Parts
1
2
3
4
5
6. Disassembly and Reassembly
6.1
Covers
6.4
PCBs
6.7
UV Parts
6.2
Ink-related Parts
6.5
Sensors
6.8
Greasing
6.3
Driving Parts
6.6
Other Electrical Parts
6
7
8
© 2013 MIMAKI ENGINEERING CO.,LTD.
Maintenance Manual > Disassembly and Reassembly > UV Parts
1
2
3
4
5
6. Disassembly and Reassembly
6.1
Covers
6.4
PCBs
6.7
UV Parts
6.2
Ink-related Parts
6.5
Sensors
6.8
Greasing
6.3
Driving Parts
6.6
Other Electrical Parts
6
7
8
© 2013 MIMAKI ENGINEERING CO.,LTD.
Maintenance Manual > Disassembly and Reassembly > UV Parts > LED UV UNIT
Model UJF-3042/FX Issued 2010.08.27 Revised 2011.09.30 F/W ver
--Remark
Rev.
6.7.1 LED UV UNIT
2.0
1
LED UV UNIT
2
 The LED-UV UNIT “New Type” explained here has no compatibility with the “Old Type” as indicated below. “New Type” indicated by this version is the one whose design has been changed in consideration of ease of maintenance and individually replaceable part. Do not divert parts indicated by
this version to the LED-UV UNIT of “Old Type”.
No connector on the top surface.
Connector can be connected on the top surface.
3
4
5
New Type
Old Type
 When the UVLED PCB is required to be replaced due to illuminance deterioration etc., replace
“LEDUV Irradiation Assy” of the figure below. Replacement of UVLED PCB only is forbidden
strictly.
After illuminance and operation were checked in the factory, and the one whose performance
could be secured is provided as the maintenance parts. Therefore, it is prohibited to use parts
that were disassembled and assembled in the field again.
7
8
LEDUV Irradiation Assy
© 2011 MIMAKI ENGINEERING CO.,LTD.
6
6.7.1
R.2.0
P.1
Maintenance Manual > Disassembly and Reassembly > UV Parts > LED UV UNIT
Model UJF-3042/FX Issued 2010.08.27 Revised 2011.09.30 F/W ver
--Remark
Rev.
6.7.1 LED UV UNIT
2.0
 Procedures
1. Drain the cooling water completely.
Coupler of Cooling
Water Tube x2
Follow the procedure given in
“ 4.2.8 EXCHANGE LED UV “
2. Turn the main power OFF.
1
Fixing Screw
3. Remove the following covers:
• Front Cover
• Upper Cover
4. Disconnect the relay connector and the Two Couplers of Cooling Water Tube.
5. Remove the Fixing Screw and take LED UV UNIT off.
Connecter x2
Handle the device carefully not to damage the radiating surface (the bottom surface).
2
3
6. Evacuate cooling water remaining in the LED-UV UNIT as
much as possible.
By making the removed LED-UV UNIT upside down, evacuate cooling water from its piping.
4
7. Remove the Front Cover and Filter.
• Remove the hand screw.
5
Front Cover
6
Filter
Top Cover
8. Remove the Top Cover.
• Screw x2
7
8
Screw x2
© 2011 MIMAKI ENGINEERING CO.,LTD.
6.7.1
R.2.0
P.2
Maintenance Manual > Disassembly and Reassembly > UV Parts > LED UV UNIT
Model UJF-3042/FX Issued 2010.08.27 Revised 2011.09.30 F/W ver
--Remark
Rev.
6.7.1 LED UV UNIT
2.0
9. Remove the DRV PCB Cooling Fan Assy.
FAN Connector
CN4
(1) Pull the Connector off. (CN4)
(2) Remove the Fixing screw.
(3) Remove the DRV PCB Cooling Fan Assy by pulling it
upward.
1
DRV PCB Cooling Fan Assy
2
Fixing screw x2
Side Cover-R
3
10. Remove the Side Cover-R.
• Fixing sccrew x2
4
5
Fixing screw
LEDUVx2-DRIVE PCB Assy
CN5, CN6
6
11. Remove the Side Cover-L.
(1) Pull the connecter off.
• LEDUVx2-DRIVE PDB Assy CN5, CN6
7
(2) Remove the Fixing screws(x2).
 Perform removal and replacement of LEDUVx2DRIVE PCB Assy in this step.
8
Side Cover-L
© 2011 MIMAKI ENGINEERING CO.,LTD.
6.7.1
R.2.0
P.3
Maintenance Manual > Disassembly and Reassembly > UV Parts > LED UV UNIT
Model UJF-3042/FX Issued 2010.08.27 Revised 2011.09.30 F/W ver
--Remark
Rev.
6.7.1 LED UV UNIT
2.0
12. Remove the Reflector BKT.
Reflector BKT
• Fixing screw x2
1
13. Remove the Glass Holder and the Glass.
Glass
Holder
2
• Fixing screw x2
3
Glass
Glass cushion x4
14. Take the Glass cushions out.
4
 Be careful not to lose it.
5
This is the end of disassembling.
LED UV Irradiation Assy
 It is strictly prohibited to perform maintenance by
disassembling more from the status indicated in
the left figure.
The Assy in the left figure is assembled in the
factory. Therefore, to disassemble, assemble and
use parts again in the field may cause problem of
heat release defect etc.
6.7.1
7
8
15. Reverse the disassembly procedure for reassembly.
© 2011 MIMAKI ENGINEERING CO.,LTD.
6
R.2.0
P.4
Maintenance Manual > Disassembly and Reassembly > UV Parts > UV Cooling Unit
Model UJF-3042/FX Issued 2010.08.27 Revised 2011.09.30 F/W ver
--Remark
Rev.
6.7.2 UV Cooling Unit
2.0
1
2
UV Cooling Unit
 Procedures
3
To turn power off, be sure to turn the main power OFF.
1. Drain the cooling water completely.
Syringe
Follow the procedure given in
“ 4.2.8 EXCHANGE LED UV “
4
2. Turn the main power OFF.
5
3. Remove the following covers:
• Front Cover
6
• Front-Left Cover
7
IN(Upper)
4. Remove the water tube (IN) and air vent tube (AIR) from the
bracket. (Loosen the nuts on the back of the bracket.)
8
AIR(Lower)
© 2011 MIMAKI ENGINEERING CO.,LTD.
6.7.2
R.2.0
P.1
Maintenance Manual > Disassembly and Reassembly > UV Parts > UV Cooling Unit
Model UJF-3042/FX Issued 2010.08.27 Revised 2011.09.30 F/W ver
--Remark
Rev.
6.7.2 UV Cooling Unit
Float Sensor
Cooling Water Pump
Radiator Fan
2.0
5. Disconnect the relay connector of following Electrical Assy.
• Cooling Water Pump Assy
• Radiator Fan Assy
• Float Sensor Assy
6. Disconnect the Two Couplers of Cooling Water Tube
1
2
Couplers of Cooling Water Tube
7. Remove the two screws.
Screw : P4x10SMW x2
3
4
two screws
8. Pull out and remove the UV Cooling Unit.
5
6
7
8
UV Cooling Unit
9. Reverse the disassembly procedure for reassembly.
© 2011 MIMAKI ENGINEERING CO.,LTD.
6.7.2
R.2.0
P.2
Maintenance Manual > Disassembly and Reassembly > UV Parts > Cooling Water Pump
Model UJF-3042/FX Issued 2010.08.27 Revised 2011.09.30 F/W ver
--Remark
Rev.
6.7.3 Cooling Water Pump
2.0
Cooling Water Pump
1
2
 To turn power off, be sure to turn the main power OFF.
 Be sure to wear Protective Glasses and Working Gloves during the work operation.
 Procedures
3
1. Drain the cooling water completely.
UV Cooling Unit.
Follow the procedure given in
”4.2.8 EXCHANGE LED UV ”
2. Turn the main power OFF.
4
3. Remove the UV Cooling Unit.
Follow the procedure given in
” 6.7.2 UV Cooling Unit ”
5
Cooling Water Pump
4. Remove the Cooling Water Pump.
Screw : P3x10SMW x2
6
7
8
5. Reverse the disassembly procedure for reassembly.
© 2011 MIMAKI ENGINEERING CO.,LTD.
6.7.3
R.2.0
P.1
Maintenance Manual > Disassembly and Reassembly > UV Parts > Radiator Fan Assy.
Model UJF-3042/FX Issued 2010.08.27 Revised 2011.09.30 F/W ver
--Remark
Rev.
6.7.4 Radiator Fan Assy.
2.0
Radiator Fan Assy
1
2
 To turn power off, be sure to turn the main power OFF.
 Be sure to wear Protective Glasses and Working Gloves during the work operation.
 Procedures
3
1. Drain the cooling water completely.
UV Cooling Unit
Follow the procedure given in
”4.2.8 EXCHANGE LED UV ”
2. Turn the main power OFF.
4
3. Remove the UV Cooling Unit.
Follow the procedure given in
” 6.7.2 UV Cooling Unit ”
5
Radiator Fan Assy
4. Remove the Radiator Fan Assy.
Screw : P3x30SMW x4
6
7
5. Reverse the disassembly procedure for reassembly.
© 2011 MIMAKI ENGINEERING CO.,LTD.
6.7.4
8
R.2.0
P.1
Maintenance Manual > Disassembly and Reassembly > Greasing
1
2
3
4
5
6. Disassembly and Reassembly
6.1
Covers
6.4
PCBs
6.7
UV Parts
6.2
Ink-related Parts
6.5
Sensors
6.8
Greasing
6.3
Driving Parts
6.6
Other Electrical Parts
6
7
8
© 2013 MIMAKI ENGINEERING CO.,LTD.
Maintenance Manual > Troubleshooting > Details on Errors and Malfunctions
1
2
3
4
5
6
7. Troubleshooting
7.1
7.2
Details on Errors and Malfunctions Detailed Methods of Coping with
the Malfunctions
7
8
© 2011 MIMAKI ENGINEERING CO.,LTD.
Maintenance Manual > Troubleshooting > Details on Errors and Malfunctions > Concerning Errors and Malfunctions
Model UJF-3042/FX Issued 2010.08.27 Revised 2011.09.30 F/W ver 1.80 / 1.00 Remark
7.1.1 Concerning Errors and Malfunctions
Rev.
2.0
 Outline
This chapter describes the troubleshooting for UJF-3042/FX.
 Rough Identification of the Source of the Trouble
At the beginning of troubleshooting, it is necessary to identify roughly which functions the trouble relates to.
Problems can be roughly classified into those that relate to the printer itself and those that involve the connection
between the printer and the host computer.
 Problems with the printer itself
The cause of the trouble can be identified by executing appropriate functions or using test functions.
 Problems concerning the connection to the host computer
Hardware: Broken wire or faulty contact of cables
Software: Transmission by improper application setting
1
2
In the standard setting of UJF-3042/FX, priority is given to the host computer.
Check the settings on the host computer to see if there is any improper parameter setting.
3
START
4
Precautions in maintenance
Yes
Is there error message?
Refer to 7.1.2 List of Error Messages.
5
No
Trouble due
to the print quality?
Yes
Refer to 7.2 Detailed Methods of Coping with the Malfunctions
(Add information sequentially)
No
Rough identification of error source
Execute appropriate functions or use test functions of UJF-3042/FX
6
Do the
above functions operate
normally?
7
No
Yes
Troubles on the host computer side
If this troubleshooting cannot correct the trouble, check to see if the same trouble occurs with another
host computer (if possible).
© 2011 MIMAKI ENGINEERING CO.,LTD.
8
7.1.1
R.2.0
P.1
Maintenance Manual > Troubleshooting > Details on Errors and Malfunctions > Concerning Errors and Malfunctions
Model UJF-3042/FX Issued 2010.08.27 Revised 2011.09.30 F/W ver
--Remark
7.1.1 Concerning Errors and Malfunctions
Rev.
2.0
 Checking Procedure
This section describes troubleshooting procedures for the problems for which error messages are displayed.
1. Identifying the error category
The causes of errors can be classified into the following categories:
1
 Handling error on the host computer side
 Trouble on the host computer side
 Trouble with the Interface Cable
2
 Printer handling error
 Printer mechanical trouble
 Printer hardware trouble
 Printer firmware trouble
3
2. Initial action
Refer to the error message, and judge whether the trouble lies on the host computer side or on the printer side.
 Has any of the interface conditions (printer model setting, command, communication conditions, etc.) been
changed?
4
 Does the trouble occur under specific conditions?
 Does the same trouble occur repeatedly?
5
3. Failure on the printer side
Take the following steps to repair the printer.
6
 Uploading and checking of parameters
 Reinstalling of firmware
 Checking of FFC and cable connections
 Replace the defective part (sensor, etc.) or make the necessary adjustment.
7
 Replace the PCBs.
4. Repair at the factory
If the error recurs even after the corrective measures specified here are taken, return the printer to the factory of
MIMAKI for repair.
© 2011 MIMAKI ENGINEERING CO.,LTD.
7.1.1
R.2.0
8
P.2
Maintenance Manual > Troubleshooting > Details on Errors and Malfunctions > List of Error Messages
Model UJF-3042/FX Issued 2010.08.27 Revised 2011.09.30 F/W ver 1.80 / 1.00 Remark
Rev.
7.1.2 List of Error Messages
2.0
 List of Error Messages (1/9)
No.
LCD
ERROR 108
1
HD CONNECT[12345678]
ERROR 108
HD THERMIS[12345678]
Cause
Head connection error
(Head connection can not be confirmed)
Head thermistor
(Head temperature can not be measured)
2
ERROR 12e
Head Faild[xxxx]
Abnormality of the Print head.
Abnormality of the Driver of the Print
head.
(The details of [xxxx] are
explained below this
3 list.)
4
5
ERROR 122
CHECK:SDRAM
ERROR 128
HDC FIFO OVER
ERROR 128
HDC FIFO UNDER
PRAM size is not sufficient at FW
upgrading (fw_updmsg).
HDC FIFO OVER error
(Data transmission speed is too fast
Control PCB trouble)
HDC FIFO OVERRUN is detected at the
scan slider process (ScanSlider)
HDC FIFO UNDER error
(Data transmission speed is too slow
Control PCB trouble)
HDC FIFO UNDERRUN is detected at the
scan slider process (ScanSlider)
6
ERROR 129
BATTERY EXCHANGE
7
ERROR 130
HD DATA SEQ
Battery dead (RTC battery dead is
detected.)
Proper information of Printer or Time
(Dedicated IC) unusable on Printer
initializing process (opinit).
Head data transferring sequence error
8
© 2013 MIMAKI ENGINEERING CO.,LTD.
List of Countermeasures
1. Check the setting of loading number of the head in the
parameter.
(System parameter No.41 HEAD NO=3)
2. Disconnect and connect the FFC located between the
Slider PCB and the SL-Relay PCB.
3. Check connection between the Slider PCB from the
Print Head
4. Replace the Slider PCB with a new one.
(Refer to 6.4.5)
5. Replace the Print Head with a new one. (Refer to 6.2.1)
1. Update F/W.
2. Initialize a parameter.
3. Disconnect and connect the FFC located between the
Slider PCB and the SL-Relay PCB.
4. Replace the FFC located between the Slider PCB and
the SL-Relay PCB.
5. Replace the Print Head with a new one. (Refer to 6.2.1)
6. Replace the Slider PCB with a new one.
(Refer to 6.4.5)
7. Replace the SL-Relay PCB with a new one.
(Refer to 3.3.2)
1. Update F/W.
2. Replace the Main PCB with a new one. (Refer to 3.3.1)
1. Check the parameter.
(Is the scan parameter the default value?)
2. Update F/W.
3. Check if there is no data error from RIP.
4. To make sure, repeat RIP.
5. Disconnect and connect the FFC located between the
Main PCB and the SL-Relay PCB.
6. Disconnect and connect the FFC located between the
SL-Relay PCB and the Slider PCB.
7. Replace the FFC located between the Main PCB and
the SL-Relay PCB.
8. Replace the FFC located between the SL-Relay PCB
and the Slider PCB.
9. Replace the Slider PCB with a new one.
(Refer to 6.4.5)
10. Replace the SL-Relay PCB with a new one.
(Refer to 3.3.2)
11. Replace the Main PCB with a new one. (Refer to 3.3.1)
1. Replace a battery equipped on the Main PCB with new
one. (CR2032)
* The new battery should be the same product or the
equivalent.
* Discard the old battery according to the instruction
from the maker.
1. Disconnect and connect the FFC located between the
Slider PCB and the SL-Relay PCB.
2. Disconnect and connect the FFC located between the
SL-Relay PCB and the Main PCB.
3. Replace the FFC located between the Slider PCB and
the SL-Relay PCB.
4. Replace the FFC located between the SL-Relay PCB
and the Main PCB.
5. Replace the Slider PCB with a new one.
(Refer to 6.4.5)
6. Replace the SL-Relay PCB with a new one.
(Refer to 3.3.2)
7. Replace the Main PCB with a new one. (Refer to 3.3.1)
7.1.2
R.2.0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
P.1
Maintenance Manual > Troubleshooting > Details on Errors and Malfunctions > List of Error Messages
Model UJF-3042/FX Issued 2010.08.27 Revised 2011.09.30 F/W ver 1.80 / 1.00 Remark
Rev.
7.1.2 List of Error Messages
2.0
 List of Error Messages (2/9)
No.
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
LCD
ERROR 146
E-LOG SEQ
ERROR 151
Main PCB V1R2
ERROR 152
Main PCB V2R5
ERROR 153
Main PCB V3R3
ERROR 154
Main PCB V05
ERROR 155
Main PCB V35-1
ERROR 156
Main PCB V5B
ERROR 157
Main PCB VTT
ERROR 158
Main PCB V352
ERROR 16e
Main PCB V3R3B
ERROR 15f
HEAD DRIVE HOT
Cause
Sequential number abnormality of the
event log
List of Countermeasures
1. Initialize a Event log.
2. Replace the Main PCB with a new one. (Refer to 3.3.1)
Main board 1.2V power supply is
abnormal.
1. Replace the Main PCB with a new one. (Refer to 3.3.1)
Main board 2.5V power supply is
abnormal.
1. Replace the Main PCB with a new one. (Refer to 3.3.1)
Main board 3.3V power supply is
abnormal.
1. The output voltage check of the Power supply PCB.
2. Replace the Power supply PCB with a new one. (Refer
to 6.4.1)
Main board 5V power supply is abnormal.
3. Replace the Main PCB with a new one. (Refer to 3.3.1)
Main board 35-1V power supply is
abnormal.
Main board 5VB power supply is
abnormal.
Main board VTT power supply is
abnormal.
1. Replace the Main PCB with a new one. (Refer to 3.3.1)
Main board 35-2V power supply is
abnormal.
1. Replace the Main PCB with a new one. (Refer to 3.3.1)
Main board 3.3VÇa power supply is
abnormal.
1. Replace the Main PCB with a new one. (Refer to 3.3.1)
COM driver becomes the high
temperature.
19
ERROR 171
NEW HEAD CONNECT
New Print Head was recognized.
20
21
22
23
ERROR 172
Main PCB Q6 Check
ERROR 201
COMMAND
ERROR 202
PARAMETER
ERROR 203
Ment Command
24
The main PCB Q6 is disabled (short mode).
(Displayed only at startup in the maintenance
open mode or other than SUPPORT=0.)
Command error
Other data than commands is received
Parameter error
Parameter out of the numeral value range
is received
1. Confirm movement of Slider Relay Cooling Fan.
2. Disconnect and connect the FFC located between the
Slider PCB and the SL-Relay PCB.
3. Replace the SL-Relay PCB with a new one.
(Refer to 3.3.2)
4. Replace the FFC located between the Slider PCB and
the SL-Relay PCB
5. Replace the Print Head with a new one. (Refer to 3.1.1)
6. Replace the Slider PCB with a new one.
(Refer to 6.4.5)
It is normal that an error occurs only at the time of the first
start after having connected a new head.
It is abnormal that an error occurs at the time of start every
time..
1. Check connection between the Slider PCB from the
Print Head
2. Replace the Slider PCB with a new one.
(Refer to 6.4.5)
3. Replace the Print Head with a new one. (Refer to
3.1.1)
1. Replace the Main PCB with a new one. (Refer to 3.3.1)
1. Check if the output set of the PC matches the set of the
machine side?
2. Change the profile.
3. Check if there is no parameter error?
4. Check if there is no trouble on the USB Cable?
5. Replace the USB Cable.
6. Replace the Main PCB with a new one. (Refer to 3.3.1)
Maintenance command
1. Check the PRM file.
Operation of a maintenance command fails 2. Check the number of each parameter.
(if PRM matches up to the machine.)
* Non-disclosed command
Parameter Up/Download and time
setting (LcAeMent [M0xfe])
© 2013 MIMAKI ENGINEERING CO.,LTD.
7.1.2
R.2.0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
P.2
Maintenance Manual > Troubleshooting > Details on Errors and Malfunctions > List of Error Messages
Model UJF-3042/FX Issued 2010.08.27 Revised 2011.09.30 F/W ver 1.80 / 1.00 Remark
Rev.
7.1.2 List of Error Messages
2.0
 List of Error Messages (3/9)
No.
25
26
27
LCD
ERROR 304
USB INIT ERR
ERROR 305
USB TIME OUT
ERROR 401
MOTOR X
ERROR 403
X CURRENT
28
29
ERROR 402
MOTOR Y
ERROR 404
Y CURRENT
30
ERROR 420
Z POSITION
31
32
ERROR 421
!CHECK FILTER
ERROR 505
!WORK High
Cause
USB initialization error
(Failures in initializing USB device)
USB time-out
(Occurrence of time-out error on USB
device)
X Servo error
(Excessive load to the X-motor)
List of Countermeasures
1. Check if there is no parameter error?
2. Replace the USB Cable.
3. Replace the Main PCB with a new one. (Refer to 3.3.1)
1. Check if there is no error on the print data.
(Check if the same error occurs on other data?)
2. Check if it moves to the X-direction smoothly in the
X-motor current
power-off condition.
(Over current error of X-motor is detected.)
3. Make sure no torsion on the X-bar or Y-bar.
4. Check if there is no trouble on the Timing Belt.
5. Check if there is no trouble on the Motor Cable.
(disconnecting, burnout, or the like)
6. Check the FFC between each PCB and Shortconnectors connected on the PCB.
7. Replace the X-axis Motor with a new one.
(Refer to 6.3.1)
Y Servo error
1. Check if there is no error on the print data.
(Excessive load to the Y-motor)
(Check if the same error occurs on other data?)
2.
Check
if it moves to the Y-direction smoothly in the
Y-motor current
power-off condition.
(Over current error of Y-motor is detected.)
3. Check if there is no trouble on the Timing Belt.
4. Check if there is no trouble on the Motor Cable.
(disconnecting, burnout, or the like)
5. Check the FFC between each PCB and Shortconnectors connected on the PCB.
6. Replace the Y-axis motor with a new one.
(Refer to 6.3.2)
Z-axis of coordinate is misaligned.
1. Check the weight of a work on the table.
2. Check the parameters.
3. Check the Tabel mechanism.
(including rattling, loosening of screws, or smooth
motion)
4. Check if there is no trouble on the Z Origin Sensor.
5. Replace the Z Origin sensor with a new one.
6. Replace the 3042 Station3 PCB with a new one.
(Refer to 6.4.4)
Gives warning of filter blot.
1. Perform [MAINTENANCE] -> [STATION MENT:
CHECK FILTER] and replace the “Mist absorption
 Mist absorption filter
filter” and the “UV mist filter”.
 UV mist filter
The Work Area Sensor detected an
obstacle that can hit the head.
33
© 2013 MIMAKI ENGINEERING CO.,LTD.
1
2
3
4
5
6
Lower the table until this warning disappears.
If this warning does not disappear when the table is
lowered to the bottom.
1. Execute and confirm [#TEST]->[SENSOR TEST] >[HEIGHT-SES].
2. Readjust the Work Area Sensor.
3. Readjust the height of the carriage.
4. Check the Connectors of Work Area Sensor connected
on the PCB
5. Replace the Work Area Sensor with a new one.
6. Replace the SL-Relay PCB with a new one.
(Refer to 3.3.2)
7. Replace the Pump 3 PCB with a new one.
(Refer to 6.4.4)
7.1.2
R.2.0
7
8
P.3
Maintenance Manual > Troubleshooting > Details on Errors and Malfunctions > List of Error Messages
Model UJF-3042/FX Issued 2010.08.27 Revised 2011.09.30 F/W ver 1.80 / 1.00 Remark
Rev.
7.1.2 List of Error Messages
2.0
 List of Error Messages (4/9)
No.
LCD
ERROR 509
HDC POSCNT
Cause
HDC position counter error
34
ERROR 50a
Y ORIGIN
Y-origin error
(Origin of Y-axis can not be detected)
35
ERROR 50f
L-SCALE BLACK
Liner Scale error
36
ERROR 510
X ORIGIN
X-origin error
(Origin of X-axis can not be detected)
37
© 2013 MIMAKI ENGINEERING CO.,LTD.
List of Countermeasures
1. Execute and confirm [#TEST]->[SENSOR TEST] >[Y-ORG].(Confirm that the ON/OFF display is
switched by moving the carriage left and right.)
2. [Execute [#TEST]->[CHECK ENCODER].
3. Check the assembly of Y-scale, and confirm that there
is neither dirt nor scratch.
4. Check in manual if the Head Assy. (carriage) moves
left and right smoothly.
5. Check the connector connection of Y-origin Sensor
and Linear Encoder.
6. Replace the Y-origin Sensor or Linear Encoder with a
new one.
7. Check the assembly and connector connection of Yaxis Motor.
8. Replace the Y-axis Motor with a new one. (Refer to
6.3.2)
9. Replace the Slider PCB with a new one. (Refer to
6.4.5)
10. Replace the SL-Relay PCB with a new one.
(Refer to 3.3.2)
11. Replace the Main PCB with a new one. (Refer to 3.3.1)
1. Execute and confirm [#TEST]->[SENSOR TEST] >[Y-ORG].(Confirm that the ON/OFF display is
switched by moving the carriage left and right.)
2. [Execute [#TEST]->[CHECK ENCODER].
3. Check in manual if the Head Assy. (carriage) moves
left and right smoothly.
4. Check the connector connection of Y-origin Sensor
and Linear Encoder.
5. Replace the Y-origin Sensor or Linear Encoder with a
new one.
6. Check the assembly and connector connection of Yaxis Motor.
7. Replace the Y-axis Motor with a new one. (Refer to
6.3.2)
8. Replace the Slider PCB with a new one. (Refer to
6.4.5)
9. Replace the SL-Relay PCB with a new one.
(Refer to 3.3.2)
10. Replace the Main PCB with a new one. (Refer to 3.3.1)
1. Check the assembly position of Linear Scale and
Encoder PCB Assy..
2. Check Linear Scale (scratches or dirtiness or so.)
3. Replace the Linear Scale with a new one.
4. Replace the Encoder PCB Assy. with a new one.
(Refer to 6.4.9)
1. Execute and confirm [#TEST]->[SENSOR TEST]->
[X-ORG].
2. Check the connection of connector of the X-origin
Sensor.
3. Replace the X-origin Sensor with a new one.
4. Check the assembly and connector connection of Xaxis Motor.。.
5. Replace the X-axis Motor with a new one.
(Refer to 6.3.1)
6. Replace the Main PCB with a new one. (Refer to 3.3.1)
7.1.2
R.2.0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
P.4
Maintenance Manual > Troubleshooting > Details on Errors and Malfunctions > List of Error Messages
Model UJF-3042/FX Issued 2010.08.27 Revised 2011.09.30 F/W ver 1.80 / 1.00 Remark
Rev.
7.1.2 List of Error Messages
2.0
 List of Error Messages (5/9)
No.
LCD
ERROR 511
Z ORIGIN
38
ERROR 601
INK NEAREND
39
ERROR 602
INK END
40
ERROR 603
NO CARTRDG
41
Cause
Z-origin error
(Origin of Z-axis can not be detected)
List of Countermeasures
1. Execute and confirm [#TEST]->[SENSOR TEST]->
[TBL-ORG].
2. Check the connection of connector of the Z-origin
Sensor.
3. Replace the Z-origin Sensor with a new one.
4. Disconnect and connect the connector of the ZMotor(Stepping motor).
5. Replace the Station III PCB with a new one.
(Refer to 6.4.4)
Ink near end (A small amount of ink left) (When the message is still displayed even after a new Ink
Cartridge or an empty Ink Cartridge is charged;)
1. Execute and confirm [#TEST]->[SENSOR TEST]->
[INK NEND1](The number meets the cartridge No.).
2. Check the peripheral and the assembly of the End
Sensor.
3. Check the connection of the Presence Sensor and the
Near End Sensor.
4. Replace the Cartridge with a new one
5. Replace the Presence/Near End Sensor with a new
one.
6. Replace the SL-Relay PCB with a new one.
(Refer to 3.3.2)
7. Replace the Main PCB with a new one. (Refer to 3.3.1)
Ink end (No ink left)
(If this message appears when a new cartridge or a
cartridge with enough ink is set)
1. Execute and confirm [#TEST]->[SENSOR TEST]->
[INK NEND1](The number meets the cartridge No.).
2. Check the peripheral and the assembly of the End
Sensor.
3. Check the connection of the Presence Sensor and the
End Sensor.
4. Replace the Cartridge with a new one.
5. Replace the Presence / Near End Sensor with a new
one.
6. Replace the SL-Relay PCB with a new one.
(Refer to 3.3.2)
7. Replace the Main PCB with a new one. (Refer to 3.3.1)
No cartridge (Cartridge is not installed)
(When the message is still displayed even after a Ink
Cartridge is charged;)
1. Execute and confirm [#TEST]->[SENSOR TEST]->
[INK1](The number meets the cartridge No.)..
2. Check the peripheral and the assembly of the Presence
Sensor.
3. Check the connection of the Presence Sensor and the
End Sensor
4. .Replace the Cartridge with a new one
5. Replace the Presence/Near End Sensor with a new
one.
6. Replace the SL-Relay PCB with a new one.
(Refer to 3.3.2)
7. Replace the Main PCB with a new one. (Refer to 3.3.1)
© 2013 MIMAKI ENGINEERING CO.,LTD.
7.1.2
R.2.0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
P.5
Maintenance Manual > Troubleshooting > Details on Errors and Malfunctions > List of Error Messages
Model UJF-3042/FX Issued 2010.08.27 Revised 2011.09.30 F/W ver 1.80 / 1.00 Remark
Rev.
7.1.2 List of Error Messages
2.0
 List of Error Messages (6/9)
No.
LCD
ERROR 605
!CLEANING WIPER
42
ERROR 606
WRONG CARTRIDGE
43
ERROR 607
CAP CLEANING
44
ERROR 608
CARTRIDGE
45
ERROR 60b
WIPER BOTTLE
46
Cause
List of Countermeasures
Wiper lifetime
1. Execute [FUNCTION MAINTENANCE](Wiping times exceeding the specified
>[STATION]->[MENT:WIPER CLEANING] to clean
number.)
the wiper.
2. Replace the Main PCB with a new one. (Refer to 3.3.1)
1),Wiping times
(Ink parameter 1 No45 WipeCnt)
Wiping time is cleared when the
following is executed:
[FUNCTION MAINTENANCE]>[STATION]->[MENT:WIPER
EXCHG]
2),Specified number :Wiper life
(Ink parameter 2 No58 WIPElmt) x
Wiper replacement level
The IC chip of the ink cartridge is not read (If this message appears when a correct cartridge is set)
properly.
1. Check the assembly of the ID Contact PCB and the
shape of the contact plate, and execute the cleaning.
2. Check the connection of the ID Contact PCB.
3. Replace the Cartridge with a new one
4. Replace the ID Contact PCB Assy. with a new one.
(Refer to 3.3.3)
5. Replace the SL-Relay PCB with a new one.
(Refer to 3.3.2)
Warning for cleaning around the cap
1. Clean the cap.
(A specified number of flushing on the
cap exceeded.)
(If this message appears after cleaning the cap)
2. Replace the Main PCB with a new one. (Refer to 3.3.1)
1),Capcleaning counter
(Ink parameter 1 No04 CapClean)
Counter is cleared when the following
is executed:
[FUNCTION MAINTENANCE]>[STATION]->[MENT:CARRIAGE
OUT]
2),Specified number of the Capcleaning :
warning level
100x2^(Ink parameter 2 No.66
Cap.LM -1)
Ink is tried to fill with unusable cartridge 1. Check the type of the ink cartridge.
installed.
Execute the followings if the type of the ink cartridge is
correct.
2. Check the assembly of the ID Contact PCB and the
shape of the contact plate, and execute the cleaning.
3. Check the connection of the ID Contact PCB.
4. Replace the Cartridge with a new one
5. Replace the ID Contact PCB Assy. with a new one.
(Refer to 3.3.3)
6. Replace the SL-Relay PCB with a new one.
(Refer to 3.3.2)
Wiper bottle warning
1. Select [FUNCTION MAINTENANCE]->[STATION]>[MENT:WIPER BOTTLE] and dispose of ink in the
A great deal of ink is in the Wiper Bottle.
Wiper Bottle.
Displayed when the Wiper Nozzle
Suction Pump exceeds the 2,500 times
[Fixed].
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Wiper Pump suction times:
Ink parameter 1 No47 [Wipe Pump ]
© 2013 MIMAKI ENGINEERING CO.,LTD.
7.1.2
R.2.0
P.6
Maintenance Manual > Troubleshooting > Details on Errors and Malfunctions > List of Error Messages
Model UJF-3042/FX Issued 2010.08.27 Revised 2011.09.30 F/W ver 1.80 / 1.00 Remark
Rev.
7.1.2 List of Error Messages
2.0
 List of Error Messages (7/9)
No.
LCD
ERROR 60c
Cause
List of Countermeasures
Type of inserted Ink Cartridge is different. 1. Check the type of the ink cartridge.
INK TYPE
47
48
49
ERROR 60d
REMAIN INK
ERROR 60e
NOT COMPLETE FUP
ERROR 60f
Expiration
Remaining ink is not enough to execute
cleaning or to fill ink.
Ink is not filled into some heads.
Fill ink into unfilled heads.
Some ink cartridges are expired.
Ink is not filled into all the heads.
1. Check the expiration date of the ink.
(If this message appears when a correct cartridge is set)
2. Check the assembly of the ID Contact PCB and the
shape of the contact plate, and execute the cleaning.
3. Check the connection of the ID Contact PCB.
4. Replace the Cartridge with a new one.
5. Replace the ID Contact PCB Assy. with a new one.
(Refer to 3.3.3)
6. Replace the SL-Relay PCB with a new one.
(Refer to 3.3.2)
Fill ink to all the heads.
"CASE WEIGHT" of 600ml cartridge is not
set.
Set "CASE WEIGHT" for "600ml CARTRIDGE" of
"MACHINE SET".
Remaining amount of ink became less.
Enter the cartridge weight from "CART WEIGHT" menu of
"SET UP".
Remaining amount of ink became none.
 If ink remains, enter the cartridge weight from "CART
WEIGHT" menu of "SET UP".
 If ink does not remain, replace it with a new cartridge.
1. Pull the cartridge out and then insert it to write it again.
2. If the error cannot be solved, replace it with a new cartridge.
Enter the cartridge weight.
50
51
52
53
54
ERROR 610
NOT FILLUP
ERROR 611
Case Weight
ERROR 612
INK LVL LOW
ERROR 613
INK LVL END
ERROR 614
Preservation Failure
ERROR 615
56
Cartridge Weight
ERROR 702
57
THERMISTOR
ERROR 705
WATER LACK
55
58
Execute the followings if the type of the ink cartridge is
correct.
2. Check the assembly of the ID Contact PCB and the
shape of the contact plate, and execute the cleaning.
3. Check the connection of the ID Contact PCB.
4. Replace the Cartridge with a new one
5. Replace the ID Contact PCB Assy. with a new one.
(Refer to 3.3.3)
6. Replace the SL-Relay PCB with a new one.
(Refer to 3.3.2)
Replace the Cartridge with a new one
Remaining amount of ink was failed to be
written.
The cartridge weight was not entered.
Defective of the thermistor (disconnection 1. Check each thermistor.
or short)
2. Replace the Main PCB with a new one. (Refer to 3.3.1)
Water in the cooling water buffer tank is
1. Check amount of water in the cooling water buffer
low.
tank, and replace the Nonfreezing fluid mixture water
if lacking.
2. If water decreases quickly, check water leakage from
the cooling water path (a tube or a radiator).
• Execute [#TEST SENSOR TEST]->[CoolFloat] to
check the sensor operation.
3. Check the assembly of the Float Sensor and the
connector connection.
4. Replace the Float Sensor and the Cable with a new
one.
5. Replace the SL-Relay PCB with a new one.
(Refer to 3.3.2)
© 2013 MIMAKI ENGINEERING CO.,LTD.
7.1.2
R.2.0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
P.7
Maintenance Manual > Troubleshooting > Details on Errors and Malfunctions > List of Error Messages
Model UJF-3042/FX Issued 2010.08.27 Revised 2011.09.30 F/W ver 1.80 / 1.00 Remark
Rev.
7.1.2 List of Error Messages
2.0
 List of Error Messages (8/9)
No.
LCD
ERROR 706
UV UNIT OVER HEAT
59
60
ERROR 707
!HD HEATER BRK
ERROR 708
UV THERMISTOR BRK
61
62
ERROR 70a
LED UV CURRENT
ERROR 901
OPERATION
63
ERROR 902
DATA REMAIN
64
65
ERROR 90d
NO HEAD SELECT
Cause
Temperature in the UV unit is above its
specification.
List of Countermeasures
1. Check connection and operation of the radiator fan and
the UV unit fan.
2. Check the operation of the water cooling pump.
3. Check water level of the cooling water buffer tank and
a path of the cooling water.
4. Check the connection of connector of the LED UV
UNIT Assy and the Slider PCB.
5. Replace the LED UV UNIT Assy with a new one.
(Refer to 6.7.1)
6. Replace the Slider PCB with a new one. (Refer to
6.4.5)
7. Replace the SL-Relay PCB with a new one.
(Refer to 3.3.2)
Is the heater of the head disconnected?
1. Check the room temperature is not too low.
2. Replace the Print Head with a new one. (Refer to 3.1.1)
(The temperature does not rise after
heating for over a certain period of time.) 3. Replace the Slider PCB with a new one. (Refer to
6.4.5)
The thermistor in the UV unit
1. Check the connection of connector of the LED UV
(Temperature sensor) is disconnected.
UNIT Assy and the Slider PCB.
2. Replace the LED UV UNIT Assy with a new one.
(Refer to 6.7.1)
3. Replace the Slider PCB with a new one. (Refer to
6.4.5)
The LED UV unit has been broken.
1. Replace the LEDUVx2-DRIVE PDB Assy with a new
one. (Refer to 6.7.1)
Or, the detected current is abnormal.
2. Replace the LEDUV Irradiation Assy with a new one.
(Refer to 6.7.1)
Explain a user the operation method.
The operation panel is incorrectly
(Carry out the followings if the error still occurs)
operated.
1. Execute and confirm [#TEST]->[KEYBOARD].
(Example: Test drawing was executed
(Check that there is no hang-up nor subduction on Key
without ink filled.)
Tops at the same time.)
2. Disconnect and connect the FFC located between the
Keyboard PCB and the Main PCB.
3. Replace the Keyboard FFC
(Keyboard PCB ~ the Main PCB).
4. Replace the Keyboard PCB with a new one.
(Refer to 6.4.8)
5. Replace the Main PCB with a new one. (Refer to 3.3.1)
Drawing data is remaining.
(Carry out the followings if the error still occurs when
data is cleared.)
1. Check errors in the parameter.
2. Remove USB cable from the printer and execute data
clear. -> If solved, it is a problem on USB cable or PC.
3. Replace the USB Cable with a new one.
4. Replace the Main PCB with a new one. (Refer to 3.3.1)
Loaded number of the head is assumed
Check the setting of loading number of the head in the
zero.
parameter.
(System parameter No.41 HEAD NO=3)
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
© 2013 MIMAKI ENGINEERING CO.,LTD.
7.1.2
R.2.0
P.8
Maintenance Manual > Troubleshooting > Details on Errors and Malfunctions > List of Error Messages
Model UJF-3042/FX Issued 2010.08.27 Revised 2011.09.30 F/W ver 1.80 / 1.00 Remark
Rev.
7.1.2 List of Error Messages
2.0
 List of Error Messages (9/9)
No.
LCD
ERROR 04
PARAM ROM
Cause
List of Countermeasures
Access Error of the PARAMETER ROM (If “PCB SLRY” is displayed for a few seconds while a
1.The state that cannot access “ROM” version is displayed at startup before displaying errors)
1. Disconnect and connect the FFC located between the
on the SL-Relay PCB.
SL-Relay PCB and the Main PCB.
2.The state that cannot access
2.
Disconnect
and connect the FFC located between the
“EEPROM” on the HEAD2.
Slider PCB and the SL-Relay PCB.
3. Replace the FFC located between the SL-Relay PCB
and the Main PCB.
4. Replace the FFC located between the Slider PCB and
the SL-Relay PCB.
66
5. Replace the SL-Relay PCB.
1
2
6. Replace the Slider PCB.
7. Replace the Main PCB.
( If "Area:_H__" is displayed on the second line without
"PCB SLRY" displayed at startup by pressing [FUNC]
key while an error is displayed.)
1. Disconnect and connect the FFC of the HEAD2.
2. Replace the Slider PCB.
3
3. Replace the HEAD2.
 Details of ERROR 12e Head Failed [xxxx]
4
 The relationships between [xxxx] (hexadecimal numeral) bit No. and the error contents are as below:
bit
bit0
Hexadecimal
Reason for error occurrence
numeral indication
Abnormal detection status of head signal (MN signal)
[0001]
(Slider PCB)
Cause for occurrence
5
1. Failure of head
2. Failure of Slider PCB
bit1
[0002]
COM-OFF signal output status
(Slider PCB)
1. FFC breakage between SL-Relay PCB and
Slider PCB
2. Failure of head
3. Failure of Slider PCB
bit2
[0004]
35V-1 Power supply voltage drop detection
(Slider PCB)
1. FFC breakage between SL-Relay PCB and
Slider PCB
2. Failure of Slider PCB
3. Failure of SL-Relay PCB
bit3
[0008]
Driving wave shape circuit Current limit over
(SL-Relay PCB)
bit4
[0010]
bit5
bit6
COM-OFF signal input status
(SL-Relay PCB)
1. Failure of SL-Relay PCB
(F2 blowout, COM circuit failure, etc.)
2. Failure of Slider PCB
3. Failure of head
However, when bit6 or bit7 is “1” and an error
([3F88] or [3FC8] etc.) has occurred at startup,
that error cause has priority.
1. FFC breakage between SL-Relay PCB and
Slider PCB
2. Failure of head
3. Failure of Slider PCB
6
7
8
Not Use
[0040]
37V of SL-Relay PCB is not normal.
(Displayed only at startup.)
© 2013 MIMAKI ENGINEERING CO.,LTD.
1. Failure of SL-Relay PCB
7.1.2
R.2.0
P.9
Maintenance Manual > Troubleshooting > Details on Errors and Malfunctions > List of Error Messages
Model UJF-3042/FX Issued 2010.08.27 Revised 2011.09.30 F/W ver 1.80 / 1.00 Remark
Rev.
7.1.2 List of Error Messages
bit
bit7
bit8
Hexadecimal
Reason for error occurrence
numeral indication
[0080]
37V voltage of the Slider PCB does not come.
(displayed only at startup)
[0100]
Wave shape driver circuit for head 1 Short check NG
bit9
[0200]
Wave shape driver circuit for head 2 Short check NG
bit10
[0400]
Wave shape driver circuit for head 3 Short check NG
bit11
[0800]
Wave shape driver circuit for head 4 Short check NG
bit12
[1000]
Wave shape driver circuit for head 5 Short check NG
bit13
[2000]
Wave shape driver circuit for head 6 Short check NG
bit14
[4000]
bit15
[8000]
2.0
Cause for occurrence
1. F2 blowout of the SL-Relay PCB.
2. FFC breakage between SL-Relay PCB and
Slider PCB
3. Failure of Slider PCB
4. Failure of SL-Relay PCB
1. FFC breakage between SL-Relay PCB and
Slider PCB
2. Failure of Slider PCB
3. Failure of SL-Relay PCB
4. Failure of head
*)If 37V power supply route also has a problem,
an error may occur.
Wave shape driver circuit for head 7 Short check NG Refer to bit6 and bit7 error.
Wave shape driver circuit for head 8 Short check NG
Error display example)
If the F2 fuse of the slider PCB has been blown, "Head Failed [3F88]" is displayed at startup, and then "Head
Failed [0008]" is also displayed.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
© 2013 MIMAKI ENGINEERING CO.,LTD.
7.1.2
R.2.0 P.10
Maintenance Manual > Troubleshooting > Details on Errors and Malfunctions > List of Warning Messages
Model UJF-3042/FX Issued 2010.08.27 Revised 2011.09.30 F/W ver 1.80 / 1.00 Remark
7.1.3 List of Warning Messages
Rev.
2.0
 List of Warning Messages (1/2)
No.
Message
1 <LOCAL> NO CARTRDG
Cause
Corrective Measures
No cartridge (Cartridge is not (When the message is still displayed even after a Ink Cartridge is
charged;)
installed)
MCYKWR
1. Execute and confirm [#TEST]->[SENSOR TEST]->
[INK1](The number meets the cartridge No.).
2. Check the peripheral and the assembly of the Presence Sensor.
3. Check the connection of the Presence Sensor and the End Sensor
4. .Replace the Cartridge with a new one
5. Replace the Presence/Near End Sensor with a new one.
6. Replace the SL-Relay PCB with a new one.
(Refer to 3.3.2)
7. Replace the Main PCB with a new one. (Refer to 3.3.1)
2 <LOCAL> INK NEAREND Ink near end (A small amount (When the message is still displayed even after a new Ink Cartridge or an
empty Ink Cartridge is charged;)
of ink left)
MCYKWR
1. Execute and confirm [#TEST]->[SENSOR TEST]->
[INK NEND1](The number meets the cartridge No.).
2. Check the peripheral and the assembly of the End Sensor.
3. Check the connection of the Presence Sensor and the Near End
Sensor.
4. Replace the Cartridge with a new one
5. Replace the Presence/Near End Sensor with a new one.
6. Replace the SL-Relay PCB with a new one.
(Refer to 3.3.2)
7. Replace the Main PCB with a new one. (Refer to 3.3.1)
3 <LOCAL> INK END
Ink end (No ink left)
(If this message appears when a new cartridge or a cartridge with
enough ink is set)
MCYKWR
1. Execute and confirm [#TEST]->[SENSOR TEST]->
[INK NEND1](The number meets the cartridge No.).
2. Check the peripheral and the assembly of the End Sensor.
3. Check the connection of the Presence Sensor and the End Sensor.
4. Replace the Cartridge with a new one.
5. Replace the Presence / Near End Sensor with a new one.
6. Replace the SL-Relay PCB with a new one.
(Refer to 3.3.2)
7. Replace the Main PCB with a new one. (Refer to 3.3.1)
4 <LOCAL> Expiration Some ink cartridges are
1. 1. Check the expiration date of the ink.
expired.
MCYKWR
(If this message appears when a correct cartridge is set)
2. Check the assembly of the ID Contact PCB and the shape of the
contact plate, and execute the cleaning.
3. Check the connection of the ID Contact PCB.
4. Replace the Cartridge with a new one.
5. Replace the ID Contact PCB Assy. with a new one. (Refer to 3.3.3)
6. Replace the SL-Relay PCB with a new one.
(Refer to 3.3.2)
5 <LOCAL> INK TYPE
Type of inserted Ink Cartridge 1. Check the type of the ink cartridge.
is different.
MCYKWR
Execute the followings if the type of the ink cartridge is correct.
6 <LOCAL> ColorofINK The color of Ink Cartridge
2. Check the assembly of the ID Contact PCB and the shape of the
inserted is different from the
MCYKWR
contact plate, and execute the cleaning.
color to be set.
3.
Check
the connection of the ID Contact PCB.
7 <LOCAL> NON-ORIGNL Non-MIMAKI genuine Ink
4.
Replace
the Cartridge with a new one
Cartridge charged
MCYKWR
5. Replace the ID Contact PCB Assy. with a new one. (Refer to 3.3.3)
8 <LOCAL> WRONG INK IC IC chip of Ink Cartridge
6. Replace the SL-Relay PCB with a new one.
unreadable properly
MCYKWR
(Refer to 3.3.2)
© 2013 MIMAKI ENGINEERING CO.,LTD.
7.1.3
R.2.0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
P.1
Maintenance Manual > Troubleshooting > Details on Errors and Malfunctions > List of Warning Messages
Model UJF-3042/FX Issued 2010.08.27 Revised 2011.09.30 F/W ver 1.80 / 1.00 Remark
Rev.
7.1.3 List of Warning Messages
2.0
 List of Warning Messages (2/2)
No.
Message
9 <LOCAL>
!WORK High
10 <LOCAL>
WATER LACK
11 <LOCAL>
!WS INKTANK CHK
12 <LOCAL>
WIPER BOTTLE
13 <LOCAL>
CLEANING WIPER
14 <LOCAL>
!CHECK FILTER
15 <LOCAL>
CAP CLEANING
16 <LOCAL>
Case Weight
17 <LOCAL>
INK LVL LOW
18 <LOCAL>
INK LVL END
19 <LOCAL>
!CHECK LED UV LEVEL
20 <LOCAL>
Preservation Failure
21 <LOCAL>
Cartridge Weight
Cause
The Work Area Sensor
detected an obstacle that can
hit the head.
Water in the cooling water
buffer tank is low.
Corrective Measures
Lower the table until this warning disappears.
If this warning does not disappear when the table is lowered to the
bottom.
1. Execute and confirm [#TEST]->[SENSOR TEST] ->[HEIGHTSES].
2. Readjust the Work Area Sensor.
3. Readjust the height of the carriage.
4. Check the Connectors of Work Area Sensor connected on the PCB
5. Replace the Work Area Sensor with a new one.
6. Replace the SL-Relay PCB with a new one.
(Refer to 3.3.2)
7. Replace the Pump 3 PCB with a new one.
(Refer to 6.4.6)
1. Check amount of water in the cooling water buffer tank, and replace
the Nonfreezing fluid mixture water if lacking.
2. If water decreases quickly, check water leakage from the cooling
water path (a tube or a radiator).
•Execute [#TEST SENSOR TEST]->[CoolFloat] to check the sensor
operation.
3. Check the assembly of the Float Sensor and the connector
connection.
4. Replace the Float Sensor and the Cable with a new one.
5. Replace the SL-Relay PCB with a new one.
(Refer to 3.3.2)
A great deal of ink is in the
Wast ink tank
1. Check the Wast ink tank.
A great deal of ink is in the
Wiper Bottle.
1. Check the Wiper Bottle.
Wiping times exceeding the
specified number.
A filter may be stained.
1. Check the filter.
The remaining amount of ink
became less.
1. Execute [FUNCTION MAINTENANCE]->[STATION]>[MENT:CHECK FILTER] to replace the filter..
1. Execute [STATION] -> [MENT: CARRIAGE OUT] to clean the cap.
1. Set [CASE WEIGHT] from [MACHINE SET] -> [600ml CARTRIDGE].
The cartridge weight was not
entered.
© 2013 MIMAKI ENGINEERING CO.,LTD.
3
4
5
6
7
1. Enter the cartridge weight from [CART WEIGHT] menu of [SET UP].
Remaining amount of ink became  If ink remains, enter the cartridge weight from "CART WEIGHT" menu of
none.
"SET UP".
• If ink does not remain, replace it with a new cartridge.
1. Check the illuminance of the LED UV lamp. If it is less than the specified
value, replace the lamp.
Remaining amount of ink was
failed to be written.
2
2. Select [FUNCTION MAINTENANCE]->[STATION]>[MENT:WASTE TANK] and dispose of ink in the Wast ink tank.
2. Select [FUNCTION MAINTENANCE]->[STATION]>[MENT:WIPER BOTTLE] and dispose of ink in the Wiper Bottle.
1. Execute [FUNCTION MAINTENANCE]->[STATION]>[MENT:WIPER CLEANING] to clean the wiper.
Warning for cleaning around cap
(Flushing times on the cap
exceeded the specified
number.)
[CASE WEIGHT] of 600ml
CARTRIDGE was not set.
1
8
1. Pull the cartridge out and then insert it to write it again.
2. If the error cannot be solved, replace it with a new cartridge.
1. Enter the cartridge weight.
7.1.3
R.2.0
P.2
Maintenance Manual > Troubleshooting > Details on Errors and Malfunctions > List of SYSTEM HALT
Model UJF-3042/FX Issued 2010.08.27 Revised 2011.09.30 F/W ver 1.80 / 1.00 Remark
Rev.
7.1.4 List of SYSTEM HALT
2.0
 List of SYSTEM HALT (1/7)
No.
LCD
SYSTEM HALT (*)
1 104 : +35V RECVR
2
SYSTEM HALT (*)
10e :FROM CLEAR
SYSTEM HALT (*)
10f : FROM WRITE
3
SYSTEM HALT (*)
110 : PCB KEY
4
SYSTEM HALT (*)
114 : PCB PUMP
5
SYSTEM HALT (*)
115 : PCB MAIN-F1
SYSTEM HALT (*)
7
116 : PCB MAIN-F2
SYSTEM HALT (*)
8
117 : PCB MAIN-F3
SYSTEM HALT (*)
12d : PCB MAIN-F4
6
Cause
35 V Power recovery error
Corrective Measures
1. Replace the Power Supply PCB with a new one. (Refer
to 6.4.1)
2. Replace the Main PCB with a new one. (Refer to 3.3.1)
F-ROM CLEAR error (F-ROM clear unable) 1. Execute the memory check (F-ROM) of [#TEST].
F-ROM is not clearable on Parameter
2. Upload the parameter and initialize all parameters with
writing, FW down loading and Log clearing.
[#PARAMETER].
(fls_secclr)
3. Replace the Main PCB with a new one. (Refer to 3.3.1)
FROM WRITE error (F-ROM writing
1. Execute the memory check (F-ROM) of [#TEST].
unable)
2. Upload the parameter and initialize all parameters with
[#PARAMETER].
F-ROM is not clearable on Parameter
writing, FW down loading and Log clearing. 3. Replace the Main PCB with a new one. (Refer to 3.3.1)
(fls_secclr)
No Keyboard PCB
1. Check the connections between the Keyboard PCB and
the Main PCB and then disconnect and connect the
FFCs.
2. Replace the FFCs of the above routes.
3. Replace the Keyboard PCB with a new one.
4. Replace the Main PCB with a new one. (Refer to 3.3.1)
No Pump III PCB
1. Check the connections between the Pump PCB and the
Main PCB, and then disconnect and connect the FFCs .
2. Replace the FFCs of the above routes.
3. Replace the Pump III PCB with a new one.
(Refer to 6.4.6)
4. Replace the Main PCB with a new one. (Refer to 3.3.1)
5. Replace the SL-Relay PCB with a new one.
(Refer to 3.3.2)
Main PCB fuse (F1) disconnected.
Replace the Main PCB with a new one. (Refer to 3.3.1)
Main PCB fuse (F2) disconnected.
Main PCB fuse (F3) disconnected.
.
Main PCB fuse (F4) disconnected.
(If shorted out, replace also the SL-Relay PCB.)
3. Check the connections between the SL-Relay PCB
and the Slider PCB and then disconnect and connect
the FFCs or the like.
4. Check short between 1 pin and 16 pin, and between 3
pin and 16 pin of CN1 of the Slider PCB.
9
SYSTEM HALT (*)
10
13e : PCB STATION-F1
SYSTEM HALT (*)
11
13f : PCB STATION-F2
SYSTEM HALT (*)
12
140 : PCB STATION-F3
SYSTEM HALT (*)
147 : DS-IC BUSY
Station PCB fuse (F1) disconnected.
SYSTEM HALT (*)
159 : PCB SLDR-F1
(If shorted out, replace also the Slider PCB.)
1. Replace the Station III PCB with a new one. (Refer to
6.4.4)
Station PCB fuse (F2) disconnected.
2
3
4
5
6
7
Station PCB fuse (F3) disconnected.
DALLAS IC BUSY error
13
14
Before Main PCB replace, do the following checks.
1. Check the connections between the SL-Relay PCB
and the Main PCB, and then disconnect and connect
the FFCs or the like.
2. Check short between 1 pin and 12 pin, and between 3
pin and 12 pin of CN6 of the SL-Relay PCB.
1
Slider PCB fuse (F1) disconnected
© 2013 MIMAKI ENGINEERING CO.,LTD.
1. Check connection of the ID Contact PCB connection
cable and damage of the cable.
2. Try to use a different cartridge.
3. Replace the ID Contact PCB Assy. with a new one.
(Refer to 3.3.3)
4. Replace the SL-Relay PCB with a new one.
(Refer to 3.3.2)
1. Replace the Slider PCB with a new one. (Refer to
6.4.5)
7.1.4
R.2.0
8
P.1
Maintenance Manual > Troubleshooting > Details on Errors and Malfunctions > List of SYSTEM HALT
Model UJF-3042/FX Issued 2010.08.27 Revised 2011.09.30 F/W ver 1.80 / 1.00 Remark
Rev.
7.1.4 List of SYSTEM HALT
2.0
 List of SYSTEM HALT (2/7)
No.
LCD
SYSTEM HALT (*)
15a : PCB STA3
Cause
No Station III PCB
15
SYSTEM HALT (*)
15a : MAIN FPC-1
30pinFPC1 of Main PCB connect error
16
17
SYSTEM HALT (*)
160 : PCB MAIN-F5
SYSTEM HALT (*)
161 : PCB MAIN-F6
Main PCB fuse (F5) disconnected.
Main PCB fuse (F6) disconnected.
18
SYSTEM HALT (*)
19
11d : PCB SLRY-F1
SYSTEM HALT (*)
13c : PCB SLRY-F2
SL-Relay PCB fuse (F1) disconnected.
SL-Relay PCB fuse (F2) disconnected.
20
21
SYSTEM HALT (*)
13d : PCB SLRY-F3
SYSTEM HALT (*)
149 : PCB SLRY-F4
SL-Relay PCB fuse (F3) disconnected.
SL-Relay PCB fuse (F4) disconnected.
22
SYSTEM HALT (*)
23
10b : PCB SLRY-F3
SYSTEM HALT (*)
11e : PCB SLRY-F4
Initialization error of the SL-Relay PCB
(FPGA)
No SL-Relay PCB.
24
© 2013 MIMAKI ENGINEERING CO.,LTD.
Corrective Measures
1. Check the connections between the Station III PCB
and the Main PCB, and then disconnect and connect
the FFCs.
2. Replace the FFCs of the above routes.
3. Replace the Station III PCB with a new one. (Refer to
6.4.4)
4. Replace the Main PCB with a new one. (Refer to 3.3.1)
1. Check the connections between the SL-Relay PCB and
the Main PCB, and then disconnect and connect the
FFCs.
2. Replace the FFCs of the above routes.
3. Replace the SL-Relay PCB with a new one.
(Refer to 3.3.2)
4. Replace the Main PCB with a new one. (Refer to 3.3.1)
Replace the Main PCB with a new one. (Refer to 3.3.1)
Before Main PCB replace, do the following checks.
1. Check the connections between the Station III PCB
and the Main PCB, and then disconnect and connect
the FFCs.
2. Check short between 1 pin and 4 pin of CN1, and
between 1 pin and 9 pin of CN11 of the Station III
PCB.
1
2
3
(If shorted out, replace also the Station III PCB.)
Replace the SL-Relay PCB with a new one.
(Refer to 3.3.2)
4
Before SL-Relay PCB replace, do the following checks.
1. Check the connections between the Slider PCB and the
SL-Relay PCB, and then disconnect and connect the
FFCs.
2. Check short between 1 pin and 4 pin of CN1, and
between 1 pin and 9 pin of CN11 of the Slider PCB.
5
(If shorted out, replace also the Slider PCB.)
Replace the SL-Relay PCB with a new one.
(Refer to 3.3.2)
Before SL-Relay PCB replace, do the following checks.
1. Check the connections between the Pump III PCB and
the SL-Relay PCB, and then disconnect and connect
the FFCs.
2. Check short between 1 pin and 4 pin of CN1, and
between 1 pin and 9 pin of CN6 of the Pump III PCB.
(If shorted out, replace also the Pump III PCB.)
1. Check the connections between the SL-Relay PCB and
the Main PCB, and then disconnect and connect the
FFCs or the like.
2. Replace the FFCs of the above routes.
3. Replace the SL-Relay PCB with a new one.
(Refer to 3.3.2)
4. Replace the Main PCB with a new one. (Refer to 3.3.1)
7.1.4
R.2.0
6
7
8
P.2
Maintenance Manual > Troubleshooting > Details on Errors and Malfunctions > List of SYSTEM HALT
Model UJF-3042/FX Issued 2010.08.27 Revised 2011.09.30 F/W ver 1.80 / 1.00 Remark
Rev.
7.1.4 List of SYSTEM HALT
2.0
 List of SYSTEM HALT (3/7)
No.
LCD
SYSTEM HALT (*)
25
11f : PCB SLIDER
SYSTEM HALT (*)
10a : HDC INIT
Cause
No Slider PCB.
Initialization error of the Slider PCB
(FPGA)
26
SYSTEM HALT (*)
120 : LCD THERM.
LCD thermistor IC RW error
27
SYSTEM HALT (*)
122 : PRAM NONE
SYSTEM HALT (*)
29
123 : PRAM DATA
SYSTEM HALT (*)
30
124 : PRAM ADDR
SYSTEM HALT (*)
31
125 : EEPROM READ
SYSTEM HALT (*)
126 : EEPROM WR
28
No PRAM
1
2
3
PRAM data error
4
PRAM address error
EEPROM read trouble
EEPROM write trouble
32
SYSTEM HALT (*)
127 : POWER OFF
Corrective Measures
1. Check the connections between the SL-Relay PCB and
the Slider PCB, and then disconnect and connect the
FFCs or the like.
2. Check the connections between the SL-Relay PCB and
the Main PCB, and then disconnect and connect the
FFCs or the like.
3. Replace the FFCs and the cabeles of the above routes.
4. Replace the Slider PCB with a new one. (Refer to
6.4.5)
5. Replace the SL-Relay PCB with a new one.
(Refer to 3.3.2)
6. Replace the Main PCB with a new one. (Refer to 3.3.1)
1. Check the connections between the Keyboard PCB and
the Main PCB, and then disconnect and connect the
FFCs.
2. Replace the FFCs and the cabeles of the above routes.
3. Replace the Keyboard PCB with a new one.
4. Replace the Main PCB with a new one. (Refer to 3.3.1)
5. Replace the Power Supply PCB with a new one.
(Refer to 6.4.1)
1. Update F/W.
2. Replace the Main PCB with a new one. (Refer to 3.3.1)
Power OFF detection error (Not to OFF)
Power OFF process is conducted in the
Power ON/OFF control without pushing
down the sub-power SW.
33
© 2013 MIMAKI ENGINEERING CO.,LTD.
1. Update F/W.
2. Upload the parameter and initialize parameter with
#PARAMETER.
3. Check the connection state between Main PCB ~ SLRelay PCB.
4. Replace the Main PCB with a new one. (Refer to 3.3.1)
5. Replace the SL-Relay PCB with a new one.
(Refer to 3.3.2)
1. Check the connection state between sub-power SW and
Keyboard PCB.
2. Check the connections between the Keyboard PCB and
the Main PCB, and then disconnect and connect the
FFCs.
3. Check the connector connection of Power Supply PCB.
4. Check if there is no error on the power path from the
AC Inlet.
5. Replace the Power Supply PCB with a new one.
((Refer to 6.4.1) )
6. Replace the Keyboard PCB with a new one.
7. Replace the Main PCB with a new one. (Refer to 3.3.1)
8. Replace the Station III PCB with a new one. (Refer to
6.4.4)
9. Replace the SL-Relay PCB with a new one.
(Refer to 3.3.2)
10. Replace the Slider PCB with a new one. (Refer to
6.4.5)
7.1.4
R.2.0
5
6
7
8
P.3
Maintenance Manual > Troubleshooting > Details on Errors and Malfunctions > List of SYSTEM HALT
Model UJF-3042/FX Issued 2010.08.27 Revised 2011.09.30 F/W ver 1.80 / 1.00 Remark
Rev.
7.1.4 List of SYSTEM HALT
2.0
 List of SYSTEM HALT (4/7)
No.
LCD
SYSTEM HALT (*)
170 : PCB UVLEDDRV
Cause
No Driver PCB of LED UV UNIT?
34
35
SYSTEM HALT (*)
303 : PCB MAIN ET
SYSTEM HALT (*)
406 : WIPER ORG
Main PCB Ethernet IC trouble
Wiper origin undetectable
36
37
SYSTEM HALT (*)
40b : UN MAGNETIC
DC motor is driving without excited
SYSTEM HALT (*)
502 : Y ORGIN
Y Origin Sensor error
38
© 2013 MIMAKI ENGINEERING CO.,LTD.
Corrective Measures
1. Check the connections between the Slider PCB and
the LED UV Unit, and then disconnect and connect
the cables.
2. Replace the FFC and the cabele located between the
Slider PCB and the SL-Relay PCB.
3. Replace the cabele located between the Slider PCB
and the LED UV Unit.
4. Replace the SL-Relay PCB with a new one.
(Refer to 3.3.2)
5. Replace the LED UV UNIT Assy with a new one.
(Refer to 6.7.1)
1. Replace the Main PCB with a new one. (Refer to 3.3.1)
1. Execute and confirm [#TEST]->[SENSOR TEST] ->
[WIPER-ORG]. (Confirm that the ON/OFF display is
switched by moving the wiper back and forth.)
2. Check that the wiper moves back and forth smoothly in
manual.
3. Check the assembly and connector connection of Wiper
Origin Sensor.
4. Check the connector connection of Y-origin Sensor
5. Check the connections between the Pump III PCB and
the SL-Relay PCB, and then disconnect and connect
the FFCs.
6. Replace the Wiper Back/Forth Origin Sensor with a
new one.
7. Replace the Wiper Motor with a new one.
8. Replace the FFC located between the Pump III PCB
and the SL-Relay PCB.
9. Replace the Pump III PCB with a new one.
(Refer to 6.4.6)
10. Replace the SL-Relay PCB with a new one.
(Refer to 3.3.2)
1. Update F/W.
2. Upload the parameter and initialize parameter with
#PARAMETER.
3. Replace the Main PCB with a new one. (Refer to 3.3.1)
1. Execute and confirm [#TEST]->[SENSOR TEST] ->
[Y-ORG]. (Confirm that the ON/OFF display is
switched by moving the carriage left and right.)
2. Check in manual if the carriage moves left and right
smoothly.
3. Check the connector connection of Y-origin Sensor
and then disconnect and connect the cabel.
4. Replace the Y Origin Sensor with a new one.
5. Check if there is no trouble on theY Motor Cable.
(disconnecting, burnout, or the like)
6. Replace the Y-axis motor with a new one.
(Refer to 6.3.2)
7. Replace the Slider PCB with a new one. (Refer to
6.4.5)
8. Replace the SL-Relay PCB with a new one.
(Refer to 3.3.2)
9. Replace the Main PCB with a new one. (Refer to 3.3.1)
7.1.4
R.2.0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
P.4
Maintenance Manual > Troubleshooting > Details on Errors and Malfunctions > List of SYSTEM HALT
Model UJF-3042/FX Issued 2010.08.27 Revised 2011.09.30 F/W ver 1.80 / 1.00 Remark
Rev.
7.1.4 List of SYSTEM HALT
2.0
 List of SYSTEM HALT (5/7)
No.
LCD
SYSTEM HALT (*)
509 : HDC POSCNT
Cause
HDC position counter error
39
SYSTEM HALT (*)
510 : X ORGIN
X-origin error
(Origin of X-axis can not be detected)
40
SYSTEM HALT (*)
511 : Z ORGIN
Z-origin error
(Origin of Z-axis can not be detected)
41
42
43
44
45
46
SYSTEM HALT (*)
801 : (C)OPCODE
SYSTEM HALT (*)
802 : (C)SLOT
SYSTEM HALT (*)
803 : (C)CPU ADDR
SYSTEM HALT (*)
804 : (C)DMA ADDR
SYSTEM HALT (*)
805 : (C)ZERO DIV
System error
(CPU exception: OP code error)
System error
(CPU exception: Slot instruction error)
System error
(CPU exception: CPU address error)
System error
(CPU exception: DMA address error)
System error
(CPU exception: Division by 0)
© 2013 MIMAKI ENGINEERING CO.,LTD.
Corrective Measures
1. [Execute and confirm [#TEST]->[SENSOR TEST] >[Y-ORG].(Confirm that the ON/OFF display is
switched by moving the carriage left and right.)
2. [Execute [#TEST]->[CHECK ENCODER].
3. Check the assembly of Y-scale, and confirm that there
is neither dirt nor scratch.
4. Check in manual if the Head Assy. (carriage) moves
left and right smoothly.
5. Check the connector connection of Y-origin Sensor
and Linear Encoder.
6. Replace the Y-origin Sensor or Linear Encoder with a
new one.
7. Check the assembly and connector connection of Yaxis Motor.
8. Replace the Y-axis Motor with a new one. (Refer to
6.3.2)
9. Replace the Slider PCB with a new one. (Refer to
6.4.5)
10. Replace the SL-Relay PCB with a new one.
(Refer to 3.3.2)
11. Replace the Main PCB with a new one. (Refer to 3.3.1)
1. Execute and confirm [#TEST]->[SENSOR TEST]->
[X-ORG].
2. Check the connection of connector of the X-origin
Sensor.
3. Replace the X-origin Sensor with a new one.
4. Check the assembly and connector connection of Xaxis Motor.。.
5. Replace the X-axis Motor with a new one.
(Refer to 6.3.1 )
6. Replace the Main PCB with a new one. (Refer to 3.3.1)
1. Execute and confirm [#TEST]->[SENSOR TEST]->
[TBL-ORG].
2. Check the connection of connector of the Z-origin
Sensor.
3. Replace the Z-origin Sensor with a new one.
4. Disconnect and connect the connector of the ZMotor(Stepping motor).
5. Replace the Station III PCB with a new one.
(Refer to 6.4.4 )
1. Check the peripheral temperature of Main PCB, and
then check if the error is caused by the thermo runaway
of CPU.
2. Make sure that there is no device generating strong
radio wave in the vicinity.
3. Replace the Main PCB with a new one. (Refer to 3.3.1)
4. Replace the Power Supply PCB with a new one.
(Refer to 6.4.1)
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
7.1.4
R.2.0
P.5
Maintenance Manual > Troubleshooting > Details on Errors and Malfunctions > List of SYSTEM HALT
Model UJF-3042/FX Issued 2010.08.27 Revised 2011.09.30 F/W ver 1.80 / 1.00 Remark
Rev.
7.1.4 List of SYSTEM HALT
2.0
 List of SYSTEM HALT (6/7)
No.
LCD
SYSTEM HALT (*)
47
11b : SLDR FPC L
SYSTEM HALT (*)
Cause
Connection check error of FPC cable between
SL-Relay PCB and Slider PCB
11c : SLDR FPC H
48
SYSTEM HALT (*)
806 : FW/SIO bit
SYSTEM HALT (*)
50
807 : FW/SIO wbsy
SYSTEM HALT (*)
51
808 : FW/STP-MTR
SYSTEM HALT (*)
52 809 : FW/XY param
49
SYSTEM HALT (*)
80a : FW/Y RANGE
SYSTEM HALT (*)
54
80b : FW/ctrltsk
SYSTEM HALT (*)
55 80c : FW/PUMP W
53
56
57
58
59
60
61
SYSTEM HALT (*)
80d : FW/SERVO IT
SYSTEM HALT (*)
80e : FW/FROM prm
SYSTEM HALT (*)
80f : FW/SIO vch
SYSTEM HALT (*)
810 : FW/KEY RDI
SYSTEM HALT (*)
811 : FW/SIO read
SYSTEM HALT (*)
812 : FW/CRTRG NO
FW error
(Serial control F/W error (bit control))
FW error
(Serial control F/W error (WR BUSY))
FW error
(Step Motor stop waiting)
FW error
(XY-axis Motor resolution conversion
parameter error)
FW error
(Y movable range error)
FW error
(Motor control task error)
FW error
(Suction Pump stop waiting time over at
capping)
FW error
(Servo interruption error)
FW error
(FROM PARAM error (F/W BUG))
FW error
(Virtual serial CH setting error)
FW error
(No keyboard RDI)
FW error
(Serial control F/W error (RD BUSY))
FW error
(Cartridge number error)
Corrective Measures
1. Check whether FPC cable connection connector of the
Slider PCB (CN2, 4, 6) and the SL-Relay PCB (CN3, 7, 8)
is proper.
2. Disconnect and connect the FFC and Twist pair Cable
located between the Slider PCB and the SL-Relay
PCB.
3. Disconnect and connect the FFC and Twist pair Cable
located between the Main PCB and the SL-Relay PCB.
4. Replace the FFC(or Twist pair Cable) located
between the Slider PCB and the SL-Relay PCB.
5. Replace the FFC(or Twist pair Cable) located between
the Main PCB and the SL-Relay PCB.
6. Replace the Slider PCB with a new one. (Refer to
6.4.5)
7. Replace the SL-Relay PCB with a new one.
(Refer to 3.3.2)
8. Replace the Main PCB with a new one. (Refer to 3.3.1)
1. Update F/W.
2. Check and clear the parameter.
3. Disconnect and connect the FFC located between the
Main PCB and the SL-Relay PCB.
4. Disconnect and connect the FFC located between the
Main PCB and the Station III PCB.
5. Disconnect and connect the FFC located between the
SL-Relay PCB and the Slider PCB.
6. Replace the FFC located between the Main PCB and
the SL-Relay PCB.
7. Replace the FFC located between the Main PCB and
the Station III PCB.
8. Replace the FFC located between the SL-Relay PCB
and the Slider PCB.
9. Replace the Main PCB with a new one. (Refer to 3.3.1)
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
© 2013 MIMAKI ENGINEERING CO.,LTD.
7.1.4
R.2.0
P.6
Maintenance Manual > Troubleshooting > Details on Errors and Malfunctions > List of SYSTEM HALT
Model UJF-3042/FX Issued 2010.08.27 Revised 2011.09.30 F/W ver 1.80 / 1.00 Remark
Rev.
7.1.4 List of SYSTEM HALT
2.0
 List of SYSTEM HALT (7/7)
No.
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
LCD
SYSTEM HALT (*)
813 : FW/WIPER RN
SYSTEM HALT (*)
814 : FW/drivinfm
SYSTEM HALT (*)
815 : FW/SIO rsrc
SYSTEM HALT (*)
816 : FW/FROM WRC
SYSTEM HALT (*)
817 : FW/SaveArea
SYSTEM HALT (*)
818 : FW/EEP SIZE
SYSTEM HALT (*)
819 : FW/HROM SIZ
SYSTEM HALT (*)
81a : FW/FROM SIZ
SYSTEM HALT (*)
81b : FW/STACK OV
SYSTEM HALT (*)
000 : IOC1/ADC
Cause
FW error
(Wiper operation range error)
FW error
(drivinfm() information obtaining error
FW error
(Serial control F/W error (material control))
FW error
(FROM write control error)
FW error
(Save area error (size over))
FW error
(EEPROM size over)
FW error
(HDROM size over)
FW error
(FROM size over)
FW error
(STACK OVER)
System error
(STC3 A/D start error)
71
SYSTEM HALT (*)
000 : IOC2/ADC
System error
(SPC A/D start error)
72
SYSTEM HALT (*)
000 : HDC/ADC
System error
(HDC A/D start error)
73
SYSTEM HALT (*)
Unnown error
74 000 : UNNOWN ERR
© 2013 MIMAKI ENGINEERING CO.,LTD.
Corrective Measures
1. Update F/W.
2. Check and clear the parameter.
3. Disconnect and connect the FFC located between the
Main PCB and the SL-Relay PCB.
4. Disconnect and connect the FFC located between the
Main PCB and the Station III PCB.
5. Disconnect and connect the FFC located between the
SL-Relay PCB and the Slider PCB.
6. Replace the FFC located between the Main PCB and
the SL-Relay PCB.
7. Replace the FFC located between the Main PCB and
the Station III PCB.
8. Replace the FFC located between the SL-Relay PCB
and the Slider PCB.
9. Replace the Main PCB with a new one. (Refer to 3.3.1)
1. Confirm the neighboring temperature of the Station III
PCB. In addition, confirm whether and it is an error by
the heat reckless driving of FPGA.
2. Confirm whether there is not a device generating
powerful electromagnetic waves to circumference.
3. Replace the Slider PCB with a new one. (Refer to
6.4.5)
4. Replace the Main PCB with a new one. (Refer to 3.3.1)
5. Replace the Power Supply PCB with a new one.
(Refer to 6.4.1)
1. Confirm the neighboring temperature of the SL-Relay
PCB. In addition, confirm whether and it is an error by
the heat reckless driving of FPGA.
2. Confirm whether there is not a device generating
powerful electromagnetic waves to circumference.
3. Replace the Slider PCB with a new one. (Refer to
6.4.5)
4. Replace the Main PCB with a new one. (Refer to 3.3.1)
5. Replace the Power Supply PCB with a new one.
(Refer to 6.4.1)
1. Confirm the neighboring temperature of the Slider
PCB. In addition, confirm whether and it is an error by
the heat reckless driving of FPGA.
2. Confirm whether there is not a device generating
powerful electromagnetic waves to circumference.
3. Replace the Slider PCB with a new one. (Refer to
6.4.5)
4. Replace the Main PCB with a new one. (Refer to 3.3.1)
5. Replace the Power Supply PCB with a new one.
(Refer to 6.4.1)
1. Update F/W.
2. Check and clear the parameter.
3. Replace the Main PCB with a new one. (Refer to 3.3.1)
7.1.4
R.2.0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
P.7
Maintenance Manual > Troubleshooting > Details on Errors and Malfunctions > Troubles Without Messages DisModel UJF-3042/FX Issued 2010.08.27 Revised 2011.09.30 F/W ver 1.80 / 1.00 Remark
7.1.5 Troubles Without Messages Displayed
Rev.
2.0
There is a possibility of electric shock.
Before working of the power supply and the surroundings, be sure to remove the power cable.
 List of the Troubles Without Messages Displayed
No.
Case
Start-up Fails at Power on
1
Something is displayed on
LCD, but the printer does not
start.
2
The UV lamp is not lighted.
3
Carriage hits a work and the
table
4
1
Cause
Power path defective
List of Countermeasures
1. Check the connection of cables.
2. Check the grounding of each electric equipment.
Main Power SW defective
1. Check the connection of Main Power SW.
2. Replace the Main Power SW with a new one.
Sub Power SW defective
1. Check the connection of Sub Power SW.
2. Replace the Sub Power SW with a new one.
Power Supply PCB defective Replace the Power Supply PCB with a new one.
Keyboard PCBdefective
Replace the Keyboard PCB with a new one.
Main PCB defective
Replace the Main PCB with a new one.
Abnormality of the wiring
1. Check the connection of cables.
2
2. Replace the FFC located between the Keyboard PCB and the
Main PCB.
Sub Power SW defective
1. Check the connection of Sub Power SW.
2. Replace the Sub Power SW with a new one.
Power Supply PCB defective Replace the Power Supply PCB with a new one.
Keyboard PCBdefective
Replace the Keyboard PCB with a new one.
Main PCB defective
Replace the Main PCB with a new one.
Abnormality of the wiring
1. Check connection between the Slider PCB and the UV unit.
2. Replace the cable located between the Slider PCB and the UV
unit.
Replace the UV unit with a new one.
UV unit defective
Slider PCB defective
Replace the Slider PCB with a new one.
Work Area Sensor defective
1. Readjust the Work Area Sensor.
2. Check the connection of Work Area Sensor.
Carriage height defective
Table defective
3. Replace the Work Area Sensor with a new one.
Readjust the height of the carriage.
1. Check the Z-Origin sensor.
2. Replace the Z-Origin sensor with a new one.
3. Readjust the table.
3
4
5
6
7
8
© 2011 MIMAKI ENGINEERING CO.,LTD.
7.1.5
R.2.0
P.1
Maintenance Manual > Troubleshooting > Detailed Methods of Coping with the Malfunctions
1
2
3
4
5
6
7. Troubleshooting
7.1
7.2
Details on Errors and Malfunctions Detailed Methods of Coping with
the Malfunctions
7
8
© 2011 MIMAKI ENGINEERING CO.,LTD.
Maintenance Manual > Troubleshooting > Detailed Methods of Coping with the Malfunctions > Cannot start for “SYSModel UJF-3042/FX Issued 2010.08.27 Revised 2011.09.30 F/W ver 1.80 / 1.00 Remark
7.2.1
Cannot start for “SYSTEM
Rev.
2.0
HALT(1) 11c:SLDR PCB H”
 Outline
If the result of FFC connection check between the Slider Relay PCB and the Slider PCB is NG, the relevant error is
displayed and the startup operation stops.
It could be due to connection mistake of connector, FFC being inserted sidling, damage of FFC, etc., therefore, check
below.
 Confirmation item
1 Check whether there is connection mistake of connector on FFC between the Slider Relay PCB and the Slider PCB,
FFC being inserted sidling or forgetting to lock.
1
• Relationship between FFC connections
Slider PCB
↔
CN6
↔
CN8
CN4
↔
CN7
CN2
↔
CN3
2
Slider Relay PCB
2 Check whether there is no damage on FFC between the Slider Relay PCB and the Slider PCB. If there is any damage, replace it.
3
In addition, if there is any damage, check that the countermeasure of 6.1.3 “Tube_FFC Holder” Stick the Protection tape Stick the Protection tape has been taken.
As this countermeasure has not been taken during the production process for the machine whose serial No.
is J80xB275 and earlier, be sure to check this countermeasure on the machine earlier than the relevant No.
• For the method, refer to 6.1.3 “Tube_FFC Holder” Stick the Protection tape .
4
5
Example of damage of FPC cable
Coating had been damaged and shortcircuited with the metal part. (black
point within red circle)
6
7
3 Replace the Slider PCB or the Slider Relay PCB.
© 2011 MIMAKI ENGINEERING CO.,LTD.
8
7.2.1
R.2.0
P.1
Maintenance Manual > Troubleshooting > Detailed Methods of Coping with the Malfunctions > Discharging defect canModel UJF-3042/FX Issued 2010.08.27 Revised 2011.09.30 F/W ver 1.80 / 1.00 Remark
7.2.2
Rev.
2.0
Discharging defect cannot be improved by cleaning.
 Outline
In some cases, the nozzle missing and deflection cannot be improved by cleaning. As its cause, there is a possibility
that dirt may adhere to the nozzle surface or ink may adhere to/fix to the nozzle surface due to mist. Also, foreign
substances may be clogged in the nozzle.
For the countermeasure, perform two works below:
Countermeasure 1: Clean the nozzle surface directly with a cleaning stick and cleaning liquid.
Countermeasure 2: If defect cannot be improved even if you performed "Countermeasure 1" above, perform pressure filling of cleaning liquid.
1
2
Example of mist
adhering and fixing
Countermeasure 1
 Work procedure
3
1. Turn the power ON.
<LOCAL>
2. Select menu of the “MAINTENANCE” of “FUNCTION”.
FUNCTION
MAINTENANCE
3. Select menu of the “MENT :HEAD MENT” of “STATION”
from “MAINTENANCE”.
<ent>
• The carriage moves to the center of the front edge.
MAINTENANCE
STATION
4
<ent>
STATION
MENT :HEAD MENT
5
4. Open the Front cover TB.
6
7
Front cover TB
5. Clean the Nozzle surface.
• Immerse a cleaning swab in cleaning liquid and clean the
nozzle surface.
8
 Do not apply pressure on the nozzle surface.
Wipe lightly as if absorbing ink drops.
Nozzle surface
 Be careful about the light pointer so that cleaning
liquid may not adhere to it.
6. Close the Front cover TB and press [ENTER] key.
STATION
COMPLETED
<ent>
© 2011 MIMAKI ENGINEERING CO.,LTD.
7.2.2
R.2.0
P.1
Maintenance Manual > Troubleshooting > Detailed Methods of Coping with the Malfunctions > Discharging defect canModel UJF-3042/FX Issued 2010.08.27 Revised 2011.09.30 F/W ver 1.80 / 1.00 Remark
7.2.2 Discharging defect cannot be improved by cleaning.
Rev.
2.0
Countermeasure 2
 Required items
1 Syringe kit for head washing (Type No. A103291)
Syringe kit for head washing
2 Tube kit (Type No. A103348)
1
3 Cleaning liquid bottle (Type No. A102452)
4 Stainless steel bat
5 Phillips screwdriver
Tube kit
2
 Work procedure
1. Turn the power ON.
<LOCAL>
2. Select menu of the “MAINTENANCE” of “FUNCTION”.
FUNCTION
MAINTENANCE
3. Select menu of the “MENT :HEAD MENT” of “STATION”
from “MAINTENANCE”.
<ent>
• The carriage moves to the center of the front edge.
MAINTENANCE
STATION
3
<ent>
4
STATION
MENT :HEAD MENT
4. Open the Front cover TB.
5. Remove the Front cover.
Front cover
5
6
Front cover TB
6. Place a tray for cleaning liquid such as a stainless steel bat
under the head.
7
8
Stainless steel bat
© 2011 MIMAKI ENGINEERING CO.,LTD.
7.2.2
R.2.0
P.2
Maintenance Manual > Troubleshooting > Detailed Methods of Coping with the Malfunctions > Discharging defect cannot be improved by cleaning.
Model UJF-3042/FX Issued
2010.08.27 Revised 2011.09.30 F/W ver
1.80 / 1.00
Rev.
Remark
7.2.2 Discharging defect cannot be improved by cleaning.
2.0
7. Perform pressure filling of cleaning liquid from the air drain
port.
 For this work, the syringe is used, however, do not
pull out the piston when you connect with the air
drain port. It may absorb foreign object into the
nozzle and cause nozzle defect.
1
(1) Uncap the air drain port.
(2) Set the syringe kit with 10cc of cleaning liquid on the air
drain port.
(3) Fill 10cc taking time of 15 to 20 sec.
• At this time, check that cleaning liquid shower down from
the nozzle.
 While holding the filter with your hand to avoid
the filter from coming off due to the pressure of
the syringe, fill cleaning liquid.
(4) Remove the Syringe kit and cap the air drain port.
8. Press [ENTER] key.
STATION
COMPLETED
2
3
4
<ent>
9. Perform [MAINTENANCE] - [FILL UP INK] - [air pg].
<LOCAL>
*To avoid cleaning liquid from mixing with ink.
FUNCTION
MAINTENANCE
<ent>
MAINTENANCE
FILL UP INK
<ent>
5
6
FILL UP INK
TYPE:air pg
10. Close the Front cover TB.
11. Attach the Front cover.
7
12. Perform test drawing to check that there is no blur.
*If there are any blur, perform cleaning.
8
© 2011 MIMAKI ENGINEERING CO.,LTD.
7.2.2
R.2.0
P.3
Maintenance Manual > Operation Flow > Basic Operation
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8. Operation Flow
8.1
Basic Operation
8.2
Print Mode
© 2009 MIMAKI ENGINEERING CO.,LTD.
8.3
Service Mode
8
Maintenance Manual > Operation Flow > Basic Operation > Start
Model UJF-3042/FX Issued 2010.08.27 Revised 2011.09.30 F/W ver
1.80 / 1.00
Rev.
Remark
8.1.1 Start
2.0
7,(UVCTVWR
8GT 2.'#5'9#+6
5'#4%*+0)14+)+0
(70%шщ
1
.1%#.
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
© 2011 MIMAKI ENGINEERING CO.,LTD.
8.1.1
R.2.0
P.1
Maintenance Manual > Operation Flow > Print Mode
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8. Operation Flow
8.1
Basic Operation
8.2
Print Mode
© 2011 MIMAKI ENGINEERING CO.,LTD.
8.3
Service Mode
8
Maintenance Manual > Operation Flow > Print Mode > LOCAL / REMOTE
Model UJF-3042/FX Issued 2010.08.27 Revised 2011.09.30 F/W ver 1.80 / 1.00
Rev.
Remark
8.2.1 LOCAL / REMOTE
2.0
/2&$/!
(17(5
)81&7,21
/2&$/!.&0<: &/
5(0$,1
(17 8-)9
05/,,,9
'$7$&/($5
(17
(17!
'$7$&/($5
7(67
7(67'5$:
(17
6&$1',5 (17!
7(67'5$:
7(67'5$:
(17
)(('',5 (17!
7(67'5$:
5(027(
1
)81&7,21
6(783(17!
'$7$&/($5
&/($1,1*
(17 /2&$/!
2
&/($1,1*
+($'>0
0&<.:&/@
(17 &/($1,1*
(17 &/($1,1*
7<3(QQRUPDO
QRUPDOVRIWKDUG
RU 5(027(
5(027(
IW
P
3
FUNCTION
4
5
6
7
8
© 2011 MIMAKI ENGINEERING CO.,LTD.
8.2.1
R.2.0
P.1
Maintenance Manual > Operation Flow > Print Mode > FUNCTION
Model UJF-3042/FX Issued 2010.08.27 Revised 2011.09.30 F/W ver
1.80 / 1.00
Rev.
Remark
8.2.2 FUNCTION
2.0
㻨㻸㻻㻯㻭㻸㻪
㻌㻌㻌㻲㼁㻺㻯
㻲㼁㻺㻯㼀㻵㻻㻺
㼃㻻㻾㻷㻌㻿㻱㼀㻌㻌㻌㻌㻌㻌㻌㻨㻱㻺㼀㻪
㻲㼁㻺㻯㻛䌻㻛䌼
㻱㻺㼀 㼃㻻㻾㻷㻌㻿㻱㼀
㻯㻻㻹㻼㻸㻱㼀㻱㻌㻌㻌㻌㻌㻌㻌㻌㻦㼑㼚㼠
㻲㼁㻺㻯㼀㻵㻻㻺
㻱㻺㼀 㻴㻱㻭㻰㻌㻴㻱㻵㻳㻴㼀
㻴㻱㻭㻰㻌㻴㻱㻵㻳㻴㼀㻌㻌㻌㻌㻨㻱㻺㼀㻪
㻹㻱㻰㻵㻭
㻲㼁㻺㻯㻛䌻㻛䌼
㻌㻌㻌䌻㻛䌼
㻱㻺㼀 㻴㻱㻭㻰㻌㻴㻱㻵㻳㻴㼀
㼀㻴㻵㻯㻷㻺㻱㻿㻿㻌㻦㻝㻝㻜㻚㻜㼙㼙
㻜㻚㻜䡚㻡㻜㻚㻜
㻴㻱㻭㻰㻌㻴㻱㻵㻳㻴㼀
㻴㻱㻭㻰㻌㻳㻭㻼㻌㻌㻌㻌㻌㻌㻌㻨㼑㼚㼠㻪
㻌㻌㻌䌻㻛䌼
㻱㻺㼀 㻴㻱㻭㻰㻌㻴㻱㻵㻳㻴㼀
㻴㻱㻭㻰㻌㻳㻭㻼㻌㻦㻝㻝㻚㻡㼙㼙
㻝㻚㻡䡚㻡㻚㻜
㻴㻱㻭㻰㻌㻴㻱㻵㻳㻴㼀
㼀㻭㻮㻸㻱㻌㻴㻱㻵㻳㻴㼀㻌㻌㻌㻨㼑㼚㼠㻪
㻌㻌㻌䌻㻛䌼
㻱㻺㼀 㻴㻱㻭㻰㻌㻴㻱㻵㻳㻴㼀
㼀㻮㻸㻌㻴㻳㻴㼀㻌㻦㻠
㻠㻥㻚㻜
㻜㼙㼙
㻜㻚㻜䡚㻡㻜㻚㻜
㻴㻱㻭㻰㻌㻴㻱㻵㻳㻴㼀
㻳㻭㻼㻌㻯㻴㻱㻯㻷㻌㻌㻌㻌㻌㻌㻨㼑㼚㼠㻪
㻱㻺㼀 㻴㻱㻭㻰㻌㻴㻱㻵㻳㻴㼀
㻹㻻㻰㻱㻌㻦㻻
㻻㻺
1
㻻㻺㻘㻻㻲㻲
㻲㼁㻺㻯㼀㻵㻻㻺
㻿㻱㼀㻌㻻㻾㻵㻳㻵㻺㻌㻌㻌㻌㻌㻨㻱㻺㼀㻪
㻲㼁㻺㻯㻛䌻㻛䌼
㻲㼁㻺㻯㼀㻵㻻㻺
㻿㻱㼀㻌㼁㻼㻌㻌㻌㻌㻌㻌㻌㻌㻌㻨㻱㻺㼀㻪
㻲㼁㻺㻯㻛䌻㻛䌼
㻱㻺㼀 㻻㻾㻵㻳㻵㻺
㻿㻱㻸㻱㻯㼀㻌㻦㼄
㼄㻌㻻㻲㻲㻿㻱㼀
㻌㻌㻌䌻㻛䌼
㻱㻺㼀 㻻㻾㻵㻳㻵㻺㻌㻌㻠㻞㻜㻌㻌㻹㻹
㼄㻌㻻㻲㻲㻿㻦㻌㻌㻌㻜
㻜㻌㻌㻹㻹
㻻㻾㻵㻳㻵㻺
㻿㻱㻸㻱㻯㼀㻌㻦㼅
㼅㻌㻻㻲㻲㻿㻱㼀
㻱㻺㼀 㻻㻾㻵㻳㻵㻺㻌㻌㻟㻜㻜㻌㻌㻹㻹
㼅㻌㻻㻲㻲㻿㻦㻌㻌㻌㻜
㻜㻌㻌㻹㻹
㻱㻺㼀
㻲㼁㻺㻯㼀㻵㻻㻺
㻱㻺㼀
㻹㻭㻵㻺㼀㻱㻺㻭㻺㻯㻱㻌㻌㻌㻌㻨㻱㻺㼀㻪
㻲㼁㻺㻯㻛䌻㻛䌼
MAINTENANCE
㻲㼁㻺㻯㼀㻵㻻㻺
㻱㻺㼀
㻹㻭㻯㻴㻵㻺㻱㻌㻿㻱㼀㻌㻌㻌㻌㻨㻱㻺㼀㻪
㻲㼁㻺㻯㻛䌻㻛䌼
MACHINE SETUP
㻲㼁㻺㻯㼀㻵㻻㻺
㻰㻵㻿㻼㻸㻭㼅㻌㻌㻌㻌㻌㻌㻌㻌㻨㻱㻺㼀㻪
㻌㻌㻌㻲㼁㻺㻯㻛䌻㻛䌼
㻱㻺㼀 㻰㻵㻿㻼㻸㻭㼅
㻱㼚㼓㼘㼕㼟㼔㻌㻌㻌㻌㻌㻌㻌㻌㻨㼑㼚㼠㻪
㻶㼍㼜㼍㼚㼑㼟㼑㻘㻱㼚㼓㼘㼕㼟㼔
㻲㼁㻺㻯㼀㻵㻻㻺
㻏㻭㻰㻶㼁㻿㼀㻌㻌㻌㻌㻌㻌㻌㻌㻨㻱㻺㼀㻪
㻱㻺㼀
#ADJUST
㻲㼁㻺㻯㼀㻵㻻㻺
㻏㼀㻱㻿㼀㻌㻌㻌㻌㻌㻌㻌㻌㻌㻌㻨㻱㻺㼀㻪
㻱㻺㼀
#TEST
㻲㼁㻺㻯㼀㻵㻻㻺
㻱㻺㼀
㻏㻼㻭㻾㻭㻹㻱㼀㻱㻾㻌㻌㻌㻌㻌㻨㻱㻺㼀㻪
2
SETUP
3
4
#PARAMETER
5
6
7
8
© 2011 MIMAKI ENGINEERING CO.,LTD.
8.2.2
R.2.0
P.1
Maintenance Manual > Operation Flow > Print Mode > SETUP
Model UJF-3042/FX Issued 2010.08.27 Revised 2011.09.30 F/W ver
1.80 / 1.00
Rev.
Remark
8.2.3 SETUP
㪝㪬㪥㪚㪫㪠㪦㪥
㪪㪜㪫㩷㪬㪧㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㪓㪜㪥㪫㪕
㪜㪥㪫 㪪㪜㪫㩷㪬㪧
㪝㪜㪜㪛㩷㪚㪦㪤㪧㪅㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㪓㪼㫅㫋㪕
㪝㪬㪥㪚㪆㺢㪆㺣
㪪㪜㪫㩷㪬㪧
㪧㪩㪠㪥㪫㩷㪤㪦㪛㪜㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㪓㪼㫅㫋㪕
㪝㪬㪥㪚㪆㺢㪆㺣
2.0
㩷㩷㩷䋾
㪜㪥㪫 㪪㪜㪫㩷㪬㪧
㪧㪩㪠㪥㪫㩷㪪㪫㪘㪩㪫㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㪑㪼㫅㫋
㪜㪥㪫 㪟㪜㪘㪛㩷㪫㪜㪤㪧㪅㩷㪚㪦㪥㪫㪩㪦㪣 㪫㪼㫄㫇 㩷㩷㩷㩷㪧㪩㪠㪥㪫㪠㪥㪞
㪧㪣㪜㪘㪪㪜㩷㪮㪘㪠㪫
㪧㪣㪜㪘㪪㪜㩷㪮㪘㪠㪫
㪜㪥㪫 㪪㪜㪫㩷㪬㪧
㪨㪬㪘㪣㪠㪫㪰㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㪓㪼㫅㫋㪕
㩷㩷㩷㺢㪆㺣
㪜㪥㪫 㪪㪜㪫㩷㪬㪧
㪨㪬㪘㪣㪠㪫㪰㩷㪑㪪
㪪㪫㪘㪥㪛㪘㪩㪛
㪪㪫㪘㪥㪛㪘㪩㪛㪃㪝㪠㪥㪜㪃㪝㪘㪪㪫
㪪㪜㪫㩷㪬㪧
㪣㪦㪞㪠㪚㪘㪣㩷㪪㪜㪜㪢㩷㩷㩷㪓㪼㫅㫋㪕
㪪㪜㪫㩷㪬㪧
㪠㪥㪢㩷㪣㪘㪰㪜㪩㪪㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㪓㪼㫅㫋㪕
㪝㪬㪥㪚㪆㺢㪆㺣
㪜㪥㪫 㪪㪜㪫㩷㪬㪧
㪠㪥㪢㩷㪣㪘㪰㪜㪩㪪㩷㪑㪈
㪈
㪪㪜㪫㩷㪬㪧
㪩㪜㪝㪩㪜㪪㪟㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㪓㪼㫅㫋㪕
㪝㪬㪥㪚㪆㺢㪆㺣
㪜㪥㪫 㪪㪜㪫㩷㪬㪧
㪩㪜㪝㪩㪜㪪㪟㩷㪑㪣㪜㪭㪜㪣㪈㪈
㪚㫆㫄㫇㫃㪼㫋㫀㫆㫅
㪪㪜㪫㩷㪬㪧
㪜㪥㪛 㪘㪛㪡㪬㪪㪫㩷㪔㩷㩷㩷㩷㪇
㪇
㪄㪐㪐㪐㪐䌾㪐㪐㪐㪐
㪜㪥㪫 㪪㪜㪫㩷㪬㪧
㪣㪦㪞㪠㪚㪘㪣㩷㪪㪜㪜㪢㩷㪑㪦
㪦㪥
㪦㪥㪃㪦㪝㪝
1
㪈䌾㪐
㪇䌾㪊
㪪㪜㪫㩷㪬㪧
㪧㪩㪠㪦㪩㪠㪫㪰㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㪓㪼㫅㫋㪕
㪝㪬㪥㪚㪆㺢㪆㺣
㪮㪿㪼㫅㩷㫊㪼㫋㫋㫀㫅㪾㩷㫀㫅㪻㫀㫍㫀㪻㫌㪸㫃㫃㫐㪃㩷㫊㫌㪹㫊㪼㫈㫌㪼㫅㫋㫃㫐
㪜㪥㪫 㪪㪜㪫㩷㪬㪧
㪜㪥㪫 㪪㪜㪫㩷㪬㪧
㪜㪥㪫 㪪㪜㪫㩷㪬㪧
㪜㪥㪫 㪪㪜㪫㩷㪬㪧
㪜㪥㪫 㪪㪜㪫㩷㪬㪧
㪜㪥㪫 㪪㪜㪫㩷㪬㪧
㪧㪩㪠㪦㪩㪠㪫㪰㩷㪑㪘
㪘㪣㪣㩷㪟㪦㪪㪫
㪧㪩㪠㪥㪫㩷㪤㪦㪛㪜㩷㪑㪟
㪟㪦㪪㪫
㪝㪜㪜㪛㩷㪚㪦㪤㪧㪅㩷㪑㪧
㪧㪣㪦㪫
㪠㪥㪢㩷㪣㪘㪰㪜㪩㪪㩷㪑㪟
㪟㪦㪪㪫
㪣㪦㪞㪠㪚㪘㪣㩷㪪㪜㪜㪢㩷㪑㪟
㪟㪦㪪㪫
㪩㪜㪝㪩㪜㪪㪟㩷㪑㪟
㪟㪦㪪㪫
㪘㪣㪣㩷㪟㪦㪪㪫㪃㪘㪣㪣㩷㪧㪣㪦㪫㪃㪠㪥㪛㪠㪭㪠㪛㪬㪘㪣
㪟㪦㪪㪫㪃㪧㪣㪦㪫
㪟㪦㪪㪫㪃㪧㪣㪦㪫
㪟㪦㪪㪫㪃㪧㪣㪦㪫
㪟㪦㪪㪫㪃㪧㪣㪦㪫
㪟㪦㪪㪫㪃㪧㪣㪦㪫
㪪㪜㪫㩷㪬㪧
㪬㪭㩷㪤㪦㪛㪜㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㪓㪼㫅㫋㪕
㪝㪬㪥㪚㪆㺢㪆㺣
㪜㪥㪫 㪪㪜㪫㩷㪬㪧
㪬㪭㩷㪤㪦㪛㪜㩷㪑㪦
㪦㪥
㪦㪥㪃㪦㪝㪝㪃㪥㪦㪧㪩㪠㪥㪫
㪪㪜㪫㩷㪬㪧
㪬㪭㩷㪘㪻㪻㪪㪺㪸㫅㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㪓㪼㫅㫋㪕
㪝㪬㪥㪚㪆㺢㪆㺣
㪜㪥㪫 㪪㪜㪫㩷㪬㪧
㪬㪭㩷㪘㪻㪻㪪㪺㪸㫅㩷㪑㪈㪈
2
㪦㪝㪝㪃㪈䌾㪐
㪪㪜㪫㩷㪬㪧
㪜㪥㪫 㪪㪜㪫㩷㪬㪧
㪮㪦㪩㪢㩷㪚㪟㪘㪥㪞㪜㩷㩷㩷㩷㪓㪼㫅㫋㪕
㪮㪦㪩㪢㩷㪚㪟㪘㪥㪞㪜㩷㪑㪦
㪦㪝㪝
㪝㪬㪥㪚㪆㺢㪆㺣
㪦㪥㪃㪦㪝㪝
㪪㪜㪫㩷㪬㪧
㪚㪘㪩㪫㩷㪮㪜㪠㪞㪟㪫㩷㩷㩷㩷㪓㪼㫅㫋㪕
㪝㪬㪥㪚㪆㺢㪆㺣
㪜㪥㪫 㪪㪜㪫㩷㪬㪧
㪜㪥㪫 㪪㪜㪫㩷㪬㪧
㪜㪥㪫 㪪㪜㪫㩷㪬㪧
㪚㪘㪩㪫㪩㪠㪛㪞㪜㩷㪑㪤
㪤
㪮㪜㪠㪞㪟㪫㩷㪔㩷㩷㪏㪌㪇㪾
㩷㪏㪌㪇㪾㪦㪢㪖㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㪑㪼㫅㫋
㪚
㪊㪇㪇䌾㪈㪉㪇㪇
㪤㪃㪚㪃㪰㪃㪢㪃㪮㪃 㪣
㪪㪜㪫㩷㪬㪧
㪜㪥㪫 㪪㪜㪫㩷㪬㪧
㪘㪬㪫㪦㩷㪚㪣㪜㪘㪥㪠㪥㪞㩷㩷㪓㪼㫅㫋㪕
㪘㪬㪫㪦㩷㪚㪣㪜㪘㪥㩷㪑㪦
㪦㪥
㪝㪬㪥㪚㪆㺢㪆㺣
㪦㪥㪃㪦㪝㪝
㪪㪜㪫㩷㪬㪧
㪪㪜㪫㪬㪧㩷㪩㪜㪪㪜㪫㩷㩷㩷㩷㪓㪼㫅㫋㪕
3
㪜㪥㪫 㪪㪜㪫㩷㪬㪧
㪠㪥㪠㪫㪠㪘㪣㪅㩷㪦㪢㪖㩷㩷㩷㩷㪑㪼㫅㫋
4
5
6
7
8
© 2011 MIMAKI ENGINEERING CO.,LTD.
8.2.3
R.2.0
P.1
Maintenance Manual > Operation Flow > Print Mode > MAINTENANCE
Model UJF-3042/FX Issued 2010.08.27 Revised 2011.09.30 F/W ver 1.80 / 1.00
Rev.
Remark
8.2.4 MAINTENANCE
㪝㪬㪥㪚㪫㪠㪦㪥
㪤㪘㪠㪥㪫㪜㪥㪘㪥㪚㪜
㪜㪥㪫 㪤㪘㪠㪥㪫㪜㪥㪘㪥㪚㪜
㪪㪫㪘㪫㪠㪦㪥㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㪓㪼㫅㫋㪕
㪜㪥㪫 㪪㪫㪘㪫㪠㪦㪥
㪤㪜㪥㪫㩷㪑㪚㪘㪩㪩㪠㪘㪞㪜㩷㪦㪬㪫
㺢㪆㺣
2.0
㪜㪥㪫 㪪㪫㪘㪫㪠㪦㪥
㪧㪣㪜㪘㪪㪜㩷㪮㪘㪠㪫
㪪㪫㪘㪫㪠㪦㪥
㪚㪦㪤㪧㪣㪜㪫㪜㪛㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㪑㪼㫅㫋
㪪㪫㪘㪫㪠㪦㪥
㪜㪥㪫 㪪㪫㪘㪫㪠㪦㪥
㪤㪜㪥㪫㩷㪑㪮㪠㪧㪜㪩㩷㪚㪣㪜㪘㪥㪠㪥㪞
㪚㪦㪤㪧㪣㪜㪫㪜㪛㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㪑㪼㫅㫋
㺢㪆㺣
㪝㪬㪥㪚㪆㺢㪆㺣
㪪㪫㪘㪫㪠㪦㪥
㪤㪜㪥㪫㩷㪑㪮㪠㪧㪜㪩㩷㪙㪦㪫㪫㪣㪜
㺢㪆㺣
㪜㪥㪫 㪪㪫㪘㪫㪠㪦㪥
㪚㪦㪤㪧㪣㪜㪫㪜㪛㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㪑㪼㫅㫋
㪪㪫㪘㪫㪠㪦㪥
㪤㪜㪥㪫㩷㪑㪮㪘㪪㪫㪜㩷㪫㪘㪥㪢
㺢㪆㺣
㪜㪥㪫 㪪㪫㪘㪫㪠㪦㪥
㪚㪦㪤㪧㪣㪜㪫㪜㪛㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㪑㪼㫅㫋
㪪㪫㪘㪫㪠㪦㪥
㪤㪜㪥㪫㩷㪑㪜㪯㪚㪟
㺢㪆㺣
㪜㪥㪫 㪪㪫㪘㪫㪠㪦㪥
㪚㪦㪤㪧㪣㪜㪫㪜㪛㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㪑㪼㫅㫋
㪪㪫㪘㪫㪠㪦㪥
㪤㪜㪥㪫㩷㪑㪚㪟㪜㪚㪢㩷㪝㪠㪣㪫㪜㪩
㺢㪆㺣
㪜㪥㪫 㪪㪫㪘㪫㪠㪦㪥
㪚㪦㪤㪧㪣㪜㪫㪜㪛㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㪑㪼㫅㫋
㪪㪫㪘㪫㪠㪦㪥
㪤㪜㪥㪫㩷㪑㪥㪦㪱㪱㪣㪜㩷㪮㪘㪪㪟
㺢㪆㺣
㪜㪥㪫 㪪㪫㪘㪫㪠㪦㪥
㪟㪜㪘㪛㩷㪲㪈㪈㪉㪊㪴
㪪㪫㪘㪫㪠㪦㪥
㪤㪜㪥㪫㩷㪑㪛㪠㪪㪮㪘㪰㩷㪮㪘㪪㪟
㪜㪥㪫 㪪㪫㪘㪫㪠㪦㪥
㪚㪦㪤㪧㪣㪜㪫㪜㪛㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㪑㪼㫅㫋
㪜㪥㪫 㪝㫀㫃㫃㩷㫋㪿㪼㩷㫃㫀㫈㫌㫀㪻㪅
㪚㪦㪤㪧㪣㪜㪫㪜㪛㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㪑㪼㫅㫋
䇭䇭䇭㪛㫀㫊㫇㫃㪸㫐㪼㪻㩷㪹㫐㩷㫋㫌㫉㫅㫊
㪜㪥㪫 㪪㪫㪘㪫㪠㪦㪥
㪣㪜㪘㪭㪠㪥㪞㩷㩷㪑㩷㪈㪈㫄㫀㫅
㪜㪥㪫 㪪㪫㪘㪫㪠㪦㪥
㪣㪜㪘㪭㪠㪥㪞㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㪈㪉㪑㪊㪋
㪪㪫㪘㪫㪠㪦㪥
㪤㪜㪥㪫㩷㪑㪚㪬㪪㪫㪦㪛㪰㩷㪮㪘㪪㪟
㺢㪆㺣
㪜㪥㪫 㪝㫀㫃㫃㩷㫋㪿㪼㩷㫃㫀㫈㫌㫀㪻㪅
㪚㪦㪤㪧㪣㪜㪫㪜㪛㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㪑㪼㫅㫋
㪪㪫㪘㪫㪠㪦㪥
㪤㪜㪥㪫㩷㪑㪟㪜㪘㪛㩷㪤㪜㪥㪫
㪜㪥㪫 㪪㪫㪘㪫㪠㪦㪥
㪚㪦㪤㪧㪣㪜㪫㪜㪛㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㪑㪼㫅㫋
㪮㪠㪧㪜㪩㩷㪚㪣㪜㪘㪥㪠㪥㪞
㪚㪦㪤㪧㪣㪜㪫㪜㪛㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㪑㪼㫅㫋
㪜㪥㪫 㪪㪫㪘㪫㪠㪦㪥
㪣㪜㪘㪭㪠㪥㪞㩷㩷㪑㩷㪈㪈㫄㫀㫅
2
㪜㪥㪫 㪪㪫㪘㪫㪠㪦㪥
㪣㪜㪘㪭㪠㪥㪞㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㪈㪉㪑㪊㪋
㪻㪼㫋㪼㪺㫋㫀㫆㫅
㩷㩷㩷㩷㪮㪘㪪㪟㪠㪥㪞
㪧㪣㪜㪘㪪㪜㩷㪮㪘㪠㪫
㪜㪥㪫 㪠㪥㪢㩷㪪㪜㪫㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㪲㪣㪟㪄㪈㪇㪇㪴
㪚
㪪㪜㪣㪜㪚㪫㩷㪑㪤
㪤㪚㪰㪢㪮 㪣
㪁㩷㪪㪼㫃㪼㪺㫋㩷㫋㪿㪼㩷㪠㪥㪢㩷㪪㪜㪫
㪁㩷㪫㪿㪼㩷㫀㫅㫂㩷㫊㪼㫋㩷㫀㫊㩷㪸㫊㩷㪽㫆㫃㫃㫆㫎㫊
㪚
㪚 㪚
㪣㪟㪄㪈㪇㪇㩷㪤㪚㪰㪢㪮 㪣㪃㪤㪚㪰㪢㪮㪮㪃㪤㪚㪰㪢 㪣 㪣㪃㪤㪚㪰㪢㪶㪶
㪣㪝㪄㪉㪇㪇㩷㪤㪚㪰㪢㪮㪮㪃㪤㪚㪰㪢㪶㪶
㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㪮㪘㪪㪟
㪜㪥㪛㪓㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㪕㪚㪦㪥㪫㪠㪥㪬㪜
㪚㪦㪥㪫㪠㪥㪬㪜
㪻㪼㫋㪼㪺㫋㫀㫆㫅
㪜㪥㪛㩷
㪜㪥㪫 㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㪮㪘㪪㪟㩷㩷㩷㪶㪶㪶㪶㪮㪚㪣
㪫㫀㫄㪼 㩷㩷㩷㩷㪮㪘㪪㪟㪠㪥㪞
㩷㩷㩷㩷㪮㪘㪪㪟㪠㪥㪞
㪚
㪧㪣㪜㪘㪪㪜㩷㪮㪘㪠㪫
㪟㪜㪘㪛㩷㪲㪤
㪤㪚㪰㪢㪮 㪣㪴
㪪㪜㪫㩷㪮㪘㪪㪟㪠㪥㪞㩷㪣㪠㪨㪬㪠㪛
㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㪮㪘㪪㪟㩷㩷㩷㪶㪶㪶㪶㪮㪚㪣
㪩㪜㪤㪦㪭㪜㩷㪚㪘㪩㪫㪩㪠㪛㪞㪜
㩷㩷㩷㩷㪮㪘㪪㪟㪠㪥㪞
㪧㪣㪜㪘㪪㪜㩷㪮㪘㪠㪫
㪜㪥㪫 㪠㪥㪫㪅㪮㪠㪧㪠㪥㪞
㪪㪚㪘㪥㩷㪚㪦㪬㪥㪫㩷㪔㩷㪌㪌㪇
㪦㪝㪝㪃㪈䌾㪉㪌㪌
㪤㪘㪠㪥㪫㪜㪥㪘㪥㪚㪜
㪝㪠㪣㪣㩷㪬㪧㩷㪠㪥㪢㩷㩷㩷㩷㪓㪼㫅㫋㪕
㪝㪬㪥㪚㪆㺢㪆㺣
㪜㪥㪫 㪝㪠㪣㪣㩷㪬㪧㩷㪠㪥㪢
㪫㪰㪧㪜㩷㪑㪽㪽㫀㫃㫃㫌㫇
㺢㪆㺣
㪝㪠㪣㪣㩷㪬㪧㩷㪠㪥㪢
㪫㪰㪧㪜㩷㪑㪸㪸㫀㫉㩷㫇㪾
㺢㪆㺣
㪝㪠㪣㪣㩷㪬㪧㩷㪠㪥㪢
㪫㪰㪧㪜㩷㪑㪽㪽㫀㫉㫊㫋
㪤㪘㪠㪥㪫㪜㪥㪘㪥㪚㪜
㪬㪭㩷㪣㪘㪤㪧㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㪓㪼㫅㫋㪕
㪝㪬㪥㪚㪆㺢㪆㺣
㪝㪬㪥㪚㪆㺢㪆㺣
㩷㩷㩷㩷㪝㪠㪣㪣㩷㪬㪧
㪜㪥㪫 㪝㪠㪣㪣㩷㪬㪧㩷㪠㪥㪢
㪁㪁㪁㪄㪄㪄㪄㪄㪄㪄㪄㪄㪄㪄㪄㪄㪄㪄㪄㪄
㪧㫃㪼㪸㫊㪼㩷㪻㪼㪽㫃㪸㫋㪼㩷㩷㪑㪼㫅㫋
㪜㪥㪫 㩷㩷㩷㩷㪝㪠㪣㪣㩷㪬㪧
㪫㫀㫄㪼 㪝㪠㪣㪣㩷㪬㪧㩷㪠㪥㪢
㪜㪥㪫 㪝㪠㪣㪣㩷㪬㪧㩷㪠㪥㪢
㪚
㪄㪄㪄㪄㪄㪄㪄㪄㪄㪄㪄㪄㪄㪄㪄㪄㪄㪄㪄㪄
㪧㫃㪼㪸㫊㪼㩷㪻㪼㪽㫃㪸㫋㪼㩷㩷㪑㪼㫅㫋
㪟㪜㪘㪛㩷㪲㪤
㪤㪚㪰㪢㪮 㪣㪴
㶎㪠㫋㩷㪻㪼㫇㪼㫅㪻㫊㩷㫆㫅㩷㫋㪿㪼㩷㪠㫅㫂㩷㫊㪼㫋㪅
㪚
㪚 㪚
㪙㫌㫋㩷㩷㪮 㪣㪃㩷㩷㪮㪮㪃㩷 㪣 㪣㩷㩷㪺㪿㫆㫀㪺㪼㩷㫀㫊㩷㫇㫆㫊㫊㫀㪹㫃㪼㩷㫀㫅㩷㫋㪿㪼㩷㪺㪸㫊㪼㩷㫆㪽㩷㫅㫆㫅㪄㪽㫀㫃㫃㫀㫅㪾㩷㫋㪿㪼㩷㫋㪿㫀㫉㪻㩷㪿㪼㪸㪻㪅
㪜㪥㪫 㪝㪠㪣㪣㩷㪬㪧㩷㪠㪥㪢
㪜㪥㪫 㪝㪠㪣㪣㩷㪬㪧㩷㪠㪥㪢
㪜㪥㪫 㩷㩷㩷㩷㪝㪠㪣㪣㩷㪬㪧
㪧㫃㪼㪸㫊㪼㩷㪻㪼㪽㫃㪸㫋㪼㩷㩷㪑㪼㫅㫋
㪄㪄㪄㪄㪄㪄㪄㪄㪄㪄㪄㪄㪄㪄㪄㪄㪄㪄㪄㪄
㪟㪜㪘㪛㩷㪲㪤㪚㪰㪢㪮㪚㪣㪴
㶎㪠㫋㩷㪻㪼㫇㪼㫅㪻㫊㩷㫆㫅㩷㫋㪿㪼㩷㪠㫅㫂㩷㫊㪼㫋㪅
㪚
㪚 㪚
㪙㫌㫋㩷㩷㪮 㪣㪃㩷㩷㪮㪮㪃㩷 㪣 㪣㩷㩷㪺㪿㫆㫀㪺㪼㩷㫀㫊㩷㫇㫆㫊㫊㫀㪹㫃㪼㩷㫀㫅㩷㫋㪿㪼㩷㪺㪸㫊㪼㩷㫆㪽㩷㫅㫆㫅㪄㪽㫀㫃㫃㫀㫅㪾㩷㫋㪿㪼㩷㫋㪿㫀㫉㪻㩷㪿㪼㪸㪻㪅
㪻㪼㫋㪼㪺㫋㫀㫆㫅
㪜㪥㪫 㪝㪠㪣㪣㩷㪬㪧㩷㪠㪥㪢
㪜㪥㪫 㪝㪠㪣㪣㩷㪬㪧㩷㪠㪥㪢
㩷㩷㩷㩷㪝㪠㪣㪣㩷㪬㪧
㪪㪜㪫㩷㪚㪣㪜㪘㪥㩷㪫㪦㪦㪣
㪧㪣㪜㪘㪪㪜㩷㪮㪘㪠㪫
㪟㪜㪘㪛㩷㪲㪤㪚㪰㪢㪮㪚㪣㪴
㪚
㪚 㪚
㶎㪦㫅㫃㫐㩷㪸㫊㩷㪽㫆㫉㩷㫋㪿㪼㩷㫋㪿㫀㫉㪻㩷㪿㪼㪸㪻㪃㩷㪮 㪣㪃㩷㪮㪮㪃㩷 㪣 㪣㩷㩷㪺㪿㫆㫀㪺㪼㩷㫀㫊㩷㫇㫆㫊㫊㫀㪹㫃㪼
㪻㪼㫋㪼㪺㫋㫀㫆㫅
㪝㪠㪣㪣㩷㪬㪧㩷㪠㪥㪢
㩷㩷㩷㩷㪝㪠㪣㪣㩷㪬㪧
㪫㫀㫄㪼 㪝㪠㪣㪣㩷㪬㪧㩷㪠㪥㪢
㪪㪜㪫㩷㪠㪥㪢㩷㪚㪘㪩㪫㪩㪠㪛㪞㪜
㪄㪄㪄㪄㪄㪄㪄㪄㪄㪄㪄㪄㪄㪄㪄㪄㪄㪄㪄㪄
㪧㫃㪼㪸㫊㪼㩷㪻㪼㪽㫃㪸㫋㪼㩷㩷㪑㪼㫅㫋
㪻㪼㫋㪼㪺㫋㫀㫆㫅
㩷㩷㩷㩷㪮㪘㪪㪟㪠㪥㪞
㪧㪣㪜㪘㪪㪜㩷㪮㪘㪠㪫
㪫㫀㫄㪼 㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㪮㪘㪪㪟㩷㩷㩷㪶㪶㪶㪶㪮㪚㪣
㪪㪜㪫㩷㪮㪘㪪㪟㪠㪥㪞㩷㪣㪠㪨㪬㪠㪛
㪻㪼㫋㪼㪺㫋㫀㫆㫅
㪫㫀㫄㪼 㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㪮㪘㪪㪟㩷㩷㩷㪶㪶㪶㪶㪮㪚㪣
㩷㩷㩷㩷㪮㪘㪪㪟㪠㪥㪞
㪧㪣㪜㪘㪪㪜㩷㪮㪘㪠㪫
㪩㪜㪤㪦㪭㪜 㪚㪘㪩㪫㪩㪠㪛㪞㪜
㪫㪬㪙㪜㩷㪚㪣㪜㪘㪥㪠㪥㪞
㪜㪥㪫 㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㪮㪘㪪㪟
㪚㪦㪤㪧㪣㪜㪫㪜㪛㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㪑㪼㫅㫋
㪚㪦㪤㪧㪣㪜㪫㪜㪛㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㪑㪼㫅㫋
㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㪠㫊㩷㫋㪿㪼㩷㪿㪼㪸㪻㩷㫎㪸㫊㪿㫀㫅㪾㩷㫅㪼㪺㪼㫊㫊㪸㫉㫐㪖
㪻㪼㫋㪼㪺㫋㫀㫆㫅
㪫㫀㫄㪼 㩷㩷㩷㩷㪝㪠㪣㪣㩷㪬㪧
㪝㪠㪣㪣㩷㪬㪧㩷㪠㪥㪢㩷㪤㪚㪰㪢㪶㪶
㪁㪁㪁㪄㪄㪄㪄㪄㪄㪄㪄㪄㪄㪄㪄㪄㪄㪄㪄㪄
㪪㪜㪫㩷㪚㪘㪩㪫㪩㪠㪛㪞㪜
3
㪫㫀㫄㪼
㪜㪥㪫
㪫㫀㫄㪼
㪜㪥㪫
4
㪜㪥㪫 㩷㩷㩷㩷㪝㪠㪣㪣㩷㪬㪧
㪄㪄㪄㪄㪄㪄㪄㪄㪄㪄㪄㪄㪄㪄㪄㪄㪄㪄㪄㪄
㪫㫀㫄㪼 㪝㪠㪣㪣㩷㪬㪧㩷㪠㪥㪢
㪩㪜㪤㪦㪭㪜㩷㪫㪦㪦㪣
5
㪻㪼㫋㪼㪺㫋㫀㫆㫅
㩷㩷㩷㩷㪝㪠㪣㪣㩷㪬㪧
㪧㪣㪜㪘㪪㪜㩷㪮㪘㪠㪫
㪫㫀㫄㪼
㪜㪥㪫 㩷㩷㩷㩷㪝㪠㪣㪣㩷㪬㪧
㪄㪄㪄㪄㪄㪄㪄㪄㪄㪄㪄㪄㪄㪄㪄㪄㪄㪄㪄㪄
6
㪜㪥㪫 㪬㪭㩷㪣㪘㪤㪧
㪜㪥㪫 㪚㪟㪜㪚㪢㩷㪬㪭㩷㪣㪜㪭㪜㪣
㪜㪥㪫 㪚㪟㪜㪚㪢㩷㪬㪭㩷㪣㪜㪭㪜㪣
㪜㪥㪫 㪚㪟㪜㪚㪢㩷㪬㪭㩷㪣㪜㪭㪜㪣
㪚㪟㪜㪚㪢㩷㪬㪭㩷㪣㪜㪭㪜㪣㩷㪓㪼㫅㫋㪕
㪪㪜㪫㩷㪫㪟㪜㩷㪫㪦㪦㪣㩷㩷㩷㩷㪑㪼㫅㫋
㪧㪦㪠㪥㪫㩷㪑㪈
㪈
㪧㪣㪜㪘㪪㪜㩷㪮㪘㪠㪫
㺢㪆㺣
㪈䌾㪋㪃㪘㪣㪣㩿㪃㪈㪄㪈㪃㪈㪄㪉㪃㪉㪄㪈㪃㪉㪄㪉㪃㪊㪄㪈㪃㪊㪄㪉㪃㪋㪄㪈㪃㪋㪄㪉㪀
㪬㪭㩷㪣㪘㪤㪧
㪣㪘㪤㪧㩷㪫㪠㪤㪜㪩㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㪓㪼㫅㫋㪕
㪤㪘㪠㪥㪫㪜㪥㪘㪥㪚㪜
㪟㪜㪘㪛㩷㪮㪘㪪㪟㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㪓㪼㫅㫋㪕
㪜㪥㪫 㪚㪣㪜㪘㪥㪠㪥㪞㩷㪘㪚㪫㪠㪭㪜
㪜㪥㪫 㪪㪫㪘㪫㪠㪦㪥
㪁㪁㪁㪄㪄㪄㪄㪄㪄㪄㪄㪄㪄㪄㪄㪄㪄㪄㪄㪄
㪚㪦㪤㪧㪣㪜㪫㪜㪛㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㪑㪼㫅㫋
㪈䌾㪐㪐
㪮㪿㪼㫅㩷㫐㫆㫌㩷㪺㪿㪸㫅㪾㪼㪻㩷㫀㫋
㪜㪥㪫 㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㪮㪘㪪㪟㩷㩷㩷㪶㪶㪶㪶㪮㪚㪣
㪩㪜㪤㪦㪭㪜㩷㪚㪘㪩㪫㪩㪠㪛㪞㪜
㪤㪘㪠㪥㪫㪜㪥㪘㪥㪚㪜
㪠㪥㪫㪅㪮㪠㪧㪠㪥㪞㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㪓㪼㫅㫋㪕
㪝㪬㪥㪚㪆㺢㪆㺣
㪫㫀㫄㪼 㪚㪣㪜㪘㪥㪠㪥㪞㩷㪘㪚㪫㪠㪭㪜
㪁㪁㪁㪄㪄㪄㪄㪄㪄㪄㪄㪄㪄㪄㪄㪄㪄㪄㪄㪄
㪈䌾㪐㪐
㪮㪠㪧㪜㪩㩷㪚㪣㪜㪘㪥㪠㪥㪞
㪚㪦㪤㪧㪣㪜㪫㪜㪛㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㪑㪼㫅㫋
䇭䇭䇭㪛㫀㫊㫇㫃㪸㫐㪼㪻㩷㪹㫐㩷㫋㫌㫉㫅㫊
㩷㩷㩷㺢㪆㺣
㪤㪘㪠㪥㪫㪜㪥㪘㪥㪚㪜
㪠㪥㪢㩷㪪㪜㪫㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㪓㪼㫅㫋㪕
㪝㪬㪥㪚㪆㺢㪆㺣
1
㪜㪥㪫 㪤㪘㪠㪥㪫㪜㪥㪘㪥㪚㪜
㪚
㪟㪜㪘㪛㩷㪲㪤
㪤㪚㪰㪢㪮 㪣㪴
㶎㪚㫆㫇㪼㩷㫎㫀㫋㪿㩷㪸㫅㩷㪠㪥㪢㩷㪪㪜㪫
㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㪮㪘㪪㪟
㪩㪜㪤㪦㪭㪜㩷㪚㪘㪩㪫㪩㪠㪛㪞㪜
㪜㪥㪫 㪣㪘㪤㪧㩷㪫㪠㪤㪜㪩
㪬㪭㩷㪬㪪㪜㪛㩷㪫㪠㪤㪜㩷㪑㪁㪁㪁㪁㪁㪟
㪜㪥㪫 㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㪮㪘㪪㪟
㪩㪜㪤㪦㪭㪜㩷㪚㪘㪩㪫㪩㪠㪛㪞㪜
㪜㪥㪫 㩷㩷㩷㩷㪮㪘㪪㪟㪠㪥㪞
㪧㪣㪜㪘㪪㪜㩷㪮㪘㪠㪫
㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㪮㪘㪪㪟
㪩㪜㪤㪦㪭㪜㩷㪚㪘㪩㪫㪩㪠㪛㪞㪜
㪤㪘㪠㪥㪫㪜㪥㪘㪥㪚㪜
㪜㪥㪫 㪮㪟㪠㪫㪜㩷㪤㪘㪠㪥㪫㪘㪠㪥
㪚
㪮㪟㪠㪫㪜㩷㪤㪘㪠㪥㪫㪘㪠㪥㩷㪓㪼㫅㫋㪕
㪟㪜㪘㪛㩷㪲 㪮 㪣㪴
㪝㪬㪥㪚㪆㺢㪆㺣
㪤㪘㪠㪥㪫㪜㪥㪘㪥㪚㪜
㪣㪠㪪㪫㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㪓㪼㫅㫋㪕
㪝㪬㪥㪚㪆㺢㪆㺣
㪜㪥㪫 㪟㪜㪘㪛㩷㪫㪜㪤㪧㪅㩷㪚㪦㪥㪫㪩㪦㪣
㪧㪣㪜㪘㪪㪜㩷㪮㪘㪠㪫
㪤㪘㪠㪥㪫㪜㪥㪘㪥㪚㪜
㪮㪠㪧㪜㩷㪣㪜㪭㪜㪣㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㪓㪼㫅㫋㪕
㪝㪬㪥㪚㪆㺢㪆㺣
㪜㪥㪫 㪤㪘㪠㪥㪫㪜㪥㪘㪥㪚㪜
㪮㪠㪧㪜㩷㪣㪜㪭㪜㪣㩷㪑㪈㪈㪇㪆㪈㪇
㪈㪆㪈㪇䌾㪈㪇㪆㪈㪇
㪤㪘㪠㪥㪫㪜㪥㪘㪥㪚㪜
㪠㪥㪝㪦㪩㪤㪘㪫㪠㪦㪥㩷㩷㩷㩷㪓㪼㫅㫋㪕
㪜㪥㪫 㪤㪘㪠㪥㪫㪜㪥㪘㪥㪚㪜
㪭㪜㪩㪪㪠㪦㪥㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㪓㪼㫅㫋㪕
㺢㪆㺣
㪤㪘㪠㪥㪫㪜㪥㪘㪥㪚㪜
㪪㪜㪩㪠㪘㪣㩷㪥㫆㪅㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㪓㪼㫅㫋㪕
㪚㫆㫄㫇㫃㪼㫋㫀㫆㫅
㩷㩷㩷㩷㪮㪘㪪㪟㪠㪥㪞
㪧㪣㪜㪘㪪㪜㩷㪮㪘㪠㪫
㪫㫀㫄㪼 㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㪮㪘㪪㪟
㪪㪜㪫㩷㪚㪣㪜㪘㪥㩷㪫㪦㪦㪣
㪚㫆㫄㫇㫃㪼㫋㫀㫆㫅
㩷㩷㩷㩷㪮㪘㪪㪟㪠㪥㪞
㪧㪣㪜㪘㪪㪜㩷㪮㪘㪠㪫
㪻㪼㫋㪼㪺㫋㫀㫆㫅
㪜㪥㪫 㪮㪟㪠㪫㪜㩷㪤㪘㪠㪥㪫㪘㪠㪥
㩷㩷㩷㪜㪤㪠㪪㪪㪠㪦㪥
㪩㪜㪤㪦㪭㪜㩷㪚㪘㪩㪫㪩㪠㪛㪞㪜
㪧㪣㪜㪘㪪㪜㩷㪮㪘㪠㪫
㪫㫀㫄㪼 㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㪮㪘㪪㪟
㪪㪜㪫㩷㪚㪣㪜㪘㪥㩷㪫㪦㪦㪣
㪜㪥㪫 㩷㩷㩷㩷㪮㪘㪪㪟㪠㪥㪞
㪧㪣㪜㪘㪪㪜㩷㪮㪘㪠㪫
㪜㪥㪫 㩷㩷㩷㩷㪮㪘㪪㪟㪠㪥㪞
㪧㪣㪜㪘㪪㪜㩷㪮㪘㪠㪫
㪫㫀㫄㪼
㪫㫀㫄㪼 㪫㪬㪙㪜㩷㪚㪣㪜㪘㪥㪠㪥㪞
㪚㪦㪤㪧㪣㪜㪫㪜㪛㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㪑㪼㫅㫋
㪫㫀㫄㪼 㪮㪟㪠㪫㪜㩷㪤㪘㪠㪥㪫㪘㪠㪥
㪪㪜㪫㩷㪚㪘㪩㪫㪩㪠㪛㪞㪜
㪫㫀㫄㪼
7
㪜㪥㪫 㪮㪠㪧㪜㪩㩷㪚㪣㪜㪘㪥㪠㪥㪞
㪚㪦㪤㪧㪣㪜㪫㪜㪛㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㪑㪼㫅㫋
㪻㪼㫋㪼㪺㫋㫀㫆㫅
㪝㪠㪣㪣㪠㪥㪞㩷㪬㪧㩷㪠㪥㪢
㪧㪣㪜㪘㪪㪜㩷㪮㪘㪠㪫
᷷ᐲ 㪤㪘㪠㪥㪫㪜㪥㪘㪥㪚㪜
㩷㩷㩷㩷㪧㪩㪠㪥㪫㪠㪥㪞
8
㪜㪥㪫 㪤㪘㪠㪥㪫㪜㪥㪘㪥㪚㪜
㪤㪘㪠㪥㩷㪭㪼㫉㩷㩷㪇㪅㪇㪇
㪜㪥㪫 㪤㪘㪠㪥㪫㪜㪥㪘㪥㪚㪜
㩷㩷㪪㪆㪥㩷㩷㪇㪇㪇㪇㪇㪇㪇㪇
© 2011 MIMAKI ENGINEERING CO.,LTD.
8.2.4
R.2.0
P.1
Maintenance Manual > Operation Flow > Print Mode > MACHINE SETUP
Model UJF-3042/FX Issued 2010.08.27 Revised 2011.09.30 F/W ver 1.80 / 1.00
Rev.
Remark
8.2.5 MACHINE SETUP
㪝㪬㪥㪚㪫㪠㪦㪥
㪜㪥㪫 㪤㪘㪚㪟㪠㪥㪜㩷㪪㪜㪫
㪤㪘㪚㪟㪠㪥㪜㩷㪪㪜㪫㩷㩷㩷㩷㪓㪜㪥㪫㪕
㪪㪜㪫㩷㪫㪠㪤㪜㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㪓㪼㫅㫋㪕
㪝㪬㪥㪚㪆㺢㪆㺣
㪝㪬㪥㪚㪆㺢㪆㺣
㪪㪼㫋㫋㫀㫅㪾㩷㫆㪽㩷㫐㪼㪸㫉
㪪㪼㫋㫋㫀㫅㪾㩷㫆㪽㩷㫄㫆㫅㫋㪿
㪪㪼㫋㫋㫀㫅㪾㩷㫆㪽㩷㪻㪸㫐
㪪㪼㫋㫋㫀㫅㪾㩷㫆㪽㩷㪿㫆㫌㫉
㪪㪼㫋㫋㫀㫅㪾㩷㫆㪽㩷㫄㫀㫅㫌㫋㪼
㪜㪥㪫 㪪㪜㪫㩷㪫㪠㪤㪜
䋾䋼 㪪㪜㪫㩷㪫㪠㪤㪜
䋾䋼 㪪㪜㪫㩷㪫㪠㪤㪜
䋾䋼 㪪㪜㪫㩷㪫㪠㪤㪜
䋾䋼 㪪㪜㪫㩷㪫㪠㪤㪜
䋾䋼
㪛㪘㪫㪜㪔㪉㪇㪇
㪇㪐㪅㪇㪈㪅㪇㪌
㪛㪘㪫㪜㪔㪉㪇㪇㪐㪅㪇
㪇㪈㪅㪇㪌
㪛㪘㪫㪜㪔㪉㪇㪇㪐㪅㪇㪈㪅㪇㪇㪌
㪫㪠㪤㪜㪔㩷㩷㪈㪈㪇㪑㪉㪇㪑㪇㪇
㪫㪠㪤㪜㪔㩷㩷㪈㪇㪑㪉㪉㪇㪑㪇㪇
䋾䋼㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㪇㪇䌾㪐㪐
㪇㪈䌾㪈㪉
㪇㪈䌾㪊㪈
㪇㪇䌾㪉㪊
㪇㪇䌾㪌㪐
㪜㪥㪫 㪪㪜㪫㩷㪫㪠㪤㪜
㪛㪘㪫㪜㪔㪉㪇㪇㪐㪅㪇㪈㪅㪇㪌
㺢䋯㺣
㪪㪜㪫㩷㪫㪠㪤㪜
㪫㪠㪤㪜㪔㩷㩷㪈㪇㪑㪉㪇㪑㪈㪇
㪤㪘㪚㪟㪠㪥㪜㩷㪪㪜㪫
㪤㪤㪆㪠㪥㪚㪟㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㪓㪼㫅㫋㪕
㪝㪬㪥㪚㪆㺢㪆㺣
2.0
㪜㪥㪫
㪜㪥㪫 㪤㪘㪚㪟㪠㪥㪜㩷㪪㪜㪫
㪤㪤㪆㪠㪥㪚㪟㩷㪑㪤
㪤㪤
㪤㪤㪃㪠㪥㪚㪟
1
㪤㪘㪚㪟㪠㪥㪜㩷㪪㪜㪫
㪜㪥㪫 㪤㪘㪚㪟㪠㪥㪜㩷㪪㪜㪫
㪜㪥㪫 㪤㪘㪚㪟㪠㪥㪜㩷㪪㪜㪫
㪍㪇㪇㫄㫃㩷㪚㪘㪩㪫㪩㪠㪛㪞㪜㪓㪼㫅㫋㪕
㪚㪘㪩㪫㪩㪠㪛㪞㪜㩷㪑㪤
㪤
㪚㪘㪪㪜㩷㪮㪜㪠㪞㪟㪫㩷㪔㪊㪊㪉㪍㪾
㪚
㪉㪇㪇䌾㪌㪇㪇
㪝㪬㪥㪚㪆㺢㪆㺣
㪤㪃㪚㪃㪰㪃㪢㪃㪮㪃 㪣
㪤㪘㪚㪟㪠㪥㪜㩷㪪㪜㪫
㪢㪜㪰㩷㪙㪬㪱㪱㪜㪩㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㪓㪼㫅㫋㪕
㪜㪥㪫 㪤㪘㪚㪟㪠㪥㪜㩷㪪㪜㪫
㪢㪜㪰㩷㪙㪬㪱㪱㪜㪩㩷㪑㪦
㪦㪥
㪦㪥㪃㪦㪝㪝
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
© 2011 MIMAKI ENGINEERING CO.,LTD.
8.2.5
R.2.0
P.1
Maintenance Manual > Operation Flow > Service Mode
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8. Operation Flow
8.1
Basic Operation
8.2
Print Mode
© 2011 MIMAKI ENGINEERING CO.,LTD.
8.3
Service Mode
8
Maintenance Manual > Operation Flow > Service Mode > #ADJUST
Model UJF-3042/FX Issued 2010.08.27 Revised 2011.09.30 F/W ver 1.80 / 1.00
Rev.
Remark
8.3.1 #ADJUST
(70%6+10
#&,756'06
'06 #&,756
24+06#&,756GPV
'06 24+06#&,756
5'.'%65K&KT
шщ
(70%шщ
24+06#&,756
5'.'%6$K&KT
#&,756
*'#&#&,756GPV
'06 *'#&#&,756
5.#06#&,756GPV
шщ
2.0
㧪
'06 24+06#&,756
5K&KT24+06
'06 *'#&6'/2%10641.
2.'#5'9#+6
6GOR 24+06#&,756
24+06+0)
%QORNGVKQP
'06 24+06#&,756
'06
24+06#&,756
'0& *#*$
*#*#
㨪
㨪
'06 24+06#&,756
'06 24+06#&,756
24+06#&,756
*#*$
*#*#
*#*$
㨪
㨪
㨪
㧪
6GOR 24+06#&,756
'06 24+06#&,756
'06 24+06#&,756
'06 *'#&6'/2%10641.
24+06+0)
;&2+
$K&KT24+06
2.'#5'9#+6
'06 5.#06#&,756
'06 5.#06#&,756
/1&'PQTOCN
24+0656#46GPV
PQTOCNHKPG
4'/
'06 *'#&6'/2%10641.
2.'#5'9#+6
%QORNGVKQP
24+06#&,756
'0& &2+$K&KT
㨪
1
6GOR 5.#06#&,756
24+06+0)
5.#06#&,756
1XGT.CR
㨪
*'#&#&,756
215+6+10#&,756GPV
(70%шщ
#&,756
4'2.#%'%1706GPV
'06 4'2.#%'%1706
%#464+&)'GPV
шщ
'06 215+6+10#&,756
'06 215+6+10#&,756
'06 *'#&6'/2%10641.
2#66'40RCVVGTP
24+0656#46GPV
2.'#5'9#+6
RCVVGTPRCVVGTP *'#&#..*'#&*'#&
6GOR 215+6+10#&,756
'06 4'2.#%'%1706
%#464+&)'
'06 4'2.#%'%1706
%#464+&)'
'06 4'2.#%'%1706
%#464+&)'
'06
'06 4'2.#%'%1706
0
'06 4'2.#%'%1706
0
'06
'06 4'2.#%'%1706
%#464+&)'
'06 4'2.#%'%1706
%#464+&)'
'06
'06 4'2.#%'%1706
%#464+&)'
4'2.#%'%1706
5%#0%1706
шщ
'06 4'2.#%'%1706
%#464+&)'
24+06+0)
2
4'2.#%'%1706
%#464+&)'
4'2.#%'%1706
75'6+/'*
шщ
4'2.#%'%1706
9+2+0)%1706
шщ
(70%шщ
4'2.#%'%1706
5*16%1706GPV
шщ
'06 4'2.#%'%1706
0
'06 4'2.#%'%1706
0
4'2.#%'%1706
&4#9.'0)6*O
шщ
'06 4'2.#%'%1706
0
3
4'2.#%'%1706
0
4'2.#%'%1706
&4#9#4'#O
шщ
4'2.#%'%1706
+0-2+%GPV
'06 4'2.#%'%1706
%#464+&)'
'06 4'2.#%'%1706
%#464+&)'
'06 4'2.#%'%1706
%#464+&)'
4
4'2.#%'%1706
%#464+&)'
#&,756
&'(#7.65'6GPV
(70%шщ
'06 &'(#7.65'6
5;56'/RCTCOGPV
шщ
'06 &'(#7.65'6
+0+6+#.1-!GPV
&'(#7.65'6
/#+06'RCTCOGPV
шщ
'06 &'(#7.65'6
+0+6+#.1-!GPV
&'(#7.65'6
5'481RCTCOGPV
шщ
'06 &'(#7.65'6
+0+6+#.1-!GPV
&'(#7.65'6
(''&RCTCOGPV
шщ
'06 &'(#7.65'6
+0+6+#.1-!GPV
&'(#7.65'6
*'#&RCTCOGPV
шщ
'06 &'(#7.65'6
+0+6+#.1-!GPV
&'(#7.65'6
+0-RCTCOGPV
шщ
'06 &'(#7.65'6
+0+6+#.1-!GPV
&'(#7.65'6
+0-RCTCOGPV
шщ
'06 &'(#7.65'6
+0+6+#.1-!GPV
&'(#7.65'6
5%#0RCTCOGPV
шщ
'06 &'(#7.65'6
+0+6+#.1-!GPV
&'(#7.65'6
9#8'RCTCOGPV
шщ
'06 &'(#7.65'6
+0+6+#.1-!GPV
&'(#7.65'6
9#8'RCTCOGPV
шщ
'06 &'(#7.65'6
+0+6+#.1-!GPV
&'(#7.65'6
9#8'RCTCOGPV
шщ
'06 &'(#7.65'6
+0+6+#.1-!GPV
&'(#7.65'6
9#8'RCTCOGPV
шщ
'06 &'(#7.65'6
+0+6+#.1-!GPV
&'(#7.65'6
5*+22+0)UGVGPV
'06 &'(#7.65'6
+0+6+#.1-!GPV
© 2012 MIMAKI ENGINEERING CO.,LTD.
5
6
7
8
8.3.1
R.2.0
P.1
Maintenance Manual > Operation Flow > Service Mode > #ADJUST
Model UJF-3042/FX Issued 2010.08.27 Revised 2011.09.30 F/W ver 1.80 / 1.00
Rev.
Remark
8.3.1 #ADJUST
2.0
#&,756
%#22+0)GPV
(70%шщ
'06 %#22+0)
%#2215
㨪
#&,756
#&,7569+2'4GPV
(70%шщ
'06 #&,7569+2'4
9+2'4215
㨪
#&,756
*'#&9#5*GPV
(70%шщ
'06 9#5*
%
*'#&=/%;-9 .?
/QPKVQT
'06 9#5*
4'/18'%#464+&)'
/QPKVQT
9#5*+0)
2.'#5'9#+6
6KOG 9#5*
'06 9#5*+0)
2.'#5'9#+6
6KOG 9#5*
5'6%.'#0%#464+&)'
6KOG 9#5*
'06 9#5*+0)
2.'#5'9#+6
4'/18'%#464+&)'
1
/QPKVQT
9#5*+0)
2.'#5'9#+6
6KOG 9#5*
9+2'4%.'#0+0)
%1/2.'6'&GPV
'06 9#5*
'0& %106+07'
5'6%.'#0%#464+&)'
4'/18'%#464+&)'
/QPKVQT
㧪 9#5*
5'664#05611.
6KOG 67$'%.'#0+0)
9#5*+0)
2.'#5'9#+6
'06
%1/2.'6'&GPV
/QPKVQT
9#5*+0)
2.'#5'9#+6
6KOG 9#5*
4'/18'611.
9#5*+0)
2.'#5'9#+6
/QPKVQT
#&,756
67$'%.'#0+0)GPV
(70%шщ
'06 67$'%.'#0+0)
4'/18'%#464+&)'
#&,756
*'#&+&GPV
(70%шщ
'06 *'#&+&*1FF
'06 *'#&+&*'XGP
'06 *'#&+&*1FF
'06 *'#&+&*'XGP
'06 *'#&+&*1FF
'06 *'#&+&*'XGP
8 1HHUGV
8 1HHUGV
8 1HHUGV
8 1HHUGV
8 1HHUGV
8 1HHUGV
㨪
㨪
㨪
㨪
㨪
㨪
#&,756
4'5'65*16%065GPV
(70%шщ
'06 4'5'65*16%17065
%
*'#&=/%;-9 .?
#&,756
*'#&81.6#&,GPV
(70%шщ
%JGEM *'#&81.6#&,756
'06 *'#&81.6#&,756
24+0656#46GPV
5'.'%6%*'%%*'%-#&,756
67$'%.'#0+0)
%1/2.'6'&GPV
2
'06 1((5'681.6
+0+6+#.1-!GPV
#FLWUV *'#&81.6#&,756
5'.'%6*'XP /
㧨⴫␜଀㧪*'XP / *1FF % *'XP ; *1FF - *'XP 9 *1FF
%
.
'06 *'#&6'/2%10641.
2.'#5'9#+6
6GOR *'#&81.6#&,756
24+06+0)
3
'06 *&1((5'6=?8
'06 *&1((5'6=?8
'06 *&1((5'6=?8
'06
UVCTV8
UVQR8
UVGR8
㨪
㨪
㨪
%QORNGVKQP
'06 *'#&6'/2%10641.
6GOR *'#&81.6#&,756
*'#&81.6#&,756
*&1((5'6=?8
24+0656#46GPV
2.'#5'9#+6
24+06+0)
*'XP / 8
㨪
4
#&,756
*'#&6'/2GPV
(70%шщ
'06 *'#&6'/2
6'/2㩩%
#&,756
':%*#0)'.'&78GPV
(70%шщ
'06 ':%*#0)'.'&78
9#56'#(GPV
'06 ':%*#0)'.'&78
2.'#5'9#+6
#&,756
78WPKVGPV
(70%шщ
'06 78WPKV
78WPKV
'06 78WPKV
5%#0.'8'.
#&,756
5'05'1$564%60GPV
(70%шщ
'06 1$5647%6+101((
#&,756
5'4+#.0QGPV
(70%шщ
'06 5'4+#.01
50
㨪 <
#&,756
&'#.'40QGPV
(70%шщ
'06 &'#.'401
&0
㨪 <
‫ޓޓ‬шщ
'06 14+)+0#&,756
%.'#4 &4#9
㧪 *'#&6'/2%10641.
2.'#5'9#+6
#&,756
6#$.'#&,756GPV
(70%шщ
'06 6#$.'#&,756
5.+&'410
'06 6#$.'#&,756
%1/2.'6'&GPV
#&,756
5'637#.+6;GPV
(70%шщ
'06 5'637#.+6;
'06 5'637#.+6;
'06 5'637#.+6;
:&2+
37#.+6;56#0&#4&
2#55RCUU
56#0&#4&(+0'(#56
㧪
6GOR (''&%1/2
'06 (''&%1/2
'06 *'#&6'/2%10641.
24+06+0)
24+0656#46GPV
2.'#5'9#+6
#&,756
14+)+0#&,756GPV
(70%шщ
#&,756
(''&%1/2GPV
(70%шщ
5
㨪
㨪
6KOG ':%*#0)'.'&78
'06 ':%*#0)'.'&78
4GUGVKTTVKOGGPV
4'#&;VQ':%*#0)'
'06 ':%*#0)'.'&78
2.'#5'219'41((
'06 78WPKV
4'6740.'8'.
㨪
㨪
6
6GOR 14+)+0#&,756
24+06+0)
%QORNGVKQP
'06 14+)+0#&,756
14+)+0#&,756
'0& :;
:;
:㨪
;㨪
'06 5'637#.+6;
*+)*52''&1((
101((
%QORNGVKQP
(''&%1/2
'0& #&,756
㨪
#&,756
9#5*67$'GPV
(70%шщ
'06 9#5*67$'
%
*'#&=/%;-9 .?
'06 5'69#5*611.
%1/2.'6'GPV
'06 9#5*67$'
%1/2.'6'GPV
#&,756
#0).'#&,756GPV
(70%шщ
'06 #0).'#&,756
24+0656#46GPV
'06 *'#&6'/2%10641.
2.'#5'9#+6
6GOR #0).'#&,756
© 2012 MIMAKI ENGINEERING CO.,LTD.
7
Thiscanbesetifthe
numberofpartition
passesisnotminimum.
101((
'06 4'/18'9#5*611.
%1/2.'6'GPV
8
24+06+0)
8.3.1
R.2.0
P.2
Maintenance Manual > Operation Flow > Service Mode > #ADJUST
Model UJF-3042/FX Issued 2010.08.27 Revised 2013.02.08 F/W ver 3.50/3.50
Rev.
Remark
8.3.1 #ADJUST
$'-867
/$1&21),*HQW!
)81&ҍҎ
(17 /$1
,3$''5(66HQW
ҍҎ
'HIDXOW*DWHZD\
/$1
'()$8/7*$7(:$<HQW
ҍҎ
'16$GGUHVV
/$1
'16$''5(66HQW
ҍҎ
6XE1HW0DVN
/$1
68%1(706.HQW
ҍҎ
6073$GGUHVV
/$1
6073$''5(66HQW
ҍҎ
323$GGUHVV
/$1
323$''5(66HQW
ҍҎ
8VHU1DPH
/$1
86(51$0(HQW
ҍҎ
6073EHIRUH323
/$1
323EHIRUH6073HQW
ҍҎ
$323
/$1
$323HQW
2.1
㸼 /$1,3B$''5!
㸼 /$1,3B$''5!
(17 /$1,3B$''5!
㸼 /$1,3B$''5!
''''''''''''
''''''''''''
''''''''''''
''''''''''''
㹼
㹼
㹼
㹼
㸼 /$1'()*:!
㸼 /$1'()*:!
(17 /$1'()*:!
㸼 /$1'()*:!
''''''''''''
''''''''''''
''''''''''''
''''''''''''
㹼
㹼
㹼
㹼
㸼 /$1'16!
㸼 /$1'16!
(17 /$1'16!
㸼 /$1'16!
''''''''''''
''''''''''''
''''''''''''
''''''''''''
㹼
㹼
㹼
㹼
1
(17 /$1
1(70$6.
㹼
(17 /$16073!
ZL]WHFFRMS
㹼 `
(17 /$1323!
ZL]WHFFRMS
㹼 `
(17 /$186(51$0(!
PDLOWHVW
㹼 `
2
(17 /$1
323EHIRUH60732))
212))
(17 /$1
$32321
212))
$'-867
0$&+,1(1$0(HQW!
)81&ҍҎ
(17 0$&+,1(1$0(
0DFKLQH1DPH $
$'-867
3$&.,1*HQW!
(17 3$&.,1*
&203/(7('HQW
3
4
5
6
7
8
© 2012 MIMAKI ENGINEERING CO.,LTD.
8.3.1
R.2.1
P.3
Maintenance Manual > Operation Flow > Service Mode > #TEST
Model UJF-3042/FX Issued 2010.08.27 Revised 2011.09.30 F/W ver
3.00 / 3.00
Rev.
Remark
8.3.2 #TEST
(70%6+10
6'56'06
'06 6'56
%*'%-2#66'40GPV
(70%шщ
6'56
2#4#/'6'4&4#9GPV
(70%шщ
2.0
'06 %*'%-2#66'40
2#66'40
шщ
'06
%*'%-2#66'40
2#66'40
шщ
'06
%*'%-2#66'40
2#66'40
шщ
'06
%*'%-2#66'40
2#66'40
шщ
'06
%*'%-2#66'40
2#66'4001<<.'
шщ
'06
%*'%-2#66'40
)4+&5+<'OO
'06㨪
%*'%-2#66'40
2#66'408.+0'
шщ
'06
%*'%-2#66'40
:;
'06㨪
%*'%-2#66'40
2#66'40*.+0'
шщ
'06
%*'%-2#66'40
:;
'06㨪
%*'%-2#66'40
2#66'405.#06
шщ
'06
%*'%-2#66'40
0Q\\NG=?
4'/
4'/
%*'%-2#66'40
2#66'40)4#&#6'
шщ
'06
%*'%-2#66'40
*+)*52''&1((
%*'%-2#66'40
2#66'408$9
шщ
'06
%*'%-2#66'40
2#66'40*$9
шщ
'06
%*'%-2#66'40
2#66'40(''&'8#.
шщ
'06
%*'%-2#66'40
2#66'40)4+&
шщ
'06
%*'%-2#66'40
2#6'40&412%*'%-
'06 %*'%-2#66'40
2#66'402.16
'06 *'#&6'/2%10641.
2.'#5'9#+6
'06 2#4#/'6'4&4#9
&4#95;56'/2#4#/
шщ
'06 *'#&6'/2%10641.
2.'#5'9#+6
6GOR 2#4#/'6'4&4#9
2#4#/'6'4&4#9
&4#9/#+06'2#4#/
шщ
'06 *'#&6'/2%10641.
2.'#5'9#+6
6GOR 2#4#/'6'4&4#9
2#4#/'6'4&4#9
&4#95'4812#4#/
шщ
'06 *'#&6'/2%10641.
2.'#5'9#+6
6GOR 2#4#/'6'4&4#9
2#4#/'6'4&4#9
&4#9(''&2#4#/
шщ
'06 *'#&6'/2%10641.
2.'#5'9#+6
6GOR 2#4#/'6'4&4#9
2#4#/'6'4&4#9
&4#9*'#&2#4#/
шщ
'06 *'#&6'/2%10641.
2.'#5'9#+6
6GOR 2#4#/'6'4&4#9
2#4#/'6'4&4#9
&4#9+0-2#4#/
шщ
'06 *'#&6'/2%10641.
2.'#5'9#+6
6GOR 2#4#/'6'4&4#9
2#4#/'6'4&4#9
&4#9+0-2#4#/
шщ
'06 *'#&6'/2%10641.
2.'#5'9#+6
6GOR 2#4#/'6'4&4#9
2#4#/'6'4&4#9
&4#95%#02#4#/
шщ
'06 *'#&6'/2%10641.
2.'#5'9#+6
6GOR 2#4#/'6'4&4#9
2#4#/'6'4&4#9
&4#99#8'2#44/
шщ
6GOR 2#4#/'6'4&4#9
'06 2#4#/'6'4&4#9
'06 *'#&6'/2%10641.
%1.145.%6FTQR%
2.'#5'9#+6
24+06+0)
FTQR%FTQR9FTQR%FTQR9FTQR%FTQR9
2#4#/'6'4&4#9
&4#99#8'2#4#/
шщ
'06 2#4#/'6'4&4#9
'06 *'#&6'/2%10641.
%1.145.%62.'#5'9#+6
-%/;9
6GOR 2#4#/'6'4&4#9
2#4#/'6'4&4#9
&4#99#8'2#4#/
шщ
'06 2#4#/'6'4&4#9
'06 *'#&6'/2%10641.
%1.145.%62.'#5'9#+6
-%/;92
6GOR 2#4#/'6'4&4#9
'06 2#4#/'6'4&4#9
'06 *'#&6'/2%10641.
%1.145.%62.'#5'9#+6
-%/;9
6GOR 2#4#/'6'4&4#9
2#4#/'6'4&4#9
&4#99#8'2#4#/
Thisisnotdisplayerfor
feedevalutionpattern.
%*'%-2#66'40
:&2+
'06
%*'%-2#66'40
;&2+
'06
'06 %*'%-2#66'40
%*'%-2#66'40
2.165K&KTRCUU
9+&6*FQVU
'06㨪
:
:
%*'%-2#66'40
$'69''0FQVU
'06㨪
1
1PN[HQT8.+0'5.#06
CPF*.+0'
1PN[HQT)4+&
2
4'/ %*'%-2#66'40
2#66'402.16
'06
'06
101((
© 2012 MIMAKI ENGINEERING CO.,LTD.
1PN[HQT8
.+0'5.#06*.+0'CPF
)4+&
Thiscanbesetifthenumber
ofpartitiompassesisnot
*'#&6'/2%10641.
2.'#5'9#+6
6GOR
%*'%-2#66'40
24+06+0)
3
%*'%-2#66'40
24+06+0)
6GOR %*'%-2#66'40
4
24+06+0)
5
24+06+0)
24+06+0)
24+06+0)
6
24+06+0)
24+06+0)
24+06+0)
24+06+0)
7
24+06+0)
24+06+0)
24+06+0)
8
24+06+0)
8.3.2
R.2.0
P.1
Maintenance Manual > Operation Flow > Service Mode > #TEST
Model UJF-3042/FX Issued 2010.08.27 Revised 2011.09.30 F/W ver
1.80 / 1.00
Rev.
Remark
8.3.2 #TEST
6'56
5'05146'56GPV
(70%шщ
2.0
'06 5'05146'56
щ 5'05146'56
щ 5'05146'56
щ 5'05146'56
щ 5'05146'56
щ 5'05146'56
щ
%QXGT12'0
;1TI10
:1TI10
<1TI10
9KRGT1TI1((
9QTM*GKIJV10
12'0%.15'
101((
101((
101((
101((
101((
щ 5'05146'56
щ 5'05146'56
щ 5'05146'56
щ 5'05146'56
щ 5'05146'56
щ
5'05146'56
+PM%VTI10
+PM%VTI10
+PM%VTI10
+PM%VTI10
+PM%VTI10
+PM%VTI10
101((
101((
101((
101((
101((
101((
щ 5'05146'56
щ 5'05146'56
щ 5'05146'56
щ 5'05146'56
щ 5'05146'56
щ
5'05146'56
+PM0GCT1+PM0GCT1+PM0GCT1+PM0GCT1+PM0GCT1+PM0GCT11-0'0&
1-0'0&
1-0'0&
1-0'0&
1-0'0&
1-0'0&
1
5'05146'56
%QQN(NQCV10
101((
6'56
%*'%-/'/14;GPV
'06 %*'%-/'/14;
%*'%-5&4#/
ш㧛щ
'06 %*'%-/'/14;
5&4#/
%*'%-/'/14;
%*'%-(41/
ш㧛щ
'06 %*'%-/'/14;
(41/
%*'%-/'/14;
%*'%-54#/
'06 %*'%-/'/14;
54#/
9JGPFCVCGTTQTQEEWTU
9JGPCFFTGUUGTTQTQEEWTU
%*'%-/'/14;
5&4#/&ZZZZZZZZ
%*'%-/'/14;
5&4#/#ZZZZZZZZ
9JGPUWOGTTQTQEEWTU
(70%шщ
6'56
-';$1#4&6'56GPV
%*'%-/'/14;
(41/57/'4414
9JGPFCVCGTTQTQEEWTU
9JGPCFFTGUUGTTQTQEEWTU
%*'%-/'/14;
54#/&ZZZZZZZZ
%*'%-/'/14;
54#/#ZZZZZZZZ
-';$1#4&6'56
-G[ =(70%6+10?
-';$1#4&6'56
-G[ =4'/16'?
-';$1#4&6'56
-G[ ='06'4?
-';$1#4&6'56
-G[ =<72?
-';$1#4&6'56
-';$1#4&
6'56
-G[ =6'56&4#9?
-';$1#4&6'56
-';$1#4&
6'56
-G[ =%.'#0+0)?
-';$1#4&6'56
-';$1#4&
6'56
-G[ =&#6#%.'#4?
-';$1#4&6'56
-';$1#4&
6'56
='0&? '0&6'56
-';$1#4&6'56
-';$1#4&
6'56
-G[ =<&190?
-';$1#4&6'56
-G[ =72?
-';$1#4&6'56
-G[ =&190?
-';$1#4&6'56
-G[ =.'(6?
-';$1#4&6'56
-G[ =4+)*6?
'06 -';$1#4&6'56
-G[ 010'
2
-';$1#4&6'56
-G[ =57$29459?
(70%шщ
6'56
6'56.%&GPV
(70%шщ
'06 3
4
6'56
%*'%-6'/2GPV
(70%шщ
'06 %*'%-6'/2
*65+0-㩩%
'06 %*'%-6'/2
щ *'#&㩩%
'06 %*'%-6'/2
щ *'#&㩩%
'06 %*'%-6'/2
щ *'#&㩩%
'06 %*'%-6'/2
щ *'#&㩩%
'06 %*'%-6'/2
щ *'#&㩩%
'06
щ
%*'%-6'/2
*'#&㩩%
'06 %*'%-6'/2
щ *'#&㩩%
'06 %*'%-6'/2
щ *'#&㩩%
'06 %*'%-6'/2
щ .'&78㩩%
'06 %*'%-6'/2
щ .'&78㩩%
'06 %*'%-6'/2
щ .'&78㩩%
'06
щ
%*'%-6'/2
4#&+#6'4㩩%
'06 %*'%-6'/2
щ *&$#5'㩩%
'06 %*'%-6'/2
щ *&$#5'㩩%
'06 %*'%-6'/2
щ .%&㩩%
5
9JGPGTTQTKUQEEWTU
6'56
%*'%-+0-+%GPV
(70%ǔщ
'06 %*'%-+0-+%
'06 %06
AAAAAA
'0& %06
+%'44
6'56
%*'%-78.'8'.GPV
(70%шщ
'06 %*'%-78.'8'.
5'66*'611.GPV
'06 %*'%-78.'8'.
78.'8'.
'06 %*'%-78.'8'.
56#46%*'%-78GPV
6'56
#)'+0)GPV
'06 #)'+0)
:;<5'481GPV
'06 %*'%-78.'8'.
%*'%-+0)
6
4'64;
'06 %*'%-78.'8'.
4'64; '0&
'06 :;<5'481
'06 :;<5'481
'06 :;<5'481
'06 :;<5'481
'06 :;<5'481
'06
<725#
<725#
<&05#
<&05#
<
5㨪
#㨪
5㨪
#㨪
㨪
'06 :;<5'481
'06 :;<5'481
'06 :;<5'481
'06
:;<5'481
:5#
:5#
;5#
;5#
5㨪
#㨪
5㨪
#㨪
ш㧛щ
7
'06 :;<5'481
'06 :;<5'481
:;<5'481
:;
:;
:;
VQ OCZKOWO XCNWG
VQOCZKOWOXCNWG
VQ OCZKOWO XCNWG
VQOCZKOWOXCNWG
#)'+0)
:;5'481GPV
'06 :;5'481
'06 :;5'481
'06 :;5'481
'06 :;5'481
'06
:5#
:5#
;5#
;5#
5㨪
#㨪
5㨪
#㨪
'06 :;5'481
'06 :;5'481
:;5'481
:;
:;
:;
VQOCZKOWOXCNWG
VQOCZKOWOXCNWG
ш㧛щ
(70%шщ
#)'+0)
:5'481GPV
ш㧛щ
'06 :5'481
'06 :5'481
'06 :5'481
'06 :5'481
:5#
:5#
:
:
5㨪
#㨪
VQOCZKOWOXCNWG
#)'+0)
;5'481GPV
ш㧛щ
'06 ;5'481
'06 ;5'481
'06 ;5'481
'06 ;5'481
;5#
;5#
;
;
5㨪
#㨪
VQOCZKOWOXCNWG
#)'+0)
27/2/1614GPV
ш㧛щ
'06 27/2/1614
'06 27/2/1614
;DCT215(4106
%#21((
(41064'#4
'06 27/2/1614
27/2=?
101((
'06 27/2/1614
'06 27/2/1614
'06
52''&
TRO
#%%
TROU
㨪
㨪
'06 27/2/1614
27/2/1614
':'%6+/'U
27/256#46GPV
U㨪F
© 2012 MIMAKI ENGINEERING CO.,LTD.
8
'06 27/2/1614
':'%6+/'UU
8.3.2
R.2.0
P.2
Maintenance Manual > Operation Flow > Service Mode > #TEST
Model UJF-3042/FX Issued 2010.08.27 Revised 2011.09.30 F/W ver
1.80 / 1.00
Rev.
Remark
8.3.2 #TEST
2.0
#)'+0)
9+2'4/1614GPV
ш㧛щ
'06 9+2'4/1614
'06 9+2'4/1614
64;6+/'5
4'/#+0
㨪
#)'+0)
<5'481GPV
ш㧛щ
'06 <5'481
'06 <5'481
'06 <5'481
'06 <5'481
'06 <5'481
<725#
<725#
<&05#
<&05#
<
5㨪
#㨪
5㨪
#㨪
㨪
#)'+0)
9+2'*'#&GPV
ш㧛щ
'06 9+2'*'#&
'06 9+2'*'#&
64;6+/'5
4'/#+0
㨪
#)'+0)
%#22+0)GPV
ш㧛щ
'06 %#22+0)
'06 %#22+0)
'06 %#22+0)
9CKVKPIVKOGU
':'%6+/'KPHKP
㨪
KPHKPUGEUGEOKPOKPOKPJTJTJTFC[
9JGP6'5624+06KU10
'06 %.'#0+0)
'06 %.'#0+0)
'06 %.'#0+0)
'06 %.'#0+0)
'06 %.'#0+0)
'06
%
6;2'PQTOCN
6'5624+061((
2CWUGVKOGU
64;6+/'5
*'#&=/%;-9 .?
PQTOCNUQHVJCTF
101((
㨪
㨪
#)'+0)
%.'#0+0)GPV
ш㧛щ
#)'+0)
4#&+#61427/2GPV
ш㧛щ
'06 4#&+#61427/2
27/2.'8'.
1
%.'#0+0)
4'/#+0
㨪
ш㧛щ
㨪
㨪
#)'+0)
(.#5*+0)GPV
ш㧛щ
'06 (.#5*+0)
&165+<'.
#)'+0)
:OGCUWTGGPV
:
OGCUWTG
GPV
ш㧛щ
'06 :OGCUWTG
'06 :OGCUWTG
'06 :OGCUWTG
'06 :OGCUWTG
'06 :OGCUWTG
: 5
:5
#
#
:5
:
5
##
:UVGROO
:
UVGR OO
:YCKVU
:
YCKV U
2OOOQXG
2OO
OQXG
5㨪
#㨪
㨪
㨪U
#)'+0)
%1/GPV
'06 %1/
'06 %1/56#
&'8+%'5.%656#
56#56#5.4)5.&7-';$1#4&
2
'06 (.#5*+0)UJQV
'06 (.#5*+0)
'06 (.#5*+0)
4'(4'5*.'8'.
64;6+/'5
4'/#+0
5/.
.'8'.㨪.'8'.
㨪
6GUVQHTGEQIPK\GF2%$
3
4
6'56
%*'%-'0%1&'4GPV
(70%шщ
'06 %*'%-'0%1&'4
/ZZZZ'ZZZZ
6'56
'8'06.1)GPV
'06 0Q&&&&$****
****;;//&&JJOOUU
&6%
5
(70 '8'06.1)
% 54%*260:::::::
TGRTGUGPVCVKQP
(70%шщ
6'56
%*'%-/'55#)'GPV
(70%шщ
6'56
6'56*#4&9#4'GPV
'8'06.1)
+0+6+#.1-!GPV
'06 %*'%-/'55#)'
9#40+0)/'55#)'GPV
ш㧛щ
%*'%-/'55#)'
'4414/'55#)'GPV
656 '8'06
TGUGTXGF
'06 '4414
%1//#0&
6
'06 5;56'/*1.6 '70-190'44
'06 6'56*#4&9#4'
'06 1WV2QTV
5'.'%61WV2QTV
4GIZZZZZ
1WV2QTV+P2QTV#&%&#%2ED.KUV
'06 1WV2QTV
DKV1((
+P2QTV
4GIZZZZZ
'06 ZZZZZ
****A::::
#&%
4GIZZZZZ
'06 ZZZZZ
&#%
4GIZZZZZ
'06 ZZZZZ
(70%шщ
'06 1WV2QTV
DKV1((
㨪
101((
7
&6% ZZZZZ
㨪
2ED.KUV
</%1-
6'56
0'#4'0&GPV
'06 0'#4'0&
%
*'#&=/%;-9 .?
'06 0'#4'0&
GZGEWVKPI
© 2012 MIMAKI ENGINEERING CO.,LTD.
8
8.3.2
R.2.0
P.3
Maintenance Manual > Operation Flow > Service Mode > #PARAMETER
Model UJF-3042/FX Issued 2010.08.27 Revised 2011.09.30 F/W ver 1.80 / 1.00
Rev.
Remark
8.3.3 #PARAMETER
(70%6+10
2#4#/'6'4'06
2.0
'06 5;56'/2#4#/'6'4
4)4+2
'06 5;56'/2#4#/'6'4
㪮㪿㪼㫅㩷㫋㪼㫉㫄㫀㫅㪸㫋㫀㫅㪾㩷㫎㫀㫋㪿㩷㪠㪥㪠㪫㪠㪘㪣㪔㪈
5;56'/2#4#/'6'4
+0+6+#.1-!GPV
2#4#/'6'4
/#+06'RCTCOGPV
(70%шщ
'06 /#+06'2#4#/'6'4
/'%#V[R
'06 /#+06'2#4#/'6'4
/#+06'2#4#/'6'4
+0+6+#.1-!GPV
2#4#/'6'4
5'481RCTCOGPV
(70%шщ
'06 5'4812#4#/'6'4
E%[ENG
'06 5'4812#4#/'6'4
EE
5'4812#4#/'6'4
+0+6+#.1-!GPV
2#4#/'6'4
(''&RCTCOGPV
(70%шщ
'06 (''&2#4#/'6'4
5[UVGO
'06 (''&2#4#/'6'4
(''&2#4#/'6'4
+0+6+#.1-!GPV
2#4#/'6'4
*'#&RCTCOGPV
(70%шщ
'06 *'#&2#4#/'6'4
*#$
'06 *'#&2#4#/'6'4
*'#&2#4#/'6'4
+0+6+#.1-!GPV
2#4#/'6'4
+0-RCTCOGPV
(70%шщ
'06 +0-2#4#/'6'4
(KNN7R
'06 +0-2#4#/'6'4
+0-2#4#/'6'4
+0+6+#.1-!GPV
2#4#/'6'4
+0-RCTCOGPV
(70%шщ
'06 +0-2#4#/'6'4
%#26+/'
'06 +0-2#4#/'6'4
+0-2#4#/'6'4
+0+6+#.1-!GPV
2#4#/'6'4
&'$7)RCTCOGPV
(70%шщ
'06 &'$7)2#4#/'6'4
25'2#
'06 &'$7)2#4#/'6'4
&'$7)2#4#/'6'4
+0+6+#.1-!GPV
2#4#/'6'4
5%#0RCTCOGPV
(70%шщ
'06 5%#02#4#/'6'4
*F0HTGS
'06 5%#02#4#/'6'4
5%#02#4#/'6'4
+0+6+#.1-!GPV
2#4#/'6'4
9#8'RCTCOGPV
(70%шщ
'06 9#8'2#4#/FTQR%
'06 9#8'2#4#/
8AQHU
%1.145.%6
FTQR%
FTQR%FTQR9FTQR%FTQR9
'06 9#8'2#4#/FTQR%
9#8'2#4#/FTQR%
+0+6+#.1-!GPV
2#4#/'6'4
9#8'RCTCOGPV
(70%шщ
'06 9#8'2#4#/
'06 9#8'2#4#/%1.145.%68AQHU
-%/;9
'06 9#8'2#4#/
9#8'2#4#/+0+6+#.1-!GPV
2#4#/'6'4
9#8'RCTCOGPV
(70%шщ
'06 9#8'2#4#/
'06 9#8'2#4#/8AQHU
%1.145.%6-%/;92
'06 9#8'2#4#/
9#8'2#4#/+0+6+#.1-!GPV
2#4#/'6'4
9#8'RCTCOGPV
'06 9#8'2#4#/
'06 9#8'2#4#/- '06 9#8'2#4#/
%1.145.%68AQHU
-%/;9
㪹㫀㫋㩷㪼㫅㫋㫉㫐㩷㪹㫐㩷㪛㪘㪫㪘㪚㪣㪜㪘㪩㩷㫂㪼㫐
ZZZ2#4#/'6'4
9#8'2#4#/+0+6+#.1-!GPV
'06 2#4#/'6'4
5;56'/RCTCOGPV
(70%шщ
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
© 2011 MIMAKI ENGINEERING CO.,LTD.
8.3.3
R.2.0
P.1
D500552-23-18072013
IT
FW 3.5 / 3.5